RockWorks TM

v. 2004

RockWare ®
Earth Science & GIS Software
2221 East St., Suite 101 Golden, CO 80401 USA
tel: + 303-278-3534 fax + 303-278-4099 www.rockware.com
Copyright Notice RockWorks2004

Copyright Notice
This software and accompanying documentation are copyrighted and contain proprietary
information. Duplication of the original diskette(s) is for the sole use of the purchaser.
Copyright 1983-2004 by RockWare, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
2221 East St., Suite 101
Golden, CO 80401 USA
303-278-3534 fax: 303-278-4099
www.rockware.com
email: [email protected]
first edition: January, 2004

Improvement Notice
RockWare, Inc. reserves the right to make improvements in this product at any time and
without notice.

Limited Warranty
This software, documentation, and other provided material are provided "as is" without
warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied
warranties of merchantability, and fitness for a particular purpose, and non-infringement of
third-party proprietary rights. In no event shall RockWare, Inc. be liable for incidental
damages, consequential damages, lost profits, lost savings, or any other damages arising out of
the use of or inability to use the software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the software contains any defect which
adversely affects the use of the software, your sole remedy shall be limited to either a refund of
all or part of the purchase price, or replacement of the software, which determination shall be
made in the sole discretion of RockWare, Inc.

Trademarks / Owners:
RockWorks, RockWorks99, Stratos, RockWare / RockWare, Inc.
ArcView, Shapefile, E00 / ESRI, Inc.
AutoCAD / AutoDesk
Microsoft, Windows / Microsoft Corporation.
NOeSYS / Fortner Research
Slicer Dicer / Visualogic
Surfer / Golden Software, Inc.
All other company and product names are TM or ® of their respective trademark owners.

ii
RockWorks2004 Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 - Introduction 1
Welcome........................................................................................................................................ 1
System Requirements ................................................................................................................... 2
Installing RockWorks – The First Time .......................................................................................... 2
Install RockWorks from a CD................................................................................................. 2
Install RockWorks from the internet....................................................................................... 3
Re-Installing RockWorks ....................................................................................................... 4
Licensing RockWorks .................................................................................................................... 5
The License Agreement ........................................................................................................ 5
Choosing Your License Type ................................................................................................ 5
Single User Mode, Running in Trial Mode / Unlocking .......................................................... 7
Multi-User, Unlocking............................................................................................................. 8
Network User, Logging In ...................................................................................................... 9
Starting Up RockWorks ............................................................................................................... 10
Starting RockWorks the First Time ...................................................................................... 10
Starting RockWorks the Next Time...................................................................................... 11
Changing the Licensing ............................................................................................................... 12
Uninstalling RockWorks............................................................................................................... 12
What's New in RockWorks2004................................................................................................... 14
RockWorks2002 Users Read This............................................................................................... 20
RockWorks99 Users Read This................................................................................................... 20
LogPlot Users Read This............................................................................................................. 21
Getting Help................................................................................................................................. 22
A Brief Tour.................................................................................................................................. 24

Chapter 2 - The Borehole Manager 31

Entering Data - Overview............................................................................................................. 31
Importing RockWorks99 Data...................................................................................................... 32
Importing ASCII Data................................................................................................................... 33
Importing Excel Data ................................................................................................................... 33
Using the Borehole Manager ....................................................................................................... 34
Entering the Borehole Data ......................................................................................................... 38
Entering the Borehole Data - Overview ............................................................................... 38
How to enter well location data............................................................................................ 39
How to enter well orientation or downhole survey data ....................................................... 41
How to enter lithology data .................................................................................................. 42
How to enter stratigraphy data ............................................................................................ 44
How to enter interval (geochemistry, geotechnical) data..................................................... 46
How to enter point (geophysical) data ................................................................................. 49
How to enter fracture data ................................................................................................... 51
How to enter water level data .............................................................................................. 52
How to enter log symbols .................................................................................................... 53
How to enter log patterns .................................................................................................... 54
View a well data summary ................................................................................................... 55
Data Tab Tools .................................................................................................................... 56
Other Data Topics................................................................................................................ 57
Exporting the Borehole Data ............................................................................................... 66
Transferring the Borehole Data ........................................................................................... 66

iii
Table of Contents RockWorks2004

Chapter 3 - The Geological Utilities Datasheet 67

Entering Your Data ...................................................................................................................... 67
Using the Datasheet .................................................................................................................... 69
Laying Out Your Datasheet ......................................................................................................... 74
Data for Maps and General Diagrams................................................................................. 74
Grid Model Lists .................................................................................................................. 83
Data for Solid Models .......................................................................................................... 86
Hydrology/Hydrochemistry Data.......................................................................................... 87
Planar and Linear Data ....................................................................................................... 89
Geotechnical Data............................................................................................................... 92
3D Graphic Data.................................................................................................................. 93
Other Graphic Data ........................................................................................................... 101
Editing the Datasheet ................................................................................................................ 102
Importing Data ........................................................................................................................... 108
Exporting Data from the Geological Utilities Datasheet ............................................................ 109
Transferring Data to the Borehole Manager .............................................................................. 109
Digitizing Data ........................................................................................................................... 110

Chapter 4 – Creating Point, Contour and 3D Surface Maps, and

other Maps 111
Point Maps................................................................................................................................. 111
Borehole Manager: Creating a 2-Dimensional Borehole Location Map ............................ 112
Geological Utilities: Creating an EZ Symbol Map.............................................................. 113
Geological Utilities: Creating Multivariate Maps ................................................................ 113
2D Contour Maps ...................................................................................................................... 114
To grid or not to grid? ........................................................................................................ 114
Geological Utilities: Creating a Delaunay-Triangulation Contour Map ............................. 116
Geological Utilities: Creating a Grid-Based Contour Map ................................................ 116
Borehole Manager: Creating 2D Borehole Elevation Maps............................................... 117
Borehole Manager: Creating 2D Stratigraphic Structure Maps ........................................ 118
Borehole Manager: Creating 2D Stratigraphic Thickness (Isopach) Maps ....................... 119
3D Surface Maps....................................................................................................................... 119
Geological Utilities: Creating a Grid-Based 3D Surface Map ............................................ 120
Manually Building Stacked 3D Surfaces ........................................................................... 121
Borehole Manager: Creating 3D Stratigraphic Structure Maps ......................................... 121
Borehole Manager: Creating 3D Stratigraphic Thickness Maps ....................................... 122
Land Grid Maps ......................................................................................................................... 123
Creating Section Maps ...................................................................................................... 123
Creating Lease Maps ........................................................................................................ 124
Shotpoint Maps.......................................................................................................................... 124
Global Maps .............................................................................................................................. 125
Borehole Manager: Translating Map Coordinates..................................................................... 125
Geological Utilities: Translating Jeffersonian Locations (RTS) to X,Y....................................... 126
Geological Utilities: Translating Jeffersonian Polygons (RTS) to X,Y ....................................... 126
Geological Utilities: Translating Map Coordinates..................................................................... 126

Chapter 5 - Creating Strip Logs & Log Sections 127

Creating Strip Logs & Log Sections - Overview ........................................................................ 127
Creating 2D Logs, Log Profiles, and Projected Log Sections ................................................... 127
Creating a Single 2D Strip Log.......................................................................................... 127
What is a Log Profile? ....................................................................................................... 128
Displaying Multiple Logs in a 2D Log Profile ..................................................................... 129
iv
RockWorks2004 Table of Contents

What is a Hole to Hole Cross Section? ............................................................................. 130

Displaying Multiple Logs in a 2D Hole to Hole Section...................................................... 131
Creating 3D Logs....................................................................................................................... 132
Creating a Single 3D Strip Log .......................................................................................... 132
Displaying Multiple Logs in 3D .......................................................................................... 132
Log Item Summary .................................................................................................................... 133

Chapter 6 - Creating Stratigraphy Profiles, Sections, Maps,

Fences, and Blocks 135
Creating Stratigraphic Diagrams - Overview ............................................................................. 135
Creating Stratigraphic Profiles ................................................................................................... 135
Creating Stratigraphic Cross Sections....................................................................................... 136
Modeled Sections (Grid-Based) ........................................................................................ 136
“Straight” Sections (No Interpolation) ................................................................................ 137
Creating Stratigraphic Fence Diagrams..................................................................................... 139
Modeled Fences ................................................................................................................ 139
Straight Fences.................................................................................................................. 140
Manually Building 3D Stratigraphic Fences ....................................................................... 141
Creating Stratigraphy-Based Geology Maps ............................................................................. 142
Creating Plan-View Stratigraphy Maps...................................................................................... 142
Creating Stratigraphic Block Diagrams...................................................................................... 143
Manually Building 3D Stratigraphic Diagrams ........................................................................... 144
Picking Stratigraphic Contacts................................................................................................... 145
Creating a Stratigraphic Volume Report .................................................................................... 146
Exporting Stratigraphy Data....................................................................................................... 147

Chapter 7 - Water Levels: Display as Profiles, Sections, Plans,

Fences, and Blocks 149
Creating Water Level Diagrams - Overview .............................................................................. 149
Creating a Water Level Profile Diagram .................................................................................... 149
Creating a Water Level Section Diagram .................................................................................. 150
Creating a Water Level Fence Diagram .................................................................................... 150
Creating a 2D Water Level Surface or Thickness Map.............................................................. 151
Creating a Water Level Block Diagram...................................................................................... 152

Chapter 8 - Creating Solid Models, Profile, Section, Fence, Plan

and Surface Diagrams 153
Solid Modeling Introduction ....................................................................................................... 153
What to do with a Solid Model? ................................................................................................. 153
Geological Utilities: Creating a Solid Model of XYZG Data ....................................................... 154
Borehole Manager: Creating Lithology Solid Models, Fences, Profiles, Sections, Surface and Plan
Maps .......................................................................................................................................... 155
Creating Lithology Diagrams - Overview ........................................................................... 155
Creating a 3D Lithology Block Diagram............................................................................. 156
Creating a Lithology Fence Diagram ................................................................................. 157
Creating a Lithology Profile Diagram................................................................................. 158
Creating a Lithology Section Diagram ............................................................................... 158
Creating Lithology-Based Geology Maps .......................................................................... 159
Creating Plan-View Lithology Maps................................................................................... 160
Borehole Manager: Creating Solid Models of Downhole Interval Data: Models, Fences, Profiles,
Sections, and Plan Maps ........................................................................................................... 161
Creating I-Data Diagrams - Overview................................................................................ 161
v
Table of Contents RockWorks2004

Creating a 3D Isosurface or All-Voxel Diagram of Interval Data ....................................... 161

Creating a Fence Diagram of Interval Data....................................................................... 162
Creating a Profile Diagram of Interval Data....................................................................... 163
Creating a Multi-Panel Section Diagram of Interval Data.................................................. 163
Creating a Plan-View Map of Interval Data ....................................................................... 164
Borehole Manager: Creating Solid Models of Downhole Point Data: Models, Fences, Profiles,
Sections, and Plan Maps........................................................................................................... 165
Creating P-Data Diagrams - Overview .............................................................................. 165
Creating a 3D Isosurface or All-Voxel Diagram of Point Data........................................... 165
Creating a Fence Diagram of Point Data .......................................................................... 166
Creating a Profile Diagram of Point Data .......................................................................... 167
Creating a Multi-Panel Section Diagram of Point Data ..................................................... 167
Creating a Plan-View Map of Point Data........................................................................... 168
Borehole Manager: Creating Solid Models of Downhole Fracture Data: Models, Fences, Profiles,
Sections, and Plan Maps........................................................................................................... 169
Creating Fracture Diagrams - Overview............................................................................ 169
Creating a 3D Isosurface or All-Voxel Diagram of Fracture Data...................................... 169
Creating a Fence Diagram of Fracture Data ..................................................................... 170
Creating a Profile Diagram of Fracture Data ..................................................................... 171
Creating a Multi-Panel Section Diagram of Fracture Data ................................................ 171
Creating a Plan-View Map of Fracture Data...................................................................... 172

Chapter 9 - Laying Out Vertical Profiles, Sections & Fences 173

Drawing a Profile Line ............................................................................................................... 173
Drawing a Multi-Panel Cross Section Trace.............................................................................. 174
Drawing Fence Diagram Panels................................................................................................ 176

Chapter 10 - Grid Model Tools 179

Grid Model Tools - Overview ..................................................................................................... 179
Computing Grid Statistics .......................................................................................................... 179
Performing Arithmetic Operations with Grid Models ................................................................. 180
Filtering Grid Models ................................................................................................................. 181
Editing Grid Models ................................................................................................................... 182
Performing a Slope/Aspect Analysis on Grid Models................................................................ 182
Creating Directional Maps of Slope/Aspect Grid Models .......................................................... 183
Performing a Trend Surface Analysis........................................................................................ 184
Importing Grid Models into RockWorks ..................................................................................... 185
Exporting RockWorks Grid Models............................................................................................ 186

Chapter 11 – Solid Model Tools 187

Solid Menu Tools - Overview..................................................................................................... 187
Computing Solid Model Statistics .............................................................................................. 187
Performing Arithmetic Operations with Solid Models ................................................................ 188
Filtering Solid Models ................................................................................................................ 188
Creating and Manipulating Boolean Solid Models..................................................................... 189
Converting and Extracting Solid Model Data............................................................................. 191
Editing Solid Model Slices ......................................................................................................... 193
Morphing Solid Models .............................................................................................................. 194
Importing Solid Models .............................................................................................................. 194
Exporting Solid Models.............................................................................................................. 195
Initializing a Blank Solid Model .................................................................................................. 195

vi
RockWorks2004 Table of Contents

Chapter 12 - Computing Volumes 197

Volume Menu Tools - Overview................................................................................................. 197
Geological Utilities: EZ Volume of X, Y, Thickness Data........................................................... 197
Geological Utilities: Extracting Solids ........................................................................................ 199
Borehole Manager: Creating a Lithologic Volume Report ......................................................... 200
Borehole Manager: Creating a Stratigraphic Volume Report .................................................... 201
Borehole Manager: Creating Detailed Geochemistry Volume Reports and Diagrams .............. 202

Chapter 13 – Hydrology/Hydrochemistry Tools 203

Computing Drawdown for a Single Well .................................................................................... 203
Computing a Drawdown Surface ............................................................................................... 204
Plotting Water Level versus Precipitation .................................................................................. 205
Computing Total Dissolved Solids ............................................................................................. 205
Computing Ion Balance ............................................................................................................. 206
Creating Piper Diagrams ........................................................................................................... 206
Creating Stiff Diagrams.............................................................................................................. 207

Chapter 14 - Directional Statistics Tools 209

Creating Arrow Maps ................................................................................................................. 209
Gridding and Mapping Lineation Frequencies, Lengths, and Intersections............................... 210
Creating Lineation Maps............................................................................................................ 210
Computing Lineation Bearing, Length, and Midpoint................................................................. 211
Creating Rose Diagrams ........................................................................................................... 212
Importing DXF Lineations into the Datasheet ............................................................................ 212
Computing the Orientation of a Single Plane Based on Three Points ....................................... 213
Computing Plane Orientations Based on Three Points ............................................................. 213
Computing Planar Intersections................................................................................................. 214
Computing Planar Intersections - Planar Pairs.......................................................................... 214
Rotating 3D Data ....................................................................................................................... 215
Creating Stereonet Diagrams .................................................................................................... 215
Converting Strike Bearing to Dip Direction ................................................................................ 216
Creating Strike and Dip Maps.................................................................................................... 216
Converting Polylines to Planes .................................................................................................. 217
Analysis of Movement of Slope Materials.................................................................................. 217
Translating Coordinates............................................................................................................. 218

Chapter 15 - Statistical Tools 219

Statistical Tools - Overview ....................................................................................................... 219
Computing Univariate Statistics................................................................................................. 219
Creating Histogram Plots........................................................................................................... 220
Creating a Scattergram (X, Y) Plot for Two Variables ............................................................... 221
Creating a Ternary Diagram for Three Variables....................................................................... 221
Normalizing Data ....................................................................................................................... 222
Standardizing Data .................................................................................................................... 222
Generating Random Numbers................................................................................................... 222

Chapter 16 - Survey Tools 223

Survey Menu - Overview ........................................................................................................... 223
Converting Bearing / Distance Data and Creating Maps ........................................................... 223
Converting Triangulation Data to XYZ ....................................................................................... 223
Setting Up X,Y Stations ............................................................................................................. 224

vii
Table of Contents RockWorks2004

Interpolating Points Along a Line............................................................................................... 224

Computing Downhole Survey Coordinates ............................................................................... 225

Chapter 17 –Accessory Image Tools 227

3D Images ................................................................................................................................. 227
3D Discs ............................................................................................................................ 227
3D Bitmaps ........................................................................................................................ 228
Float a bitmap at a particular elevation ..................................................................... 228
Drape a bitmap over a surface .................................................................................. 228
Display bitmap images as vertical panels ................................................................. 229
Display bitmap images as horizontal panels ............................................................. 229
Display Bitmaps on a 3-Dimensional Cube ............................................................... 229
3D Oriented Objects.......................................................................................................... 230
3D Perimeter ..................................................................................................................... 230
3D Spheres ....................................................................................................................... 231
3D Storage Tanks ............................................................................................................. 231
Create a horizontal tank image ................................................................................. 232
Create a vertical tank image...................................................................................... 232
3D Triangles ...................................................................................................................... 232
3D Tubes ........................................................................................................................... 233
Other Tools........................................................................................................................ 233
2D Utilities ................................................................................................................................. 233
Other Tools................................................................................................................................ 234
Displaying a RockWorks PicShow .................................................................................... 234
Translate BMP and JPG Images....................................................................................... 234
Raster Conversion............................................................................................................. 234
Raster to RKW .................................................................................................................. 234
Rotate Bitmap.................................................................................................................... 235
Digitize from Bitmap .......................................................................................................... 235

Chapter 18 - Miscellaneous Utilities 237

Color Numbers .......................................................................................................................... 237
Financial Utilities........................................................................................................................ 237
Geometry Calculator.................................................................................................................. 237
Geological Time Chart............................................................................................................... 237
Igneous Rock Identification ....................................................................................................... 238
Periodic Table............................................................................................................................ 238
Trigonometry Calculator ............................................................................................................ 238
Unit Converter ........................................................................................................................... 238
Describe Rock ........................................................................................................................... 238
Compile RCL File ...................................................................................................................... 238

Chapter 19 – Displaying 2D Images - RockPlot2D 239

RockPlot2D Overview................................................................................................................ 239
Managing RockPlot2D Files ...................................................................................................... 239
Importing Files into RockPlot2D ................................................................................................ 241
Viewing RockPlot2D Files ......................................................................................................... 242
On-Screen Tools: Measuring and Digitizing.............................................................................. 247
Manipulating RockPlot2D Files.................................................................................................. 251
Adding Border Annotations to RockPlot2D Images........................................................... 251
Adding Legends to RockPlot2D Images............................................................................ 252
Combining 2D Plot Files.................................................................................................... 252
Rescaling 2D Plot files ...................................................................................................... 253
viii
RockWorks2004 Table of Contents

Clipping RockPlot2D Files ................................................................................................. 254

Combining Multiple RockPlot2D Images into a Montage .................................................. 255
Converting Plot File Coordinates ....................................................................................... 255
Printing RockPlot2D Files .......................................................................................................... 256
Exporting RockPlot2D Files ....................................................................................................... 257

Chapter 20 - RockPlot3D 259

RockPlot3D Overview................................................................................................................ 259
Managing RockPlot3D Files ...................................................................................................... 259
Viewing RockPlot3D Files.......................................................................................................... 263
Manipulating RockPlot3D Images.............................................................................................. 265
Reference Items ................................................................................................................ 265
Data Items ......................................................................................................................... 266
RockPlot3D Surface Settings .................................................................................... 268
RockPlot3D Isosurface Settings ................................................................................ 268
RockPlot3D Morph Settings ...................................................................................... 269
RockPlot3D Solid Model Settings.............................................................................. 270
RockPlot3D Slice Settings......................................................................................... 271
RockPlot3D Fence Panel Settings ............................................................................ 272
General RockPlot3D Data Items - Adjusting Transparency ...................................... 272
RockPlot3D Legends ......................................................................................................... 273
Importing Images into RockPlot3D ............................................................................................ 273
Exporting RockPlot3D Images................................................................................................... 274
RockPlot3D Reference .............................................................................................................. 274
Troubleshooting File / Open .............................................................................................. 274
Troubleshooting OpenGL .................................................................................................. 275

Chapter 21 – ReportWorks 277

ReportWorks Overview.............................................................................................................. 277
Managing ReportWorks Files .................................................................................................... 278
View and Layout Options........................................................................................................... 281
Drawing Tools............................................................................................................................ 282
Working with Layers .......................................................................................................... 282
Inserting a Symbol into a ReportWorks Page.................................................................... 283
Drawing Lines, Polylines, Polygons, and Rectangles on a ReportWorks Page ................ 284
Inserting Text into a ReportWorks Page............................................................................ 285
Inserting a RockPlot Map or Diagram (RKW File) into a ReportWorks Page.................... 286
Inserting a Raster Image into a ReportWorks Page .......................................................... 287
Inserting a Geo-Referenced Raster Image into a ReportWorks Page .............................. 288
Inserting a Scale Bar into a ReportWorks Page ................................................................ 289

Chapter 22 - RockWorks Tables and System Libraries 293

Borehole Manager Tables ......................................................................................................... 293
Lithology Tables (Keyword Tables) ................................................................................... 293
Stratigraphy Tables............................................................................................................ 294
Graphic Libraries ....................................................................................................................... 295
Pattern Tables ................................................................................................................... 295
Symbol Tables ................................................................................................................... 299
Diagram Legend Tables ............................................................................................................ 302
Color Index Tables............................................................................................................. 302
Line Style Index Tables ..................................................................................................... 303
Pattern Index Tables ......................................................................................................... 303
Symbol Index Tables ......................................................................................................... 303
ix
Table of Contents RockWorks2004

Range Lookup Tables ............................................................................................................... 304

Colorfill Tables................................................................................................................... 304
Contour Tables .................................................................................................................. 304
Symbol Range Tables ....................................................................................................... 304
Other Tables.............................................................................................................................. 305
Borehole Survey Tables .................................................................................................... 305
DLG Attributes Table......................................................................................................... 305
Fault Segments Tables ..................................................................................................... 305
Land Grid Tables ............................................................................................................... 306
Montage Tables................................................................................................................. 308
Polygon Vertices Tables.................................................................................................... 309
X,Y Points Tables.............................................................................................................. 309
X,Y Pairs Tables................................................................................................................ 309
Density Factors Table ....................................................................................................... 310
Table Editor Tools ..................................................................................................................... 310

Chapter 23 - Reference 313

Summary of RockWorks File Types .......................................................................................... 313
Program Preferences ................................................................................................................ 316
Program Defaults....................................................................................................................... 318
Project Dimensions.................................................................................................................... 319
Gridding Reference ................................................................................................................... 321
Gridding Methods .............................................................................................................. 322
General Gridding Options.................................................................................................. 322
Grid Model Dimensions ..................................................................................................... 324
RockWorks Grid File Format ............................................................................................. 325
Solid Modeling Reference ......................................................................................................... 326
Solid Modeling Methods .................................................................................................... 327
General Solid Modeling Options........................................................................................ 328
Filtering X, Y, Z and/or G Data .......................................................................................... 329
Solid Model Resolution...................................................................................................... 329
Stratigraphy Model versus Stratigraphy Solids.......................................................................... 331
2-Dimensional Map Layers........................................................................................................ 334
2D Profile and Section Options ................................................................................................. 334
3-Dimensional Image Settings................................................................................................... 335
File Structures ........................................................................................................................... 336
ATD File Structure............................................................................................................. 336
Borehole Data File Structure ............................................................................................. 337
Exported Borehole Data Structure .................................................................................... 337
Troubleshooting......................................................................................................................... 337

Glossary 339
Index 349

x
RockWorks2004 Introduction

Chapter 1 - Introduction
Welcome
RockWorks2004 is the newest version of RockWare’s integrated geological data
management, analysis, and visualization software package. RockWorks specializes in
visualization of subsurface data as logs, cross sections, fence diagrams, solid models,
structural and isopach maps in both 2D and dynamic 3D windows.
The borehole data manager is used for easy entry of well data: geophysical /
geotechnical / geochemical measurements, observed lithologies, stratigraphic contacts,
water levels, fractures, downhole well surveys, all in linked spreadsheet windows. From
this data you can create point, contour, plan-view, and lithology/stratigraphy surface
(geology) maps; logs; cross sections; and profiles. In addition there’s an assortment of 3D
diagrams: logs, surfaces, fence diagrams, and solid models.
RockWorks also contains a “flat” spreadsheet-style data window for use with the
program’s geological utilities: basic gridding and contouring, solid modeling,
volumetrics, hydrology and hydrochemistry tools (drawdown & flow diagrams, Piper and
Stiff diagrams), 2D and 3D feature analysis (rose and stereonet diagrams, lineation maps
and densities), statistical computations and diagrams (histograms, scatterplots, ternary
plots), survey mapping, coordinate conversions, and more.
There are three graphic display windows in RockWorks. RockPlot2D displays 2-
dimensional, “flat” images such as maps, logs, and cross sections. It offers save, export,
and printing tools, as well as on-screen digitizing and measurement tools. RockPlot3D is
an interactive graphic display window that utilizes OpenGL for easy visualization of 3D
images such as logs, fence diagrams, solid models, and 3D surfaces. It provides
interactive rotation, panning, zooming, and layering of different images. Adjust lighting,
filter "blobs," adjust colors, append images easily and quickly. View volumes instantly on
the screen. ReportWorks is the newest graphic tool, used to lay out pages for display and
print. Insert RockPlot graphics (maps, cross sections, logs, diagrams, etc.) and raster
images, draw scale bars and shapes, add text and legends, and more. Print and export
tools take your RockWorks images to presentation stage quickly and easily.
RockWorks2004 runs is available with single-user, multi-user and network licenses.
Upgrading? RockWorks2004 a slightly redesigned look from RockWorks2002, but you
should find your way around quite easily (see also page 20). Be sure to look at the
“What’s New” section (page 14) for details about ReportWorks, new tools, and expanded
features. RockWorks99 users will find 99% of their familiar tools, plus the new Borehole
Manager for entering data, RockPlot3D for 3D display, and ReportWorks for page layout.
See page 20 All previous users should refer to “A Brief Tour” on page 24.

1
Introduction RockWorks2004

System Requirements
The minimum system requirements for RockWorks2004 may vary, depending on the type
of data you will be processing and the types of diagrams you will be creating and viewing.
For example, a ternary diagram plot displayed in RockPlot2D and created from a simple
datasheet may require fewer resources than a dense solid model manipulated in
RockPlot3D and created from detailed downhole geochemistry data.
However, RockWorks2004 as a whole, with all its new tools, will require more computer
resources than were necessary in RockWorks99. In general, the more RAM, the faster the
processor, the newer the operating system, the better. Here is our recommended system
setup for use of RockWorks2004:
Windows2000, NT, or XP.
256 MB of RAM or better.
400 mHz or faster Pentium III or newer CPU.
Plenty of free disk space.
Display set to GREATER than 800 x 600 pixels.
Windows98 and ME may be compatible operating systems but are not generally
recommended due to inherent memory and other limitations.

Installing RockWorks – The First Time

RockWorks can be installed either from a RockWare-supplied CD-ROM or from a file
you've downloaded from our web site.

Install RockWorks from a CD

! Skip this step if you have already downloaded the installation program from the internet
and don't wish to overwrite it with what may be an older version on the CD-ROM. The
version of RockWorks that's on the web is almost always the newest version.
To install RockWorks from a RockWare-supplied CD, follow these steps:
1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The CD menu
program should start up automatically.
(If it does not, use Windows Explorer to browse for the CD drive. Double-click on
the “setupcd” program in the root of the CD to start up the CD menu program.)
2. The CD menu program will display a variety of different programs that you can
install as demos or “trialware” in addition to RockWorks. For now, however, simply
select RockWorks2004 from the menu along the left. You should see a description
about the program in the pane to the right. Click the Install Program button in that
pane to start the installation.
2
RockWorks2004 Introduction

3. Follow the recommended installation settings unless you specifically to install the
program in a different folder. To proceed to the next screen at each installation step,
click on the Next button. Should you need to go back to a previous window, click on
the Back button. To cancel the installation entirely, click Cancel.
4. When the installation is complete, the licensing program will start up automatically.
Refer to Licensing RockWorks (page 5) for information about how to set up the
licensing.
5. You can return to the CD’s menu once licensing is complete to install additional
RockWorks files as you wish:
Install HTML Help:
What this is: RockWorks now has detailed help pages displayed right in every
program window, read from hundreds of HTML documents. Normally these will
be read from the internet.
Do not install HTML help if you have connection to the internet and your
connection is fairly fast, since you will always see the most up-to-date
information about the program, read directly from the web.
Do install HTML help locally if you aren’t connected to the internet or if your
connection is slow. If the program finds the help topics locally, it won’t look for
them on the internet. They take up about 15 MB of space on your hard drive.
Install Searchable Help:
What this is: The window-linked HTML topics described above are also
compiled into a single help file organized with a table of contents, indexed, and
searchable for any keyword you enter. This is displayed in the typical Windows
fashion, when you click on the main Help / Contents menu item in the program.
Do install compiled help if you have the space (appx 7 MB) and the time. They
can complement the HTML help nicely by offering the index and search tools.
6. If you have purchased the software, please fill out the registration card for your
license, or register online at http://www.rockware.com/register.html.

Install RockWorks from the internet

If you wish to download and install RockWorks from the internet, follow these steps:
1. Access the RockWare web site: www.rockware.com
2. Click on the "Download" tab on the home page.
3. Fill in the requested information (name, email address), and click the Download Now
button.

3
Introduction RockWorks2004

4. On the next page, locate RockWorks2004 in the list, insert a check in its check-box,
and click the Download Now button at the bottom of the page.
You can only download one item at a time from the RockWare web site (this prevents
overzealous downloaders from clogging up the site). If you want to download the
RockWorks2004 HTML Help, Searchable Help, User Manual, or other items, you can
do so after the program download is complete.
5. Save the downloaded file (“RW2004_installation.exe”) in your "temp" folder on your
computer.
6. When the download is complete, use Windows Explorer or My Computer to locate
the downloaded file in your “temp” folder, and double-click on this
“RW2004_installation.exe” file. This will start up the RockWorks installation
program.
7. Follow the recommended installation settings unless you specifically to install the
program in a different folder. To progress to the next screen at each installation step,
click on the Next button. To go back to a previous window, click on the Back button.
To cancel the installation entirely, click Cancel.
8. When the installation is complete, the licensing program will start up automatically.
Refer to page 5 for information about how to set up the licensing.

Re-Installing RockWorks
RockWare releases updates to the RockWorks2004 program when new features are added,
problems are fixed, etc. These new revisions are posted to our web site. They’ll also be
included on the next pressing of the RockWare CD. Like the original program, the
updates can be installed from a CD or from an internet download.
To re-install RockWorks, you should follow the same instructions as listed in the previous
two topics for step-by-step instructions about installing. You can install right over the top
of the existing copy of the program.

! If this a re-installation, the program will automatically create backup copies of

existing program reference tables and libraries in \My Documents\RockWorks2004\
System. Be sure to check that folder after installation to restore necessary tables.
Re-installing RockWorks does not require un-installing the previous version. In fact,
we discourage this because system libraries and other tables will be removed.
Re-installing should not require a new unlocking code for single user or multiple-
user/single computer licenses.
Check out the Help / Download & Install options in RockWorks itself.

4
RockWorks2004 Introduction

Licensing RockWorks
After running the installation program, the next step is to license the software.

The License Agreement

The first screen you’ll see is a display of the license agreement. Please read this. It’s
important that you understand the terms of the license.
1. If you accept the terms of the license agreement, click in the I accept the terms of this
agreement box, and continue on to the next step.
2. If you do not accept the terms of the license agreement, click the Cancel button. The
program will not launch. Contact RockWare for details.

Choosing Your License Type

Next, you’ll probably see a screen similar to this:

5
Introduction RockWorks2004

1. First, you need to specify who you are: click in the End User button if you will be
using the software. Click in the Administrator button if you are installing the
software for someone else. This makes a difference in the licensing process:
You must be the End User to unlock a Single User license.
You must be an Administrator or an End User with standard user or higher privileges
(e.g. administrator) to unlock the Multi-User license or to set up the Network license.
2. Now, select the type of license you have purchased. There’s more information about
the license types displayed in the right pane of the program window.
Single User: If you purchased a Single User license, click that button. With this
license type, RockWorks is licensed to be used by a single designated person. You
should purchase this license type if you will be the only user of the program.
Running in this mode requires an "unlocking code" that is supplied by RockWare. If
you purchased a Single User license, your registration number (on a sticker on your
CD or user manual) will contain the letters CS or AS. If you are waiting to receive
your unlocking code, can run the program in “Trialware” mode (see below).
! If you are an Administrator (installing the program for another person), you will
need to cancel the licensing at this time and have the actual user log into the
computer. The Single User licensing information is stored under the Current
User registry. The actual user can rejoin this licensing sequence by starting up
the RockWorks2004 application after they’ve logged into Windows.
Multi-User: Use this mode if you have purchased a Multiple-Users / One Computer
license for the program. With this license type, RockWorks can be installed onto a
single computer and used by multiple people on that computer, one at a time. You
should purchase this license type if more than one person will need to access the
program on the computer, such as in an academic lab where multiple students will
need to use the software. If you purchased a Multiple-User / Single Comuter license,
your registration number, on a sticker on your CD or user manual, will contain the
letters CM or AM. Running in this mode requires an "unlocking code" that is
supplied by RockWare.
Network: Click in this button if you have purchased a network license for the
program, which allows more than one person to access the program at the same time.
If you purchased a Network license, your registration number, on a sticker on your
CD or user manual, will contain the letters CN or AN. The network version requires
a special network license certificate file, which RockWare will email to you. This file
must be stored on the server in a location to which all users have access.

6
RockWorks2004 Introduction

Trialware: If you haven’t purchased a license yet and wish to run in “Trialware”
mode, choose Single User. In Trialware mode all program functionality is intact
except some of the export tools are disabled. There is also a demo banner plotted on
the output graphics. You can input your own data, import data, create graphics, etc.
In Trialware mode, you are allowed to use the program for 10 days from licensing or
for 25 launchings, whichever comes first. You will see the usage/time meter on the
startup screen. Trialware mode can be converted to a Single User license by entering
a RockWare-supplied unlocking code. Trialware mode can also be extended if you
contact RockWare.
3. Click Continue when the user and license type have been selected.
The program will now copy sample and system files to a RockWorks2004 folder in My
Documents. It will also initialize all of the program’s variables.

Single User Mode, Running in Trial Mode / Unlocking

Single Users will now see a window that displays the number of user sessions and days
remaining.

1a. To use RockWorks in Trial mode, click the OK button. (See Starting Up, page 10.)
1b. Or, if you are ready to license your program (or if your trial period displays as
expired), you can unlock the software by clicking on the Unlock Trial Version button
and entering the following information.
! PLEASE BE SURE that, to unlock the program, you are the end user and are logged
into Windows under your normal Windows login.
Registration Number: Type into this field the letters and numbers that are printed on
a sticker on the CD, User Manual, and registration card you received from RockWare.

7
Introduction RockWorks2004

Single-User registration numbers contain the letters CS or AS. If you opted to

downloaded the program at purchase, you can contact RockWare for this number.
Licensee Name: Type in your company’s name or, if purchased individually, your
name. This will be displayed in the program’s startup screen.
Installation Number: This is a number that’s generated by the RockWorks program
when it’s first started. It is unique to each computer and each user.
Unlocking Code: This activates the Single-User license and is supplied by RockWare
when you send us your Registration Number and Installation Number, described
above. Contact RockWare by:
Email: [email protected]
Telephone:
within Colorado: 303-278-3534
within the U.S.: 1-800-775-6745
outside the U.S.: + 303-278-3534
Fax: + 303-278-4099
Please include:
Your name,
Your company’s name (if applicable),
The Registration Number (above),
The Installation Number (above), and
How we should contact you (email, telephone, or fax).
2. You can click OK to proceed, and jump to page 10, Starting Up RockWorks.

Multi-User, Unlocking
Note: You must have standard user or higher privileges (e.g. administrator) to unlock the
Multiple Users / Single Computer license. Restricted users should contact their system
administrator.
Multiple Users / Single Computer licensees will now see a window where the licensing
information can be entered.
1. Enter the requested information.
Licensee Name: Type in your organization’s name. This will be displayed in the
program’s startup screen.
Registration Number: Type into this field the letters and numbers that are printed on
a sticker on the CD, User Manual, and registration card you received from RockWare.

8
RockWorks2004 Introduction

Multi-User registration numbers contain the letters CM or AM. If you opted to

downloaded the program at purchase, you can contact RockWare for this number.
Installation Number: This is a number that’s generated by the RockWorks program
when it’s first started. It is unique to each computer.
Unlocking Code: This activates the Multiple-User license and is supplied by
RockWare when you send us your Registration Number and Installation Number,
described above. Contact RockWare by:
Email: [email protected]
Telephone:
within Colorado: 303-278-3534
within the U.S.: 1-800-775-6745
outside the U.S.: + 303-278-3534
Fax: + 303-278-4099
Please include:
Your name,
Your company’s name (if applicable),
The Registration Number (above),
The Installation Number (above), and
How we should contact you (email, telephone, or fax).
2. You can click OK to proceed, and jump to page 10, Starting Up RockWorks.

Network User, Logging In

Note: You must have standard user or higher (e.g. administrator) privileges to set up the
network licensing. Restricted users should contact their system administrator.
Network licensees will now see a window where their licensing information can be
entered.
1 Enter the requested information.
Licensee Name: Type in your company’s name. This will be displayed in the initial
splash screen.
Registration Number: Type into this field the letters and numbers that are printed on
a sticker on the CD, User Manual, and registration card you received from RockWare.
Multi-User registration numbers contain the letters CN or AN. If you opted to
download the program at purchase, you can contact RockWare for this number.

9
Introduction RockWorks2004

Certificate File: Use the Browse button to access the folder in which the network's
certificate file "RW2004.LIC" has been installed. This is a file that is supplied by
RockWare after your purchase, initialized for the number of seats you purchased.
You may not run the network version of RockWorks without access to the Certificate
File which maintains the network count, among other things. To obtain the certificate
file, contact RockWare by:
Email: [email protected]
Telephone:
within Colorado: 303-278-3534
within the U.S.: 1-800-775-6745
outside the U.S.: + 303-278-3534
Fax: + 303-278-4099
Please include:
Your name,
The name of the company/institution that purchased the network license,
The number of seats you purchased,
The Registration Number (discussed above), and
The email address to which the license file should be sent.
When you/your network administrator receives the certificate file via email, save the
file to a folder on the server to which all users have read and write access.
(Note to RockWorks2002 users: Specifying the User Folder is no longer necessary.
All license types will make use of the My Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder
for storage of user-specific files.)
2. You can click OK to proceed.

Starting Up RockWorks

Starting RockWorks the First Time

After you have installed the program as described in the separate topic (page 2), and you
have licensed the program as described in the previous topics, the program will now
display an introductory startup screen that lists your license name and registration number.
1a. Single Users and Multi-Users: If you wish to hide the splash screen upon future
launchings, insert a check in the Skip this menu the next time the program is started
check-box, or (once Rockworks has launched) use the View / General Preferences /
Skip Intro Screen setting.

10
RockWorks2004 Introduction

1b. Network users only will be prompted to enter:

Default User ID: This is typically your name or other unique identifying string. The
ID string is limited to 20 characters, including spaces. Your ID will be stored in the
network Certificate File while you are using the program. When you exit RockWorks
using the program's File / Exit command, your ID will be logged out of the
Certificate File. The Certificate File will allow a specific number of unique users to
log in at a time; for example if you purchased a 5-seat license, then 5 unique ID’s are
allowed to be logged in at any one time.
2. Click Next to continue.
3. The program will then ask you to select a project folder to work in.
If you have created your own data files, browse for that folder name.
If you are just beginning with the program, choose the default “Samples” folder (in
“My Documents\RockWorks2004”) which contains sample files you can use with the
tutorial.
If you are starting a new project use the New Folder button to create a new folder.
The program will be displayed. RockWorks2004 contains two separate data windows,
with separate sets of tools: The Borehole Manager is used for entering/managing borehole
data, and the Geological Utilities Datasheet is where you enter more general types of data.
4. To access either data window, just click on its tab, displayed along the left side of the
program window.
You will also see a tutorial window pop up onto the screen. This contains lessons about
the program in general, and about specific tools within the program. We highly
recommend that you go through some of these lessons to acquaint yourself with how
RockWorks works. This window will display each time the program starts; you can turn it
off using the View / General Preferences / Tutorials setting.

Starting RockWorks the Next Time

If you’ve already installed and run RockWorks before, follow these steps to start up the
program.
1. Click on the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Click on the Programs or All Programs option.
3. Click on the RockWare item, and then on the RW2004 program icon that's displayed
in the pop-up menu.

11
Introduction RockWorks2004

If you have hidden the startup screen, you will be prompted to choose this session’s
project folder – see #5 below.
If you have not hidden the startup screen, it will be displayed, showing your current
license type, registration number, and licensee name.
If you are running the program in “Trialware’ mode, you will see the number of sessions
and the number of days you have left in your trial period. If RockWorks has been run
before on this computer, the uses and/or days may be used up. This can be true even if
you had uninstalled the software before re-installing. If you need more time, contact
RockWare and we may be able to provide an “extension code.”
4. If you want to continue with the current license type, click the Next button.
If you need to change your license type, such as changing from Single-User to
Multiple User, click the Change Licensing button and follow the instructions below.
5. Choose the project folder in which you wish to work. Remember that you can change
project folders at any time when the program is running.
The main RockWorks program window will be displayed.

Changing the Licensing

If you wish to change the type of license under which RockWorks is being run, you’ll
need to contact RockWare to make the necessary arrangements. Then, you’ll click on the
Change License Type button on the introductory screen. This will launch the RockWorks
licensing program and display the screens described in the topics above. The RockWorks
licensing program can also be run from the Start menu.

Uninstalling RockWorks
If you own a Single User or Multiple-User / Single Computer license of RockWorks and
you want to install your license on a different computer, you’ll need to remove the
program from the original machine. Follow these steps to remove the RockWorks
licensing and program from your computer:

Step 1: Remove the licensing from your computer.

1. Start up the RockWorks program.
2. At the initial startup screen, click Change License Type. (This screen can also be
accessed by running the RockWorks Licensing program in the RockWorks program
folder or via Start / Programs / RockWare.)

12
RockWorks2004 Introduction

3. At the RockWorks Licensing Options screen, click the Remove Licensing button at
the bottom of the window.
The program will prompt you, “Are you sure you want to remove all licensing
information?”
4. Click Yes.
The program will remove all RockWorks licensing from your computer. It will also
display a Status Code.
5. Write down the Status Code that is displayed; RockWare employees may ask you for
this number to verify the license removal.
Note that this license removal does not affect the Trialware day/use counter.

Step 2: Remove the program itself.

1. Access the Windows Control Panel: Click on the Start button on the Windows
taskbar. Click on the Control Panel option (Windows XP) or first on the Settings
item and then on Control Panel (Windows2000).
2. Double-click on the Add/Remove Programs icon.
3. Locate the RockWorks2004 item in the program list.
4. Select the Change/Remove or Remove option, depending on your version of
Windows.
Windows will launch its remove-software program. It will offer you either Automatic or
Custom removal. We generally recommend following the Automatic removal, as this will
remove the program files from your computer, but will not touch any of your own data
files.

13
Introduction RockWorks2004

What's New in RockWorks2004

New ReportWorks program for easy page layout of RockWorks diagrams, bitmaps,
legends, logos, and more.

Easy solid model morphing in RockPlot3D given a list of existing models, with AVI
movie export.

14
RockWorks2004 Introduction

Multi-panel profiles of lithology, stratigraphy, geochemistry/geophysics, fracture, and

aquifer data.

Include line contours on your color-filled geochemistry/geophysics profile and section

panels.

Append strip logs automatically to all Borehole Manager solids, fences, profiles, and
sections.

15
Introduction RockWorks2004

Geology maps, representing lithology or stratigraphy models where they intersect a

designated surface.

Disabled contours along clipped boundaries.

Automatic profile/section/fence location maps.

16
RockWorks2004 Introduction

Clip logs to display a user-specified elevation range.

New fracture modeling: solids, profiles, sections, and fences.

2D plan maps of lithology, stratigraphy, I-data, P-data, and fracture models.

17
Introduction RockWorks2004

Easier borehole ground surface modeling for mapping, model filtering, and more.

Revamped bitmap handling in 2D and 3D images – much faster.

Revamped XLS file transfer in and out of RockWorks – much faster processing.

18
RockWorks2004 Introduction

Automatic project dimensions settings for model and images.

Fully scriptable program operation (RCL) - all program options!

19
Introduction RockWorks2004

Faster borehole handling prior to processing with additional user control over temporary
file creation.
Support of international number formats, such as those using “,” for decimal places and
“.” or spaces for digit groupings.
And much more. See the Help / Online Information / RockWorks Revision History for
details.

RockWorks2002 Users Read This

RockWorks2004 will read all of your RockWorks2002 data files (BH, ATD), tables
(TAB), models (GRD, MOD), graphics (RKW, XML), and other files. They should all be
fully compatible with RockWorks2004.

RockWorks99 Users Read This

Your Data
If your RockWorks99 ATD files contain downhole stratigraphy and/or linked downhole
data files (LIT, HIS, CUR, ZON files) you will now work with your data in the Borehole
Manager, the new data window. See Borehole Manager Overview (page 31) and
Importing RockWorks99 Files (page 32) into the Borehole Manager.
If your ATD files do not represent borehole data, you will continue to use the Geological
Utilities datasheet. The information in your template (TEM) file will now be stored as a
header in the ATD file, so you won’t have to manage two files. See the Geological
Utilities Datasheet Overview (page 67) and Opening a RockWorks99 datasheet (page 69).

Your Plots
If you have a bunch of "RKW" files containing RockWorks99 images, you can still open
these into RockWorks2004. Use the File / RockPlot2D menu command to open a
RockPlot2D window, and use its File / Open command to open existing RKW images.
RockWorks2004 also contains an OpenGL 3-D plotting window: RockPlot3D (see page
259). This is the window that will be used to display any new 3D images you create, such
as 3D log displays, fence diagrams, solid models, and 3D surfaces. You cannot open
RKW files in the RockPlot3D window.
There is a new ReportWorks program used for laying out pages for print and display –
include RockWorks images, bitmaps, shapes, text, and legends. See page 277 for
information about ReportWorks.
20
RockWorks2004 Introduction

Other New Features

The Borehole Manager allows entry of downhole survey measurements for deviated or
inclined borings.

LogPlot Users Read This

Rockware has developed a LogPlot to RockWorks Importer program that functions as a
batch importer of multiple LogPlot DAT files, creating RockWorks BH files. Using either
log design or DAT file information, this tool can determine the LogPlot entities that can
be imported into RockWorks, and, where possible, it will offer the user control over the
specific import options. Lithology/stratigraphy data (LogPlot: “LITH”), geochemical data
(LogPlot “Histogram”), geophysical data (LogPlot “Curve”), log symbols, and text can be
imported. Once imported into RockWorks, the user has a variety of program tools at
hand: strip logs, cross sections, solid models, surface maps, and more.
The LogPlot to RockWorks Importer is installed and run as a separate application from
either LogPlot or RockWorks. It also has a separate Help system.
You can obtain the LogPlot to RockWorks Importer program on the RockWare CD. It is
also available on the RockWare Download page (in the Free Downloads section); see the
link in the RockWorks Help / Download & Install menu or go to www.rockware.com
and click on the Download tab. There is no charge for this importer.

21
Introduction RockWorks2004

Getting Help
The following documentation and help resources are available for the RockWorks2004
program:
1. On-line tutorial:

This small help window will pop up onto the screen display when you first start the
program. It contains lessons on a variety of items pertaining to the Borehole Manager
and the Geological Utilities datasheets. You can leave the tutorial window displayed
on your screen as you follow the lesson instructions. Or, you can click the Print
button to print the current screen.
If you get tired of seeing the tutorial pop up each time you start the program, it can be
turned off by adjusting a setting in the View / General Preferences window.
Remove the check-mark from the Tutorial check-box, and the next time you start the
program, the tutorial window will not be displayed. You can re-activate its launch-
on-startup just by re-inserting a check in its View / General Preferences setting.
You can also launch the tutorials at any time by choosing the Help / Tutorial
command.
The tutorials are read from a standard Windows Help file “tutorial.hlp” installed with
the program. The tutorial typically resides in the C:\Program Files\RockWare\Help
folder.
22
RockWorks2004 Introduction

2. Program “abstracts” (HTML help):

The RockWorks2004 main window and menu windows contain a “pane” along the
right side that is used to display complete help information about the current topic.
These are read from HTML files that reside on the RockWare web site. The HTML
Help files can also reside locally, if you have installed them. Since there are hundreds
of these HTML documents, we generally recommend that you not install them and
rely instead on your web access to view the current help documents. However, if you
don’t have web access or if your connection is slow, you can install these abstracts,
typically into C:\Program Files\RockWare\ \Help. The installation program for the
HTML Help files can be found on the RockWare CD and on the Download page of
our web site (www.rockware.com). You can also grab them from within RockWorks
itself (if you have internet access): see Help / Download & Install / RockWorks
HTML Help Files.
Tip: Click on the gray area directly above the HTML Help pane to see the name of
the file being displayed.
3. Compiled help (“Searchable” help):

23
Introduction RockWorks2004

The help topics described above are also available as a single “Searchable Help” file
that offers a table of contents, index, and advanced searching tools. This help is
available when you click on the standard Help / Contents menu item. The
Searchable Help is typically installed in the C:\Program Files\RockWare\ \Help
folder.
The Searchable Help is installed as a separate installation from the main program,
both from the Download page on the RockWare web site and from the CD. You can
also access it from within RockWorks: see Help / Download & Install / RockWorks
Searchable Help. The Help is installed separately so that the download files remain
smaller.
We refer to this help in this book; look for the symbol to know where to look for
more information in the Searchable Help system.
4. Web Support Page: Go to our home page (www.rockware.com) and click on the
Support tab for a variety of support options, including write-ups, case studies, the
discussion group archives, email support, etc. This web page is also accessible right
from within RockWorks: choose Help / Online Information / Technical Support.
5. This “RoadMap”: This book is designed to be a “roadmap” to summarize program
functions and to direct you to other resources for more information.

A Brief Tour
You will use the large tabs along the left edge of the program window to access 4
important windows in RockWorks:
1. The Borehole Manager: This is the data window and suite of menus for entering and
working with borehole data. This is discussed in “Chapter 2 - The Borehole Manager”
and in many later book chapters. Here is where you do most of the sub-surface
modeling and visualization in RockWorks: 2D and 3D logs, cross sections, fence
diagrams, solid models, stratigraphic models, structure maps, etc.

24
RockWorks2004 Introduction

2. The Geological Utilities: This is a simpler, row-and-column type of data window

with its own suite of menus. Here you can create many different types of maps, charts,
and diagrams. Even if you are working primarily with borehole data, you will still use
many of the tools in the Geological Utilities for analytical work (statistical analysis, grid
& solid model tools, etc.). This window and its tools is discussed in “Chapter 3 - The
Geological Utilities Datasheet” and in many of the later book chapters.

25
Introduction RockWorks2004

3. Project Dimensions: Here you establish the boundaries of your working project, for
both borehole-related and general data, for consistency in modeling and boundary
annotations.

4. Tables: This tab accesses a listing of program libraries that you’ll use a lot in the
Borehole Manager and from time to time in the Geological Utilities: Lithology and
Stratigraphy Tables for modeling downhole lithology types and formations; pattern and
symbol libraries for maps, logs, and cross sections; coordinate tables for polygon-
clipping; look-up tables for customized symbols and contours; and more.

26
RockWorks2004 Introduction

In addition, there are three main plotting windows in RockWorks2004 for display of
graphics and layout of reports:
1. RockPlot2D: This is the window in which 2D (flat) maps, logs, and diagrams are
displayed.

2. RockPlot3D: This is the interactive window in which 3D images are displayed

(surfaces, solids, 3D logs, fence diagrams, and more.)

27
Introduction RockWorks2004

3 ReportWorks: This is the page layout program for RockPlot2D images and bitmaps,
with legend, text, shape, scale bar annotations.

Menus and Options Windows: Most of the RockWorks tools are accessed by clicking on
the toolbar buttons and/or by clicking on the drop-down menus at the top of the program
windows and selecting an item from the menu’s list. When a menu item or button is
selected, a window with program options will be displayed. The options will be
displayed in an expandable/collapsible outline format.

28
RockWorks2004 Introduction

Use your mouse to expand/collapse headings and select items as described in the picture.
If you prefer to use your keyboard, here’s a list of shortcuts:
+ : Expands the current node (equivalent to clicking on the “+” button).
- : Collapses the current node (equivalent to clicking on the “-“ button).
CTRL+ENTER : Opens the current node’s edit dialog (equivalent to double-clicking).
SPACE : Changes the state of a checkbox or radio button (equivalent to a single click
in a checkbox or button).
Up and Down Arrows: Selects the next or previous node.
Tab : Moves from the menu options to the OK/Cancel toolbar to the Help toolbar.
ENTER : Accepts settings and moves on to next step (equivalent to clicking the OK
button).
ESCAPE : Cancels the dialog (equivalent to clicking the Cancel button).
Other tips:
Right-click on any of the nodes to view the behind-the-scenes menu name, group
name, and parameter (variable) name. This information can be helpful if you are
writing RCL scripts.

Scripting RockWorks
RockWorks2004 can be run using “RCL” (RockWare Command Language) scripts, either
from a program command line or using the Geological Utilities Util / Compile RCL File
command. There is more information about RCL in the Help messages, and on the
RockWare web site (Support page).

29
Introduction RockWorks2004

Notes

30
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

Chapter 2 - The Borehole Manager

Entering Data - Overview
The Borehole Manager is one of the two main data windows in RockWorks (see page 24 for
an overview). It is used to enter borehole data: downhole stratigraphy, lithology, interval-
based or geochemistry measurements, point-based or geophysical measurements, fractures,
water level, deviated well surveys, and depth to specific log pattens and symbols.

The data you enter into the Borehole Manager can be displayed as 2D (flat) images such as
cross sections or plan-view well location maps. It can also be displayed in 3-dimensional
images such as fence diagrams, floating surfaces, solid models or 3D drillholes in the new
"RockPlot3D" viewing program.
The Borehole Manager allows you to choose a working Project Folder, into which the data
for the different boreholes is stored. Each borehole’s data is stored in a separate, ASCII-
formatted file with a unique file name and a “.bh” file name extension. You’ll see the listing
of the individual boreholes in the current project along the left side of the Borehole Manager
window.
See Geological Utilities Datasheet Overview (Chapter 3) for information about that data
interface.

31
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

RockWorks99 (and earlier) users:

If your ATD files contain DOWNHOLE stratigraphy data and/or linked LIT, CUR, HIS, or
ZON files, you’ll use this new Borehole Manager. See Importing Your RockWorks99 Data
(page 32).
If your ATD files contain general data (XYZ, survey, hydrochemistry, etc.) you’ll use the
Geological Utilities datasheet. See Using the Datasheet (page 69) and Opening
RockWorks99 ATD files (page 71).

Importing RockWorks99 Data

If your RockWorks99 ATD and TEM files contain downhole (borehole) data, such as
stratigraphic layers, and/or linked LIT, HIS, CUR, or ZON files, you’ll need to import them
into the new RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager.
! If your RockWorks99 ATD/TEM files do not contain borehole information, you can open
them into the other RockWorks data window, marked with the Geological Utilities data tab.
See the Geological Utilities Datasheet in Chapter 3 for information.
The RW99 data importer is found in the File / Import / Into Borehole Manager menu. It
will create a new project containing separate files for each row (borehole) in your RW99
datasheet, and the different types of downhole data will be listed in the Borehole Manager
data tabs.

See Help / Contents / Working with the Borehole Manager / Entering your Borehole Data
/ Importing Data for details about the step-by-step instructions shown here. See page 22 for
more Help information.
Part 1: Double-check and back up your RockWorks99 Data
Part 2: Set up the project.
Part 3: Set up the Borehole Locations.
Part 4: Set up the Downhole Data.
Part 5: Set up the Stratigraphy Data.
Part 6: Import the data.
What Next?

32
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

Importing ASCII Data

RockWorks2004 includes an import tool for getting data into Borehole Manager from
external ASCII files. This tool is accessible in the File / Import / Into Borehole Manager /
ASCII option.
This program will import data from one or more ASCII files into borehole files (*.bh) that are
compatible with the RockWorks Borehole Manager program. In addition to the borehole
data, the program can also import other project information such as the project dimensions,
lithology table, stratigraphy table, column titles, etc.
The borehole data can be listed in a single ASCII file or in multiple files for import into the
program.
! The ASCII import tool is an all-or-nothing proposition for existing boreholes. What we
mean by this is that the borehole files (*.bh) for individual borings are created, not appended,
during the import process. So, if you already have location and stratigraphy data entered for
specific borings, for example, and you want to append geochemistry data for those same
borings, you’ll need to export all of the data first, add the geochemistry measurements to the
ASCII file, and then re-import the data. By contrast, new boreholes can be imported into an
existing project with no problems.
There is detailed information about the required structure of the ASCII data in the Help
messages.
See Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Entering Your Borehole Data /
Importing Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Importing Excel Data

RockWorks2004 also includes an import tool for getting data into Borehole Manager from
external XLS (Microsoft Excel) files. This tool is accessible in the File / Import / Into
Borehole Manager / XLS (Excel) option.
This program will import data from multiple worksheets in a single Excel file into borehole
files (*.bh) that are compatible with the RockWorks Borehole Manager Program.
The format of the Excel spreadsheet must be EXACTLY the same as that produced by the
File / Export / From-Borehole-Manager / Excel program. The worksheet titles in Excel
must be identical. There is a sample Excel template on the support page of our web site
(http://www.rockware.com/support.html#import).

33
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

! Like the ASCII import, above, the Excel import tool is an all-or-nothing process for existing
boreholes. This means that the borehole files (*.bh) for individual borings are created, not
appended, during the import process. If, for example, you have location and lithology data
already entered into the Borehole Manager for specific boreholes, and you want to append
geophysical measurements for these same borings, you’ll need to export all of the data first,
add the geophysical measurements to the Excel workbook, and re-import all of the data. By
contrast, new boreholes can be imported into an existing project with no problem.
There is detailed information about the required structure of the Excel data in the Help
messages.
See Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Entering Your Borehole Data /
Importing Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Using the Borehole Manager

The Borehole Manager is the RockWorks data interface designed for entering downhole
data. It is one of two data windows available in RockWorks2004. This section discusses
how to create new Borehole projects, how to add new wells and delete wells, and how to
open and save these data files.

How to access the Borehole Manager

1. Click on the large Borehole Manager tab along the left side of the program window.

34
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

The program will bring the Borehole Manager window to the front.
! The menu items at the top of the window will change depending on which data entry
program is currently activated. The Borehole Manager and the Geological Utilities
datasheet each has its own suite of menus and program options.

How to create a new borehole project folder

Each project displayed in the Borehole Manager must have its own folder on your computer.
All of the individual borehole files (*.bh) as well as program-generated grid (*.grd) and
solid models (*.mod) and 2D and 3D graphics will be stored in this project folder. Follow
these steps to start a new project folder:
1. Access the Borehole Manager as necessary.
2. Click anywhere in the Project Folder prompt that’s right below the menu items.

3. Click the New Folder button.

! If you are running in Windows98, the New Folder button may not be visible. If this is
the case, you’ll need to create the new folder yourself using My Computer or Windows
Explorer, and follow the instructions for opening an existing project folder.
4. In the displayed window select the existing drive and folder in which you want to create
the new folder.
5. Type in the name for the new folder and click OK.
The program will create the new project folder. There will be no borehole files listed in the
manager window, and you are ready to enter the first well entry.

35
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

How to create a new well entry

Each well in a borehole project is stored in a separate file in the project folder. To create a
new well in the existing project, follow these steps:
1. Access the Borehole Manager as necessary.
2. If necessary, access the project folder that contains the data to which you wish to add
the new well.
3. Select the File / New Log command.
4. Enter the name for the well, such as "DH01". This should probably be (but isn’t
required to be) the same as the well ID so that you can quickly identify it when listed in
the manager.
The program will use the well name as the name of the file in which its data will be
stored. For example, the data for a well named "DH01" will be stored on disk under the
file name "DH01.BH." The Borehole Manager will also assign the entered name to the
Borehole Name field on the well’s Location tab. You can change that if you wish.
5. Click OK.
This well will be shown in the Borehole File listing. There will be a blank suite of data tabs
ready for your data.
See also: Entering the Borehole Data (page 38).

How to delete a well

Each well in a borehole project is stored in a separate file in the project folder. To remove an
existing well from the current project, follow these steps:
1. Access the Borehole Manager as necessary.
2. If necessary, access the project folder that contains the data you wish to edit.
3. In the pane to the left, click on the name of the Borehole File that you wish to remove
from the current project. For example, to remove the borehole named "DH-5", click on
that well’s name.
4. Select the File / Erase Log command.
The program will prompt you, "Are you sure you want to send "file.bh" to the Recycle Bin?"
5. Click Yes to continue and delete the entire borehole file from the project folder.
Click No to cancel the Erase Log operation.

36
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

! If you choose Yes, the data in the selected borehole file will be removed from the project
folder and placed into the Windows Recycle Bin. Should you change your mind about the
deletion, access the Recycle Bin and restore the .BH file to its original location.

How to open an existing borehole project

Each borehole project must be stored in a separate project folder on your computer. To
open an existing project, follow these steps:
1. Access the Borehole Manager as necessary.
2. Click anywhere in the Project Folder prompt.

3. Locate the folder in which the project is stored and click OK.
The existing project will be loaded into the Borehole Manager.

How to access a well's data

1. Access the Borehole Manager as necessary.
2. Open the existing project as necessary.
The wells in the current project will be displayed in the pane along the left side of the
window.
3. Click on the name of the well you wish to view.
The program will load its data into the data tabs. You can click on the various data tabs to
see that boring’s data.
See also: Entering the Borehole Data (below).
37
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

How to save borehole data

The Borehole Manager stores the data for each boring in a separate data file. All of the
borings for a particular project are stored in the same folder (the project folder) on your
computer.
RockWorks automatically saves any changes you make for a boring, so that as you click on
one borehole file and then another, each will be saved on disk before advancing to the next.

Entering the Borehole Data

Entering the Borehole Data - Overview

The RockWorks Borehole Manager uses data "tabs" for entering the different types of
downhole data. For example, if your well is inclined or deviated, you can enter the
downhole survey information in the "Orientation" tab. If you have geophysical data, you
can enter these into the "Points (P-Data)" tab.
When you add a new well to a project, the program will display a blank suite of data tabs.
Simply click on a tab to bring it to the front for entering your data. You may leave those
tabs blank for which you have no data.
This section discusses the different data tabs and how you enter the data. All tabs but the
Location tab may be left blank.
(See also: Importing Data on page 33.)
Location: This is used to enter the well ID, X and Y location coordinates (Eastings and
Northings), surface elevation, and total depth (all required fields). You may also choose a
specific symbol for the well, which can be used to note the well location in maps. There is
also a "Comments" field where you can enter well-specific notes. There are optional fields
for entering well locations in Range and Township notations or in longitude and latitude
coordinates, for translation into Eastings and Northings.
Orientation: This tab is where you enter your downhole survey information, in a depth,
bearing, inclination format. If the well is vertical, this tab can be left blank.
Lithology: Enter into this tab observed downhole lithologies. This tab connects to the
library of lithology types and their patterns that was shipped with the program or that you
have created or modified. (See Lithology v Stratigraphy on page 57 for help on definitions.)
Lithology data can be displayed in 2D and 3D logs, cross sections, profiles, fences, lithology
surface and plan-view maps, and solid models.

38
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

Stratigraphy: Into this tab you can enter interpreted downhole stratigraphic or formation
data. This tab connects to the library of stratigraphic names and patterns that was shipped
with the program or that you have created or modified. (See Lithology v Stratigraphy on
page 57.) Stratigraphy data can be illustrated in strip logs, and can be used to build structure
and isopach maps, stratigraphic surface and plan-view maps, profiles, observed and modeled
cross sections, observed and modeled fence diagrams, stratigraphic block diagrams, and
more.
Intervals (I-Data: This tab is used to enter downhole data that was sampled over a depth
interval, such as geochemical or geotechnical data. These data can be displayed as bar
graphs along 2D and 3D strip logs, and can be used to build vertical profiles, cross sections,
fence diagrams, plan maps and solid models.
Points (P-Data): This tab is used to enter downhole data that was sampled at individual
depth points, as is common for geophysical data. These data can be displayed as curves
along 2D and 3D strip logs, and can be used to build vertical profiles, cross sections, fence
diagrams, plan maps, and solid models.
Fractures: Use this tab to enter sub-surface fractures that you wish to display on logs and
log cross sections, or model as a solid for display as a profile, cross section, fence, plan map,
fracture surface map, or solid model.
Water Levels: This tab is used to enter dates and water levels for the borehole, for display
in logs, profiles, cross sections, plan maps, fences, and solids.
Symbols: Use this tab to select specific graphic symbols to be plotted at particular depths
for this well, on a log or in a section.
Patterns: Use this tab to select specific graphic patterns to be plotted along a depth interval
in a log or in a cross section.
See Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Entering Your Borehole Data /
Entering the Borehole Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

How to enter well location data

The Borehole Manager Location tab is used to enter well locations, depth ranges, and more.
Most of the information in this tab is required for all wells.
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Create a new project and/or new well as necessary. (See pages 35, 36.)
3. Click on the Location tab for the well. If the Location tab is not visible, enlarge the
RockWorks window or click on the buttons to scroll through the tabs.

39
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

4. Click in the Borehole Name box and type in a name for the borehole.
This field is used to label logs and base maps. It does not need to be the same as the
boring's name (assigned when the log is added to the project).
5. Click in the Easting box and type in the Easting or X-coordinate for the well.
(Required.) See Limits (below).
6. Click in the Northing box and type in the Northing or Y-coordinate for the well.
(Required.) See Limits (below).
7. Click in the Elevation box and type in the elevation at the top of the well. The
elevation units (feet or meters) should match the Easting and Northing units so that
volumes will represent cubic units. (Required. ! The program will use this to translate
your depth data to elevations for the output diagrams.)
8. Click in the Total Depth box and type in the total depth for the well. If the well is
inclined or deviated, this should be the measured depth, not the true vertical depth. The
total depth units (feet or meters) should match the Easting and Northing units so that
volumes will represent cubic units. (Required.)
9. Click on the Symbol picture and select the symbol to be used to represent this well in
borehole location maps. (Required.)
10. If you have any comments you wish to enter, these can be entered into the Comments
field. These are for your use only.
Easting and Northing Limits
The well location Easting (X) and Northing (Y) coordinates may be listed in global units
(UTM meters or feet) or in local units (meters or feet). Note the following:
* It's important that the location coordinates represent the same units in which the depths
(total depth in the Location tab and data depths in the other tabs) are recorded. Thus, if
your depths are entered in feet, so must be your Eastings and Northings. If your depths
are entered in meters, then enter your Eastings and Northings in meters also.
RockWorks does not require specific units, it simply assumes the map units and the
depth units are the same.
* If your location coordinates are in decimal longitude and latitude units (such as "-
106.89765" or "42.574635"), note:
! You should enter your decimal longitude and latitude coordinates in the longitude and
latitude prompts in the Location window. Then use the Borehole Manager's Map /
Adjust Coordinates / Longitude/Latitude -> Easting/Northing command to change
them to UTM meters or feet.

40
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

* If your location coordinates are in Range/Township/Section notation:

! You should enter the Range, Township, Section, and Description information in the
appropriate prompts at the bottom of the Location tab. Then use the Borehole
Manager's Map / Adjust Coordinates / Jeffersonian -> Easting/Northing command
to change them to UTM meters or feet. See the discussion of that topic (page 125) for
details about how to enter the information.
* The X-coordinates or Eastings must increase in value to the East, and the Y-coordinates
or Northings must increase in value to the North. If you are using lon/lat coordinates
for translation to meters or feet, be sure that western longitudes and southern latitudes
are entered as negatives.
Posting Locations from the Geological Utilities datasheet
If you have well location data listed in rows and columns in the Geological Utilities
datasheet, you can transfer these data into the Borehole Manager using the File / Transfer /
Utilities Datagrid -> Borehole Files (Locations only) tool. The fields in the datasheet
must be listed in a specific order to import properly into the Location tabs.
See Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Entering Your Borehole Data /
Transferring Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

How to enter well orientation or downhole survey data

The Borehole Manager Orientation tab should be used only if your well is not vertical. If
your well is vertical, leave the Orientation tab blank.
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Create a new project and/or new well as necessary. (See pages 35, 36.)
3. Click on the Orientation tab for the well. If the Orientation tab is not visible, enlarge
the RockWorks window or click on the buttons to scroll through the tabs.
4. Click in the Depth column and type in the first depth at which a downhole survey
measurement was made.
! The depth units must be the same as the units declared for the xyz coordinates for the
hole. For example, if the x,y location and collar elevation are expressed in local feet,
then the depth listings must be in feet as well.
! The depth values must be positive.
5. Click in the Bearing column and type in the bearing of the well at this depth. (You can
use the Tab key to advance from cell to cell.)
The bearings must be expressed in azimuth degrees (0 to 360, with 0 = north).
6. Click in the Inclination column and type in the inclination at this depth.
The inclination data follows a convention in which zero is a horizontal line, -90 points
straight down, and +90 points straight up.

41
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

7. Repeat this process for additional downhole survey locations. If you have an inclined
drill hole, only one survey listing is needed.
Other Orientation Tab Notes
There is no limit to the number of survey points that you may list for each drill hole.
Survey data stored in rows / columns elsewhere can be copied and pasted into this tab.
Survey data must be listed in a sequential order, from the start of the hole to the end.
The "start" of the hole may be lower in elevation than the "end" of the hole if the boring
curves back on itself.
RockWorks uses an averaging method of drawing the drill hole trace based on the survey
data in order to create smooth bends. Compare the following cartoons, based on the data
shown. The hole on the left abruptly turns at a depth of 100 to follow the new survey
inclination (not realistic) while the hole on the right curves to the horizontal dip at 100 feet.

How to enter lithology data

The Borehole Manager Lithology tab is used to enter observed lithologies only. See
Lithology versus Stratigraphy (page 57) for details. Lithology data can be illustrated as
color or pattern-filled blocks in logs and cross sections (Striplogs menu), and as profiles,
cross sections, fence diagrams, plan maps, lithology surface maps, and solid models
(Lithology menu).
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Create a new project and/or new well as necessary. (See pages 35, 36.)
3. Verify that the desired "Lithology Table," is correctly identified in the program. To
view it, click on the large Tables tab to the left of the main program window. Double-
click on the displayed name of the current Lithology Table, just to the right of the
“Lithology” row heading. The program uses this table as the reference library of rock
types for the current project, where the names of the rock types (“keywords”), patterns
and colors, and other information are defined. See page 293 for more information.
4. Click on the Lithology tab for the well. If the Lithology tab is not visible, enlarge the
RockWorks window or click on the buttons to scroll through the tabs.
5. Click in the Depth to Top column and type in the measured depth to the top of the first
lithologic interval for the well.
42
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

! The depth values must be positive. The depths must represent the same units as the
Easting and Northing coordinates (Location tab).
6. Click in the Depth to Base column and type in the measured depth to the base of the
first lithologic interval for the well. (You may also use the <Tab> key to advance from
cell to cell.)
7. Double-click in the Keyword column and choose from the "Select a Keyword" window
a description that matches the rock interval. You may scroll up and down in this
window to view the current library of keywords, read from the current Lithology Table.
As you click on different keywords, you can see the pattern style and colors currently
defined for that rock type.
Click OK in the Select a Keyword window when the desired keyword has been
highlighted. You will be returned to the Lithology tab with that keyword displayed.
Or, click the Lithology Table button if you wish to add a keyword or change the pattern
or color for the selected keyword, or access a different lithology table altogether. See
the Lithology Table (page 293) for complete details about these functions.
8. Click on the Description column and type in any additional text you may have for this
interval. This text cannot be plotted in your strip logs at this time.
9. Repeat this process for additional lithologic intervals.
Lithology data stored in rows / columns elsewhere can also be copied and pasted into this
tab.
See also: Importing RockWorks99 Lithology Data (below), Importing RockWorks99
Projects (page 32).

How to import RockWorks99 Lithology Data

Use the Borehole Manager’s Lithology / Import / RockWorks99 Lithology File tool to
import into the Lithology tab of the current borehole the downhole data stored in a
RockWorks99 "LIT" file. The layout of these LIT files are almost identical to the layout of
each Lithology tab in a RockWorks2004 project; the main difference is that RockWorks99
permitted the downhole data to be entered as elevations or depths, while RockWorks2004
requires positive depths. This import tool will take care of any necessary elevation to depth
unit changes.
RockWorks99 users: This tool is used to import a single LIT file only, for a single borehole.
Note that there is a whole-project importer that works quite nicely – see Importing
RockWorks99 Projects (page 32).
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Click on the borehole where the data is to be imported.
43
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

3. Click on the Lithology tab.

4. Choose the Lithology / Import / RockWorks99 Lithology File menu command.
5. File Name: Click on this item to browse for the file to be imported. Typically, this file
would have the extension ".lit".
6. Vertical Units: Select whether the RockWorks99 Lithology file lists the downhole
intervals as elevations or as depths and, if the latter, as positive values or as negative
values.
7. Click OK.
The program will read the indicated LIT file, translate elevations or negative depths to
positive depths, and record the depth intervals, keywords, and descriptions (if any) into the
current Lithology tab. This process can be repeated for additional boreholes and LIT files.

How to enter stratigraphy data

The Borehole Manager’s Stratigraphy tab is used to enter interpreted stratigraphic data only.
See Lithology versus Stratigraphy (page 57) for details. You may leave this tab blank if you
have no stratigraphy data.
Stratigraphy data can be illustrated as color or pattern-filled blocks in logs and cross
sections (Striplogs menu), and as 2D and 3D surfaces and isopachs, profiles, cross sections,
fence diagrams, plan maps, stratigraphy surface (geology) maps, and block models
(Stratigraphy menu).
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Create a new project and/or new well as necessary. (See pages 35, 36.)
3. Verify that the desired "Stratigraphy Table," is correctly identified in the program. To
view it, click on the large Tables tab to the left of the main program window. Double-
click on the displayed name of the current Stratigraphy Table, just to the right of the
“Stratigraphy” row heading. The program uses this table as the reference library of
formation names for the current project, where the names, patterns and colors, and other
information are defined. See page 294 for more information
4. Click on the Stratigraphy tab for the well. If the Stratigraphy tab is not visible, enlarge
the RockWorks window or click on the buttons to scroll through the tabs.
5. Click in the Depth to Top column and type in the measured depth to the top of the first
stratigraphic horizon for the well.
! The depth values must be positive. The depths must represent the same units as the
Easting and Northing coordinates (Location tab).

44
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

6. Click in the Depth to Base column and type in the measured depth to the base of the
first stratigraphic horizon for the well. (You may also use the <Tab> key to advance
from cell to cell.)
! Unlike previous versions of RockWorks, which assumed each layer to extend down to
the top of the next layer, RockWorks2004 allows you to enter the top and the base of
each formation.
If you don’t know the formation base – perhaps the borehole ends mid-formation – you
can leave this blank. See Missing Formations (page 60) for more information.
7. Double-click in the Formation column and, from the Select a Unit window, choose the
formation that describes the interval. You may scroll up and down in this window to
view the current library of formation names. As you click on different formation, you
can see the pattern style and colors currently defined for that unit.
Click OK in the Select a Unit window when the desired formation name has been
highlighted. You will be returned to the Stratigraphy tab with that formation name
displayed.
Or, click the Stratigraphy Table button if you wish to add a formation name or change
the pattern or color for the selected formation, or access a different stratigraphy table
altogether. See the Stratigraphy Table (page 294) for complete details about these
functions.
8. Repeat this process for additional stratigraphic layers.
! It's really important to note that the stratigraphic layers be listed in the same order
from borehole to borehole.
Stratigraphy data stored in rows / columns elsewhere can also be copied and pasted into this
tab.
Posting Stratigraphic Tops and Bases from the Geological Utilities datasheet
If you have formation top and base elevations listed in rows and columns in the Geological
Utilities datasheet, you can transfer these data into the Borehole Manager using the File /
Transfer / Utilities Datagrid -> Borehole Files (Stratigraphy only) tool. The fields in the
datasheet must be listed in a specific order to import properly into the Stratigraphy tabs.
See Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Entering Your Borehole Data /
Transferring Data. See page 22 for more Help information.
See also: Importing RockWorks99 Projects (page 32), Pick Stratigraphy from Lithology or
Geophysical Logs (page 144), Missing Formations (page 60), Importing Stratigraphic
Contacts from Grids into Stratigraphic Logs (help messages: Help / Contents / Working in
the Geological Utilities / Grid Model Tools / Stratigraphic Tools).

45
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

How to enter interval (geochemistry, geotechnical) data

The Borehole Manager Intervals (I-Data) tab is used to enter downhole data that has been
sampled and recorded for depth intervals. You are allowed up to 249 columns. See Points
(P-Data) in the next topic for information about entering point-sampled ("curve") data.
Leave this tab blank if you have no interval data.
Intervals (I-Data) data can be illustrated as bargraphs in logs and cross sections (Striplogs
menu), and as profiles, cross sections, fence diagrams, plan maps, and solid model
isosurfaces (I-Data menu).
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Create a new project and/or new well as necessary. (See pages 35, 36.)
3. Click on the Intervals (I-Data) tab for the well. If the Intervals (I-Data) tab is not
visible, enlarge the RockWorks window or click on the buttons to scroll through
the tabs.
4. Click in the Depth to Top column and type in the measured depth to the top of the first
sampled interval for the well.
Or, if you have already copied a block of data from another application (a spreadsheet
or similar table), type Ctrl+V or select the Paste command from the Edit menu.
! The depth values must be positive. The depths must represent the same units as the
Easting and Northing coordinates (Location tab).
5. Click in the Depth to Base column and type in the measured depth to the base of the
first sampled interval for the well. (You may also use the <Tab> key to advance from
cell to cell.)
6. Click in (or <Tab> to) the first data column and type in the measured value for that
downhole interval.
If you have no data for an interval, you can leave the cell blank or enter a non-numeric
value (such as "-" or "nd"). Blank cells and non-numeric values will simply be skipped
during processing.
! To change the track (column heading) names, simply right-click on the column title
and type in a name, such as "Benzene" or "Gold". The column names for the Intervals
(I-Data) tabs are store in the current project folder in a file named
"Idata_column_titles.txt".
7. Click in the next data column and type in any additional measured value for the
interval.

46
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

8. Continue in this manner for the first depth interval, listing up to 249 measured items.
9. Move on to the second row, clicking in its Depth to Top column, and type in the
measured depth to the top of the second sampled interval for the well. Continue in this
manner, specifying depth intervals and measured values, for the entirety of your data.
There is no limit to the number of downhole intervals that you may list for each drill hole,
though if you are creating solid models, the more intervals the slower the processing.

See also: Importing RockWorks99 projects (page 32), Importing ASCII, Excel Data (page
33), How to Import RockWorks99 Geochemistry files (below).
Interval data stored in rows / columns elsewhere can also be copied and pasted into this tab.
You can right-click in any of the tab’s cells to access the Columns tools (resampling,
filtering, etc.).

How to Convert Lithology Data to I-Data

Use the Borehole Manager’s Lithology / Export / Lithology -> I-Data tool to transfer
lithology intervals to a column in the I-data tab, with a specific real number value assigned
to each lithology type, as recorded in a lookup table. This can be used to create a solid
model of particular lithology-associated parameters such as porosity or conductivity.
While reading downhole lithology data, this program will compare the lithology names to a
"lookup table" that associates a real number with each lithotype (e.g. Sandstone = 1.0,
Limestone = 0.5). These numbers may represent porosities, hydraulic conductivities,
strength, cohesion, or any other quantitative value that you wish to model. The program uses

47
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

these numbers to populate a designated column within the Intervals (I-Data) tab for all of the
boreholes within the current project folder. Finally, these values may be used as the basis for
creating solid models, fence diagrams, and contoured profiles and sections, and more.
See Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Lithology Tools / Converting
Lithology Data to I-Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

How to Import RockWorks99 Geochemistry Data

Use the Borehole Manager’s I-Data / Import / RockWorks99 Histogram File tool to
import into the Intervals (I-Data) tab of the current borehole the downhole data stored in a
RockWorks99 "HIS" file. The layout of these HIS files are almost identical to the layout of
each I-Data tab in a RockWorks2004 project; the main difference is that RockWorks99
permitted the geochemistry data to be entered as elevations or depths, while
RockWorks2004 requires positive depths. This import tool will take care of any necessary
elevation to depth unit changes.
RockWorks99 users: This tool is used to import a single HIS file only, for a single borehole.
Note that there is a whole-project importer that works quite nicely – see Importing
RockWorks99 Projects (page 32).
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Click on the borehole where the data is to be imported.
3. Click on the Intervals (I-Data) tab.
4. Choose the I-Data / Import / RockWorks99 Histogram File menu command.
5. File Name: Click on this item to browse for the file to be imported. Typically, this file
would have the extension ".his".
6. Vertical Units: Select whether the RockWorks99 Histogram file lists the downhole
intervals as elevations or as depths and, if the latter, as positive values or as negative
values.
7. Click OK.
The program will read the indicated HIS file, translate elevations or negative depths to
positive depths, and record the depth intervals and up to 249 columns of measured values
into the current I-Data tab. This process can be repeated for additional boreholes and HIS
files.

48
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

How to enter point (geophysical) data

The Borehole Manager Points (P-Data) tab is used to enter downhole data that’s sampled at
depth points, such as geophysical data. You are allowed up to 249 columns. See Interval
data (above) for information about entering interval-sampled ("histogram") data. Leave this
tab blank if you have no point data.
Point (geophysical) data can be illustrated as curves in logs and cross sections (Striplogs
menu), and as profiles, cross sections, fence diagrams, plan maps and solid model
isosurfaces (P-Data menu).
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Create a new project and/or new well as necessary. (See pages 35, 36.)
3. Click on the Points (P-Data) tab for the well. If this tab is not visible, enlarge the
RockWorks window or click on the buttons to scroll through the tabs.
4. Click in the Depth column and type in the measured depth at the first measurement in
the well.
Or, if you have already copied a block of data from another application (a spreadsheet
or similar table), type Ctrl+V or select the Paste command from the Edit menu.
! The depth values must be positive. The depths must represent the same units as the
Easting and Northing coordinates (Location tab).
5. Click in the first data column and type in the measured value for that downhole point.
(You may also use the <Tab> key to advance from cell to cell.)
If you have no data for an interval, you can leave the cell blank or enter a non-numeric
value (such as "-" or "nd"). Blank cells and non-numeric values will simply be skipped
during processing.
! To change the track (column heading) names, simply right-click on the column title
and type in a name, such as "Gamma" or "Resistivity". The column names for the P-
Data tabs are stored in the current project folder in a file named
"Pdata_column_titles.txt".
6. Click in the next data column and type in any additional measured value for the point.
7. Continue in this manner for the first depth, listing up to 249 measured items.
8. Move on to the second row, clicking in its Depth column, and type in the measured
depth at the second measurement in the well. Continue in this manner, specifying
depths and measured values, for the entirety of your data.
There is no limit to the number of downhole points that you may list for each drill hole,
though if you are creating solid models, the more points, the slower the processing.
49
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

See also: Importing RockWorks99 projects (page 32), Importing ASCII, Excel Data (page
33), Importing RockWorks99 CUR files (below), Digitizing data (page 110) for information
about using an electronic digitizing tablet to digitize data into this tab. Data stored in rows /
columns elsewhere can also be copied and pasted into this tab. You can right-click in any of
the tab’s cells to access the Columns tools (resampling, filtering, etc.).

How to Import RockWorks99 Curve Data

Use the Borehole Manager’s P-Data / Import / RockWorks99 Curve File tool to import
into the Points (P-Data) tab of the current borehole the downhole data stored in a
RockWorks99 "CUR" file. The layout of these CUR files are almost identical to the layout
of each P-Data tab in a RockWorks2004 project; the main difference is that RockWorks99
permitted the downhole data to be entered as elevations or depths, while RockWorks2004
requires positive depths. This import tool will take care of any necessary elevation to depth
unit changes.
RockWorks99 users: This tool is used to import a single CUR file only, for a single
borehole. Note that there is a whole-project importer that works quite nicely – see
Importing RockWorks99 Projects (page 32).
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Click on the borehole where the data is to be imported.
3. Click on the Points (P-Data) tab.
4. Choose the P-Data / Import / RockWorks99 Curve File menu command.
5. File Name: Click on this item to browse for the file to be imported. Typically, this file
would have the extension ".cur".
50
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

6. Vertical Units: Select whether the RockWorks99 Curve file lists the downhole
intervals as elevations or as depths and, if the latter, as positive values or as negative
values.
7. Click OK.
The program will read the indicated CUR file, translate elevations or negative depths to
positive depths, and record the depths and up to 249 columns of measured values into the
current Geophysics tab. This process can be repeated for additional boreholes and CUR
files.

How to enter fracture data

The Borehole Manager’s Fractures tab is used to enter the depth, orientation, and dip of
downhole fractures. These can be displayed as oriented disks on 3D logs (Striplogs menu),
and modeled for display as a profile, cross section, fence diagram, plan-view map, or solid
model using the Fractures menu tools.
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Create a new project and/or new well as necessary. (See pages 35, 36.)
3. Click on the Fractures tab for the well. If the Fractures tab is not visible, enlarge the
RockWorks window or click on the buttons to scroll through the tabs.
4. Click in the Depth column and type in the measured depth for the first fracture you
wish to record.
! The depth values must be positive.
5. Click in the Direction column (or use the <Tab> key to advance to it) and enter the dip
bearing in azimuth degrees (from 0 to 360) of the fracture.
6. Click in the Dip Angle column and enter the angle in degrees from horizontal (0 =
horizontal, -90 = straight down, and 90 = straight up).
7. Double-click in the Color column and choose a color for the fracture "disk" that will be
displayed in the logs and log sections.
8. Click in the Radius cell and enter a size for the fracture disk. This is entered in your
study units, such as feet or meters. This will determine not only how large the disc will
appear in your logs (if set to Variable size), but also the extent of the fracture’s
influence in models created with the Fractures menu tools.

51
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

! The Radius setting will be ignored if, during strip log setup, you set the Fractures /
Dimensions to Fixed and enter a value there.
9. Click in the Aperture cell and enter the fracture thickness. When displayed in
RockPlot3D this will affect the thickness of the fracture disk as it’s displayed with the
logs. The fracture aperture is entered as actual thickness units, BUT NOTE that this
must be in the same units as your other downhole data. For example, if your other log
data is entered in feet, the fracture aperture must also be entered as decimal feet.
! This setting will be ignored if, during strip log setup, you set the Fractures /
Dimensions to Fixed and enter a value there.
10. Repeat this process for additional downhole fractures.

How to enter water level data

The Borehole Manager’s Water Levels tab is used to enter one or more dates, depths, and
optional text for observed water level(s) in the borehole. These can be displayed in strip
logs and log sections (Striplogs menu), and in profiles, cross sections, plan-view surfaces,
fence diagrams, and solid models (Aquifers menu).
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Create a new project and/or new well as necessary. (See pages 35, 36.)
3. Click on the Water Levels tab for the well. If the tab is not visible, enlarge the
RockWorks window or click on the buttons to scroll through the tabs.
4. Click in the Date column and type in the date on which the measurement was taken.
On logs, the date field can be displayed as a text label.
For profile, section, plan, fence, and solid diagrams, RockWorks will use the Date field to
match like measurements between wells. For this reason, you can enter the date in any
numeric format; the program should be able to match "1/1/01" with "01/01/2001". You
cannot use an alphabetic format (e.g. "January 1 2001"). The date and time formats will
52
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

automatically adjust to U.S. or European formats based on the Windows Regional

Settings.
5. Click in the Depth to Top column and type in the measured depth to the top of the water
level.
! The depth values must be positive.
6. Click in the Depth to Base column and type in the measured depth to the bottom of the
water interval. If you wish to display the water level as a surface of little or no
thickness, set the Base depth to slightly greater than or equal to the Top depth.
7. Repeat this process for additional water intervals.

How to enter log symbols

The Borehole Manager’s Symbols tab is used to enter one or more depths for each borehole
and the symbol to be plotted at each depth in individual logs and in log cross sections
(Striplogs menu).
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Create a new project and/or new well as necessary. (See pages 35, 36.)
3. Click on the Symbols tab for the well. If this tab is not visible, enlarge the RockWorks
window or click on the buttons to scroll through the tabs.
4. Click in the Depth column and type in the measured depth for the first symbol you wish
to record.
! The depth values must be positive. Be sure the depth units match your map (Easting,
Northing) units, such as all representing feet or all representing meters.
! The symbol will typically be positioned with its center plotted at the declared depth.
This is not the case if the symbol's "origin," as it was created in the symbol editor, is not
in its center. Compare the two examples below. The symbol on the left (#5 in the
factory table), when displayed in the symbol editor, is centered at the design origin in
the middle of the screen. This symbol will be centered on the depth you declare in the
plotted log. The symbol on the right (#44), sits on the design origin. This will,
accordingly, sit on the depth you declare.

53
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

5. Double-click in the Symbol cell to the right to pick the desired symbol from the
displayed index. You can pick a color for the symbol by clicking in the Color box.
Click OK to return to the data tab.
See Using the Select Symbol Window (page 300) for information about accessing a
different symbol table.
See Using the Symbol Editor (page 301) if you wish to edit a symbol or create a new
one.
6. Click in the Caption cell and type in any text you want to be plotted with the symbol on
the log. This is not required.
7. Repeat this process for additional downhole symbols.

How to enter log patterns

The Borehole Manager’s Patterns tab is used to enter one or more depth intervals for each
borehole and the pattern block to be plotted between these depths, in individual logs and in
log cross sections (Striplogs menu).
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Create a new project and/or new well as necessary. (See pages 35, 36.)
3. Click on the Patterns tab for the well. If this tab is not visible, enlarge the RockWorks
window or click on the buttons to scroll through the tabs.
4. Click in the Depth to Top column and type in the measured depth to the top of the
interval to be filled with the pattern block.
! The depth values must be positive. Be sure the depth units match the map (Easting
and Northing) units, such as all representing feet or all representing meters.
54
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

5. Click in the Depth to Base column and type in the measured depth to the bottom of the
pattern interval.
6. Double-click in the Pattern cell to the right to pick the desired pattern from the
displayed index. You can pick foreground and background colors for the pattern by
clicking in the Color boxes. You can also adjust the pattern density by adjusting the
Density setting; the Preview box will show you the current design, colors, and density
for your reference. Click OK to return to the data tab.
See Using the Select Pattern Window (page 296) for information about accessing a
different pattern table.
See Using the Pattern Editor (page 298) if you wish to edit a pattern or create a new
one.
7. Click in the Caption cell and type in any text you want to be plotted with the pattern on
the log. This is not required.
8. Repeat this process for additional downhole patterns.

View a well data summary

If you wish to see a summary of the data contained in a particular well in your borehole
project, follow these steps:
1. Access the Borehole Manager.
2. Open the existing borehole project if necessary.
3. Click on the name of the well in the list to the left, for which you wish to see a data
summary. The program will load that well's data.
4. Select the Strip Log / Summary command.
The program will scan the current well's data listing and will display its summary in a text
window. Included will be a summary of the given data (coordinates, total intervals, etc.) as
well as computed coordinates from the survey data. An example is shown below.
File Name: C:\Program Files\RockWare\RW2002\ProjectB\dh08.bh
Well ID: DH-8
Collar Easting: 750.000000
Collar Northing: 250.000000
Collar Elevation: 0.000000
Total Depth: 824.000000
Symbol Number: 7
Symbol Color: 255
Survey Points: 10
Interpolated Survey Points: 100
Lithology Intervals: 23
Statigraphy Intervals: 7
Left-Geochem Intervals: 79
Right-Geochem Intervals: 79
55
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

Left-Elog Intervals: 790

Right-Elog Intervals: 790
Water Levels: 0
Fractures: 0
Special Symbols: 3
Special Patterns: 1
X-Min: -50.000000
X-Max: 1097.532888
Y-Min: -50.000000
Y-Max: 1029.106467
Z-Min: -752.400000
Z-Max: 5280.000000
X-Coordinate at TD: 542.488031
Y-Coordinate at TD: 431.361717
Z-Coordinate at TD: -535.831920

Data Tab Tools

The data tabs in the Borehole Manager offer some simple editing tools. They can be
accessed by clicking on the Borehole Manager’s Edit menu.
Not all tools are available for all tabs. More information can be found in the on-line Help
messages if installed.
Cut: Removes the contents of the highlighted cell(s) in the current tab, placing the contents
in the computer's memory or "clipboard" for later pasting.
Copy: Places a copy of the contents of the highlighted cell(s) in the current tab, placing the
copy in the clipboard for later pasting.
Paste: Places the contents of the computer's clipboard memory into the current tab, starting
at the first currently-highlighted cell.
Delete: Deletes the contents of the highlighted cell(s) in the current tab. The contents are
not placed on the computer's clipboard memory; they are just deleted.
Cut All: Removes the entire contents of the current tab, placing the contents in the
computer's clipboard memory for later pasting. This is the same operation as would occur if
you were to hand-select all of the cells in the current tab and then select the Edit / Cut
command.
Copy All: Places a copy of the entire contents of the current tab in the clipboard memory
for later pasting. This is the same operation as would occur if you were to hand-select all of
the cells in the current tab and then select the Edit / Copy command.
Paste All: Replaces the current tab with the contents of the clipboard.
Columns / Insert: Inserts a new, blank column in the active datasheet.
Columns / Delete: Deletes one or more columns from the active datasheet.
56
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

Columns / Math: Performs simple arithmetic operations on the values within a selected
column in the current datasheet.
Columns / Merge: Merges the contents of two columns in the active datasheet, with a user-
specified separator.
Columns / Increment: Lists numeric values in a column, incrementing the values by the
real number you declare.
Columns / Combine: Used to combine symbol + color columns or linestyle + color
columns, in the Geological Utilities datasheet only.
Columns / Statistics: Used to compute basic statistics (range, mean, standard deviation,
etc.) for a single column of values in the datasheet.
Columns / Filter: Used to filter out data values that fall outside a user-defined range.
Columns / Resample: Used to re-record the column’s data values at user-specified depth
increments. This is commonly used to reduce the number data points for geophysical curves
or geochemical histograms to improve diagram readability and program performance.
Columns / Fix: Strips out commas, tabs and spaces from numeric values in a selected
column.
Rows / Insert: Inserts a user-specified number of rows above the currently active row in
the data tab, offering the user the option to change the default row number.
Rows / Delete: Deletes a user-specified number of rows in the current data tab, offering the
option to change the default row number.
Rows / Go to: Advances to a specific row in the current data tab.
Rows / Sort: Sorts the rows in the current data tab based on a selected column of values.

Other Data Topics

Lithology versus Stratigraphy

RockWorks recognizes two distinct types of borehole rock/soil material:
* Observed lithology: This is what many people initially enter. Observed lithology
encompasses your downhole rock descriptions, as you see them. They may repeat
(sand, clay, sand, clay) can be correlated only by modeling – no simple well to well
linear correlations. "Observed" is the key word. Observed rock types for each borehole
are entered into the Lithology tab, listing depth to top, depth to base, and rock type.
* Interpreted stratigraphy: These are interpreted soil or rock layers or formations, often
groups of lithologies, which are more layered in nature than observed lithology, are
57
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

non-repeating, and are consistent in their order from the surface downward. Interpreted
stratigraphies are entered into the Stratigraphy tab, with depth to formation top, depth to
base, and formation name. Stratigraphic contacts can be correlated using simple well to
well lines or modeled panels.
This means that if you do not initially know the regional stratigraphy, and cannot define
discrete layering, you can still plot observed lithology in logs and log-based cross-sections.

Because lithologies are not layered, they are modeled using solid modeling techniques. (By
contrast, stratigraphic layers are modeled as surfaces.) You can use the tools in the Borehole
Manager’s Lithology menu to create solid-model-based lithology profiles, cross sections,
fences, and solid diagrams, and plan-view and surface-extracted lithology maps.
Then, using lithology logs you can group the lithologies into interpreted stratigraphic units,
entering the depths and formation names into the Stratigraphy tab. There’s also a Pick
Contacts tool in the Stratigraphy menu that allows you to view a lithology (or geophysical)
cross section and point-and-click to record stratigraphy depths.
Once you have stratigraphy units defined, they can be displayed in strip logs and cross
sections.

58
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

Because stratigraphic units are distinctly layered, you can request simple log-to-log
correlations (no modeling) in hole to hole or "straight" log sections.:

RockWorks can interpolate surface models of each stratigraphic layer for 2D and 3D display;
for slicing as profiles, sections, and fences; and for stacking as solid model diagrams

Lithology Stratigraphy
Represents observed rock type Represents interpreted layers or
formations
Is often the first step in entering Is often the second step in entering
borehole rock types borehole rock types.
Can contain repeated sequences Cannot contain repeated sequences
(sand, clay, sand, clay)
Rock types can vary in order Stratigraphy layers must be
between wells consistent in order, from the top
down, between wells
No lateral variability Often has lateral variability

59
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

Data is entered in the Lithology tab Data is entered into the Stratigraphy
tab
No simple correlation is possible in Simple correlations are possible in
hole to hole cross sections hole to hole cross sections.
Is interpolated as a solid model, for Is interpolated as surface models for
display as slices, fences, or block display as maps, 3D surfaces, slices,
diagrams fences, or block diagrams.

Missing Formations
There are several ways to note missing stratigraphic formation data in the Borehole Manager
“Stratigraphy” tab. The method you use will affect, at its most basic, how 2D strip logs and
log sections are displayed. It will also affect how stratigraphic surface maps, thickness
maps, profiles, fence diagrams, and block models are created.

Zero-Thickness Formations
One method of noting a missing formation is to assign the formation top an elevation that
results in zero thickness.

60
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

This formation would not appear in individual strip logs.

It would be displayed in hole to hole stratigraphy sections (Stratigraphy / Section / Straight)

as pinched out at the well, with pattern fill.

The formation’s depths for that borehole would be included in computations that generate
surfaces and thickness calculations. Note how in this stratigraphic model, the red surface is
pulled up to lie on top of the lower surface.

61
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

Blank / Omitted Formations

Another way to note "no data" is to leave the cells blank for the formation top and base or to
omit the formation name altogether.

62
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

This tells the program that that formation is missing, and it should not be represented in
individual strip logs.

It would be displayed in hole to hole sections as pinched out at the well with no fill, or
pinched out between wells. There is an “Allow Pinchouts” option in the hole to hole Section
window that offers the choice.

63
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

The blank formation would not be included for that borehole in computations that generate
surfaces and thickness calculations. Note how the red surface in the example on the left is not
pulled up to lie on top of the lower surface since there is no data for the borehole. Its
“interference” with the lower formation is noted with the splotchy lines. On the right, this
interference is avoided by activating the “onlap” option in the stratigraphic model settings.
Onlap tells the program to build the model from the bottom up and give lower units priority
over upper ones.

Missing Formation Bases

Another common scenario occurs when a borehole ends in the middle of a unit, challenging
the geologist to decide whether to list the base of the boring as the base of the formation (not
entirely correct) or to leave it blank. RockWorks permits you to leave a formation base blank,
as shown below:

64
RockWorks2004 Borehole Manager

This will result in the following consequences:

The formation will be extended to the base of the hole in strip logs:

The formation will not be included in hole to hole section panels for those borings in which its
base is absent (as in “blank/omitted formations,” above).

The formation may or may not be included in stratigraphic models/profiles/fences – it

depends on how many borings include the base (for most gridding methods, a minimum of 3
points are required to create a surface). If you there are inadequate control points to create a
base surface (or a base surface that you like), you can request the generation of a “baseplate”
in stratigraphic profiles, fence diagrams, and models. This simply sets an elevation for the
base of the model.

65
Borehole Manager RockWorks2004

Exporting the Borehole Data

The Borehole Manager’s File / Export / From Borehole Manager tools are used to export
the contents of one or all boreholes to ASCII or Excel formats. For the ASCII format, you
can choose from a single or multiple files (one for each data tab).

See Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Entering Your Borehole Data /
Exporting Borehole Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Transferring the Borehole Data

The Borehole Manager’s File / Transfer / Borehole Files -> Utilities Datagrid tools are
used to transfer data from the Borehole Manager to the Geological Utilities for viewing and
editing (and possible transfer back to the Borehole Manager). Options include transfer of all
borehole locations (for coordinate translation, for use of mapping tools, etc.), all
stratigraphic contacts, and the contents of the current borehole datasheet (such as I-data).

See Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Entering Your Borehole Data /
Transferring Data to the Geological Utilities. See page 22 for more Help information.

66
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Chapter 3 - The Geological Utilities Datasheet

Entering Your Data
The Geological Utilities datasheet is one of the two main data windows in RockWorks.
It is used for entering general types of data.

(The other main data window is the Borehole Manager, specifically for entering
borehole data – downhole stratigraphy, lithology, geochemistry, geophysical
measurements, water level, etc. See Chapter 2 for information about that data window.)
The data you enter into the Geological Utilities datasheet can include simple XYZ data
for generating point and contour maps, strike and dip data for stereonet plots,
hydrochemical ion lists for Piper diagrams, and many more. This is a simplified
datasheet that operates much like other general spreadsheet applications.

67
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

The data you enter into the Geological Utilities datasheet can be used to create many
different types of maps and diagrams within RockWorks.
The Geological Utilities datasheet is saved in an ASCII Tab-Delimited format with the
file name extension “.atd”. The column headings and column styles (text or symbols or
lines or colors) are stored in a header block at the top of the file. (RockWorks no longer
uses an accompanying TEM file for data layout, as RockWorks99 did.

See ATD File Format in the Help / Reference section for details. See page 22 for
more Help information.)

RockWorks99 (and earlier) users: If your ATD files contain stratigraphy data
and/or linked LIT, CUR, HIS, or ZON files, you’ll use the new Borehole Manager. See
Importing Your RockWorks99 Data (page 32).
If your ATD files contain general data (XYZ, survey, surface hydrochemistry, etc.)
you’ll use the Geological Utilities datasheet. See Using the Datasheet (below) and
Opening RockWorks99 ATD files.

68
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Using the Datasheet

The "Geological Utilities" datasheet is a basic row-and-column data window that is one
of two data windows available in RockWorks. This section discusses how to create new
datasheet files, and how to open, save, and print these data files.
RockWorks99 users note that there are distinct instructions for opening RockWorks99
ATD files. See the topic below.

How to access the datasheet

To access the RockWorks Geological Utilities datasheet, click on the Geological
Utilities tab along the left side of the main program menu:

How to create a new datasheet

To display a new, blank datasheet, follow these steps:
1. Access the Geological Utilities Datasheet.
2. Select the File / New Datasheet command.
If there have been changes in the existing datasheet that have not yet been saved, the
program will prompt you whether you wish to save them.
Click Yes to save changes in the existing datasheet, or click No to discard the
69
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

changes in the existing datasheet.

3. Choose from the next window the type of column headers for the new file.
This window will list a variety of column layouts, from generic styles with
numbered column titles, to hydrochemistry ion layout. You may expand topics
(click on the "+" symbol) to view sub-topics. When you click on a layout sample,
the column titles and their types will be displayed to the right.
! If you don't know which to choose or prefer to design your own column titles,
choose Numbered Column Titles. Later, use the View / Columns tool to modify the
column names and types.
! RockWorks99 users: Column headings are no longer stored in the TEM files. In
fact, RockWorks2004 no longer uses TEM files at all. See ATD file format in the
Help messages Reference section for details.
4. Click OK.
The program will display a new, untitled datasheet, with the column headings you
selected. The file will be displayed as untitled in the upper title bar ("untitled.atd").

How to open an existing datasheet (RW2002, RW2004)

To open an existing datasheet that you have saved in RockWorks2002 or 2004, follow
these steps:
1. Access the Geological Utilities datasheet.
2. Select the File / Open Datasheet command.
3. In the pop-up menu, click either the Select option to browse for the ATD file you
wish to open, or choose one of the files in the “history” list that’s displayed there.
The default data file type is ATD.
4. When the desired file name is shown in the window, click OK to continue.
The program will load the file information into the datasheet’s cells. The column
headers are loaded from the header block listed in the file. The name of the current data
file will be displayed in the title bar at the top of the program window.
You can refer to the files in the "My Documents\RockWorks2004\Samples" folder for
formatting examples.
See also: Opening RockWorks99 Datasheets (below) for information about opening
earlier-version files. View / Columns for information about changing column titles and
types.

70
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

How to open a RockWorks99 (and earlier) datasheet

Since RockWorks2004 no longer uses a "Template" (TEM) file for datasheet layout, the
process of opening a datasheet created in an earlier version of the program is slightly
different.
See also: Importing RockWorks99 data into the Borehole Manager (page 32) if your data
represents downhole data.
Follow these steps to open RockWorks99 (and earlier) ATD files into the Geological
Utilities datasheet:
1. Access the Geological Utilities datasheet.
2. Click on the File menu and choose the Open Datasheet / Select option.
3. Browse for the existing RockWorks99 (or RockWorks98 or Stratos98) ATD file
you wish to open, accessing other drives and directories as necessary.
4. When the desired file name is shown in the window, click OK to continue.
In the next window, the program will explain that the selected ATD file doesn't contain a
header block because it's from an older version of RockWorks or Stratos.
5. Insert a check in the Import column data from old Template file check-box if you
wish to set up the columns as per the data template file (TEM) that had been created
along with the selected ATD file in the older version of the program. Click on the
large open-file button to browse for the name of this Template file.
Or, leave this box un-checked if you can't find the Template file or simply wish to
set the column headers to consecutive numbers.
6. Click OK to continue.
The program will display the data in the Datasheet.
7. If the formatting (column titles or styles) needs adjusting, choose the View /
Columns command.
! If you save this newly-formatted file, the column setup will now be saved in a "header"
block in the ATD file. This will render it unusable in earlier versions of RockWorks
unless you delete the header block.
See also Help / Contents / Reference / ATD File Format. See page 22 for more Help
information.

71
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

How to save a datasheet

Changes you have made to the data currently displayed in the Geological Utilities
datasheet can be saved on disk using the Save command.
1. Select the File / Save command.
If the data file already has a name (as shown in the program title bar), selecting Save
will save the current version on disk, under the same name.
If the data file is untitled (as shown in the program title bar), the program will
display a dialog box, in which you can specify the name under which the data file is
to be saved.
2. Save Datasheet As: Click on the large button to access a standard Windows dialog
box where you can type in the name to assign to the data file, accessing other drives
or directories as necessary. Data files are stored with an “.atd” file name extension,
for "ASCII Tab-Delimited" files.
3. Click OK.
The program will save the information in the data window on disk, and the default name
shown in the program’s title bar will be updated as necessary.
RockWorks99 users: Column headings are no longer stored in the TEM files; they are
stored right in the ATD file itself. RockWorks2004 no longer uses TEM files at all.
See also Help / Contents / Reference / ATD File Format. See page 22 for more Help
information.

How to save a datasheet under a different name

If you wish to save the current Geological Utilities datasheet under a different file name,
use the Save As command.
1. Select the File / Save As command.
The program will display a dialog for entry of the file’s name.
2. Save Datasheet As: Click on the large button to access a dialog box where you can
type in the name to assign to the data file. Data files are stored with an “.atd” file
name extension, for "ASCII Tab-Delimited" files.
3. Click OK.
The program will save the information in the Datasheet on disk under the specified file
name, and will update the default name shown in the program’s title bar.

72
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

How to print your datasheet

To output the data contained in Geological Utilities datasheet to your printer, follow
these steps:
1. Select the File / Print command.
The program will display a print setup dialog box. Along the left will be displayed
all of the column names, as defined in the header of the ATD file.
2. Print?: This is a yes/no setting that tells the program whether the column should be
included on the printout. To change the setting, just double-click on the cell with
your mouse. This will toggle the setting from No to Yes and vice versa. Note that if
you choose to print the symbol and/or color columns, you will see their text version
- symbol number or color number. You will not see the graphic symbol or color
block. Color numbers may extend up to 10 characters.
3. Printer Setup: Click on this button to establish the type of printer you are using.
When invoked, the program will display a dialog box with a pop-up list box
containing the printers that are currently installed within Windows. You may select
the printer you wish to use. The Options button will display additional printer
configuration dialog boxes for the selected printer, such as paper orientation, etc.
See your Windows documentation for information about installing printer drivers,
and see your printer’s documentation regarding specific printer settings.
When you have established the printer settings to your satisfaction, choose the OK
button to return to the RockWorks Spreadsheet Printing Options window. Note that
once your printer is set up within the program, you will not need to re-select it
unless the setup changes in some way.
4. To send the selected data to the selected printer, click OK at the bottom of the
Spreadsheet Printing Options window.
The program will display a dialog box displaying print options specific to your
printer. This is typically used to establish the range of pages to be printed, the
number of copies, and so on.
5. Choose the OK button when you are ready to have the file printed.
The spreadsheet data will be sent to the printer. The program will dimension the width
of the columns automatically to assure that all data is visible. It will automatically panel
the columns and/or rows not visible on the first page onto additional pages. The font
used in the printout should match the font displayed on the screen (established under
View / General Preferences / Data Manager).

73
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Laying Out Your Datasheet

The Geological Utilities datasheet in RockWorks is used to enter rows and columns of a
variety of different kinds of data. This section discusses how to set up different kinds of
data for use in the program, and how to change the column headings and column types.
! With a few exceptions, most of these data structures are flexible. In the examples
provided, we have tried to illustrate the minimum required data as well as "typical" data
layouts, but you can organize your data columns any way you wish. During processing
you can always specify which spreadsheet columns contain what data.
See also The Borehole Manager (page 31) regarding setting up downhole lithology,
stratigraphy, geophysics, and other data.

More information for all of these data structures is included in the RockWorks
Searchable Help system. At the main program screen, select Help / Contents, and
locate the “Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data” section. See page
22 for more Help information.

Data for Maps and General Diagrams

XYZ Data
"XYZ" data can be entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet to represent X and Y
location coordinates and a measured "Z" value of some kind, such as elevations or
geochemistry. This basic data layout can be run through Map / EZ Map to create a
simple point map or line/color-filled contour map. Or, you can create a grid model of
the XYZ data (Map / Grid-Based Map) for display as a 2D contour map or 3D surface.

74
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

! RockWorks offers a variety of data layout suggestions, but you can organize your data
columns any way you wish. During processing you can always specify which column
contains what data.
Sample files: XYelevations.atd
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Generic heading and select XYZ (Easting, Northing, Elevation) or XYZ (ID,
Symbol, Easting, Northing, Elevation).

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / XYZ Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Multivariate Data
"Multivariate" data can be entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet to list 2 or more
components to be represented in a ternary diagram (Stats / Ternary, page 221), in a
multi-variate map (Maps / Multivariate / Pie, Barchart, Starburst, page 113).
This example illlustrates how you might set up a date file to list different soil
components. This file could be used with the Stats / Ternary option to illustrate the
components in a ternary diagram.

75
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Sample Files: Soil Properties.atd for z-values representing soil components (sand,
gravel, clay), geochemical measurements, and geotechnical parameters for use in a
ternary diagram, display in maps, and more.
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Generic grouping and choose Ternary Diagram for a generic data layout.
Or, expand the Civil Engineering heading and select Soil Classification. Remember
that you can change column names and column types easily using View / Column
Titles.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Multi-Variate Data. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Survey (Bearing, Distance) Data

These data files, entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet, identify locations using
bearing and distance (and optionally inclination) measurements. These can be translated
to XYZ coordinates and/or illustrated as a 2D or 3D survey map (Survey /
Bearing/Distance, page 223).

76
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

You must enter information for both the known control points and for the survey
stations. See the Help file for details.
Sample files: = Survey.atd
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Surveying heading and select Pace and Compass Style Surveying.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Survey (Bearing/Distance)Data. See page 22 for more
Help information.

Survey (Triangulation) Data

These data files, entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet, identify locations using
2 or more sightings in bearing and inclination to known control points. These can be
translated to XYZ coordinates using the Survey / Triangulation command (page 223).

77
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

You must enter information for both the known control points and for the survey
stations. See the Help file for details.
Sample files: = Trisurvey.atd
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Surveying heading and select Triangulation Based Surveying.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Survey (Triangulation) Data. See page 22 for more
Help information.

Shotpoint Data
These data files are typically imported into the Geological Utilities datasheet using the
File / Import / SEG-P1 tool. They can be represented as shotpoint maps using the Map
/ Shotpoints command (page 124).

78
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Sample files: Shotpoints.sp1, which must be imported into the datasheet using the
Import / SEG-P1 Data tool.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Shotpoint Data. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Land Grid Well Descriptions

"Land Grid" well descriptions are entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet using a
Range, Township, and Section notation format. RockWorks can compute (or "spot")
X,Y location coordinates for these descriptions using a commercial or idealized
reference land grid as reference (Coords / Jeffersonial Points -> Cartesian, page 126).
Once the wells have X,Y location coordinates, their locations can be displayed in a point
map (Map / EZ Map).

79
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

! Also required for translation of this type of well location description into X,Y is a
"reference" land grid file that contains necessary section boundary coordinate
information. These land grid data files must be created by you prior to spotting your
wells, by importing commercial land grid data or creating an idealized land grid.
Sample files: Spot.atd.
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Jeffersonian Land Grid heading and select Congressional well locations.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Land Grid Well Descriptions. See page 22 for more
Help information.

Land Grid Lease Descriptions

"Land Grid Lease" descriptions are entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet using
a Range, Township, and Section notation format. RockWorks can compute (or "spot")
X,Y location coordinates for the lease corners using a commerical or idealized reference
land grid as reference (Coords / Jeffersonial Polygons -> Cartesian, page 126). Once
the leases have X,Y corner coordinates computed, their locations can be displayed in a
lease map (Map / Land Grid / Lease Map).

80
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

! Also required for translation of this type of lease description into X,Y is a "reference"
land grid file that contains necessary section boundary coordinate information. These
land grid data files must be created by you prior to spotting your lease blocks, by
importing commercial land grid data or creating an idealized land grid.
Sample files: LeaseMap.atd.
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Jeffersonian Land Grid heading and select Leases.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Land Grid Lease Descriptions. See page 22 for more
Help information.

Global Map Point Data

If you wish to plot individual points on a RockWorks global map (Map / Sphereplot,
page 125), you simply need to enter the longitude and latitude coordinates for the points
in two columns in the main datasheet. This example illustrates both global points and
polygons.

81
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Column summary:
Longitude, Latitude Coordinates: Required. The program must have location
coordinates in order to plot the points on the global map. These must be listed in
longitude/latitude.
Sample files: Sphere points.atd
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Mapping heading and select SpherePlot Points.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Global Map Point Data. See page 22 for more Help
information.

82
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Global Map Polyline Data

If you wish to plot one or more point-to-point lines on a RockWorks global map (Map /
Sphereplot, page 125), you simply need to enter the longitude and latitude coordinates
for the endpoints in two columns in the main datasheet. The example in the previous
topic illustrates both global polylines and point locations.
Sample files: Sphere polylines.atd
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Mapping heading and select SpherePlot Polylines.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Global Map Polyline Data. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Grid Model Lists

Stratigraphy Grid Lists

These files are used to build a 3D stratigraphic fences, models, and stacked surfaces from
existing grid models. They are used in the Geological Utilities Grid / Grids ->
Stratigraphic Fence, Grids -> Stratigraphic Model, and Grids -> Stacked Surfaces
options.

83
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

!! When creating the list of units, be sure to list them in reverse order (with the lowest
stratigraphic unit at the top of the listing to highest stratigraphic unit at the bottom of the
listing). This convention is due to a restriction within the OpenGL environment.
!! All of the GRD models must have the same dimensions and node spacing in order for
the program to be able to build the stratigraphic diagrams. They must also reside in the
same project folder as the ATD file.
Sample file: gridlist.atd
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Stratigraphy heading and select Grid Lists.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Grid Lists. See page 22 for more Help information.

Multi-Variate Anomaly Grid Lists

These files are used to list the grid models and weighting factors to be run through the
multivariate anomaly analysis (Grid / Statistics / Multivariate Anomalies). They have a
very simple format.

In the Grid Name column you list the names of the grid models to be processed. They
must reside in the current project folder. In the Weight column, you enter for each grid
model the amount it should be weighted in the anomaly analysis. A weight of “1” is
default if no weighting is entered. The weighting value will be multiplied to the

84
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

standardized grid node values during analysis (so a grid model weighted at “2” will have
twice the influence of a grid model weighted “1” in the output model).
! All of the GRD models must have the same dimensions and node spacing in order for the
program to be able to perform the grid analysis.
Sample file: none
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Stratigraphy heading and select Multi-Variate Anomaly Grid List.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Multi-Variate Anomaly Grid Lists. See page 22 for
more Help information.

Grid to Logs Lists

These files are used to define (or redefine) the contacts within existing stratigraphic logs
in the Borehole Manager based on the contents of a list of one or more stratigraphic
surface models, using the RockWorks Geological Utilities Grid / Grids -> Stratigraphic
Logs tool.

Notes: Each unit that you list here MUST also be defined in the current Stratigraphy Table
in the Borehole Manager. The grid surfaces and bases must reside in the same folder as
the Grid to Logs ATD file. The grid surfaces and bases must all have the same node
densities.
Sample file: none
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Stratigraphy heading and select Grids to Logs Lists.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Grid to Logs Data Format. See page 22 for more Help
information.

85
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Data for Solid Models

XYZG Data
"XYZG" data can be entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet to represent X, Y,
and Z location coordinates (easting, northing, and elevation) and a measured "G" value
of some kind, such as geochemistry or geophysical measurements. This basic data
layout can be run through Solid / Model for display as a 3-dimensional isosurface or
block diagram.
! Use the Borehole Manager instead of the Geological Utilities datasheet if you have
multiple downhole measurements for each well. See Entering the Borehole Data and
How to Enter Point-Sampled Data (page 49) or Interval-Sampled Data (page 46).
Example 1: This example shows how you might enter X,Y,Z,G data into the Geological
Utilities datasheet for modeling.

Example 2: RockWorks can also create a solid model from a separate ASCII XYZG
file. In this case, no data is read from the Geological Utilities datasheet. Such a file can
be exported from many software programs. See the Help file for details.
Sample files: = XYZG.atd
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Generic heading and select XYZG.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / XYZG Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

86
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Hydrology/Hydrochemistry Data

Drawdown Data
Well drawdown data can be entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet for the
purpose of computing and displaying a drawdown surface (Hydrology / Drawdown
Surface, page 204). Specific fields are required.

Sample file: pumpdata.atd.

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Hydrology/Hydrogeology heading and select Drawdown Surface Modeling.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Drawdown Data. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Hydrograph Data
Water level and precipitation data can be entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet
for the purpose of creating a hydrograph diagram (Hydrology / Hydrograph, page 205).
Hydrograph files list sampling dates and water level and/or precipitation measurements
for that date.

87
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Sample files: HydroGraph.atd

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Hydrology/Hydrogeology heading and select Hydrograph.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data / Laying
Out Your Datasheet / Hydrograph Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Hydrochemistry (Ion) Data

Anion and cation concentrations can be entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet
for the purposes of creating Piper diagrams, Stiff diagrams, computing total dissolved
solids, and/or ion balances (Hydrochemistry menu, page 205). These "hydrochemistry"
files list cation and anion concentrations in parts per million (or milligrams per liter).
There are 4 required cations and 4 required anions; additional cations and anions may be
included as you wish.

88
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Sample files: HydroChem.atd

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Hydrology/Hydrogeology heading and select Hydrochemistry.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Hydrochemistry data. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Planar and Linear Data

Strike and Dip Data

Strike and dip measurements can be entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet for
the purposes of creating strike and dip maps, rose diagrams (bearings only), stereonet
diagrams, and of computing planar intersections (see Chapter 14). There are a variety of
ways you can structure these files, depending on your desired output.
Example 1: This example lists site-specific strike and dip measurements, with strike
shown in azimuth bearings. These data could be displayed as a strike and dip map,
stereonet diagram, rose diagram (using azimuth only), or computed for planar
intersections.

89
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Example 2: This example lists site-specific strike and dip measurements, with strike
shown in quadrant format.

! Note that the dip angle must NOT include any directional notation.
Example 3: This example lists strike and dip measurements with no X,Y location
coordinates. This setup could be used to create stereonets and/or rose diagrams, with
symbols for the sample sites (used in Stereonet only).

Sample files: Planes.atd.

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Structural Geology heading and select Strikes and Dips.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data / Laying
Out Your Datasheet / Strike and Dip data. See page 22 for more Help information.
90
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Lineation Endpoint Data

Lineation endpoint data can be entered into the Geological Utilities datasheet for the
purposes of computing lineation azimuth/midpoint/lengths and lineation densities &
intersections, and for creating rose diagrams, lineation maps, and arrow maps (Linears
menu, see Chapter 14).

Example:

Sample file: Lines.atd

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Structural Geology heading and select Lineation Endpoints for a simple
X1Y1X2Y2 layout, or Colored Lineations for a setup that will also include an ID and
linestyle column.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Lineation Data. See page 22 for more Help information.
See also: Digitizing data (page 110) for information about digitizing line endpoint data
directly into the datasheet. Movement Data structure (below) for X1Y1X2Y2 data that
also have elevation and time measurements associated with them, for movement
analysis.

91
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Beta Pairs Data

These files list the strike bearing and dip angle for pairs of planes, for which you wish to
compute intersection bearing and plunge (Planes menu / Beta Pairs, page 214).
Example:

This example illustrates data entered using the Right Hand Rule format (dip direction
clockwise from strike); you may also enter the planar data as dip direction and dip angle.
Sample file: BetaPairs.atd.
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Structural Geology heading and select Beta Pairs.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Beta Pairs Data. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Geotechnical Data

Movement Data
"Movement Data" files list the X1,Y1 beginning coordinates and X2,Y2 ending
coordinates of samples, with optional elevation and time measurements. These can be
used in "movement analysis" (Geotechnical menu, page 217) in which direction and
distance, with optional inclination and velocity, can be measured between beginning and
ending points, and stored in the datasheet.

92
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Example:

Sample file: Movement.atd

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Civil Engineering heading and select Movement Analysis.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data / Laying
Out Your Datasheet / Slope Movement Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

3D Graphic Data
These files are read by the tools in the Grafix / 3D Utilities menu.

3D Discs
These files are used to build a 3D image containing tipped disks at specific locations,
with a declared XYZ location, dip direction (0 to 360), dip angle (0 to -90 degrees,
negative, from horizontal for downward dips, or 0 to +90 for upward dip entry), radius in
map units, and aperture. (See Grafix / 3D Utilities / Discs, page 227.)

93
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

This example was generated by exporting fracture data from the Borehole Manager to
the Geological Utilities (Fractures / Export).
Example:

Sample file: fractures.atd.

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Grafix3D heading and select 3D Discs.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data / Laying
Out Your Datasheet / 3D Discs Data Format. See page 22 for more Help information.

3D Cube Image Lists

These files are used to display 6 JPG or BMP images on the sides of a 3-dimensional cube
in RockPlot3D. The program requires 13 columns of information: The cube title, the
X,Y,Z coordinates for the cube centers, the width, depth, and height of the cubes, and the
6 image names.

94
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Example:

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Grafix 3D heading and select 3D Cubes.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data / Laying
Out Your Datasheet / 3D Cube Image Lists. See page 22 for more Help information.

Horizontal Panel Image Lists

These files are used to display one or more JPG or BMP images as non-vertical panels in
RockPlot3D. (See Grafix / 3D Utilities / Images / Panels / Horizontal, page 229.)
This program requires 14 columns of information: The names of the images to be
displayed in the OpenGL panels, their layer name, and the X, Y, and Z coordinates for
each corner.
Example:

95
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

! OpenGL vertical panels are assumed to be vertical and coordinates for only two corners
are required. By contrast, RockWorks allows you to enter X, Y, and elevation
coordinates for each corner of these "horizontal" panels. Thus, these panels are not
required to be horizontal.
Sample file: Mine Level Bitmaps.atd which reference these bitmaps: gold_1450.bmp,
gold_1400.bmp, and gold_1350.bmp.
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Grafix3D heading and select Horizontal Image Panels.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Horizontal Panel Image Lists. See page 22 for more
Help information.

Vertical Panel Image Lists

These files are used to display one or more JPG or BMP images as 3-dimensional panels
in RockPlot3D. (See Grafix / 3D Utilities / Images / Panels / Vertical, page 229.)
This program requires 8 columns of information: The names of the images to be
displayed in the OpenGL panels, their layer name, and the X, Y, and Z coordinates for
the lower-left and upper-right corners of the bitmap image.
Example:

Sample file: GPRpanels.atd which reference these bitmaps: GPR_south.jpg,

GPR_north.jpg, GPR_west.jpg, and GPR_east.jpg.
Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Grafix 3D heading and select Vertical Image Panels.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data / Laying
Out Your Datasheet / Vertical Panel Image Lists. See page 22 for more Help
information.

96
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

3D Oriented Objects
These files are used to build a 3D image containing cone shapes at specific XYZ
locations, with a declared bearing and inclination. (See Grafix / 3D Utilities / Oriented
Objects, page 233.) This program requires 7 columns of information: The object name,
color, X, Y, and Z coordinates, bearing, and inclination.
Example:

Sample file: Fossils.atd.

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Grafix 3D heading and select 3D Oriented Samples.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Oriented Objects Data Format. See page 22 for more
Help information.

3D Spheres
These files are used to build a 3D image containing spheres or oblates at specific XYZ
locations, with a declared color and size. (See Grafix / 3D Utilities / Spheres, page
231.) This program requires 5 columns of information: X Y Z location of the sphere,
the color, and the magnitude or size.

97
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Example:

Sample file: earthquakes.atd.

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles)
expand the Grafix 3D heading and select 3D Spheres.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data / Laying
Out Your Datasheet / 3D Spheres Data Format. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Horizontal Tanks
These files are used to build a 3D image containing horizontal cylinders at specific XYZ
locations, with a declared radius and color. (See Grafix / 3D Utilities / Storage Tanks /
Horizontal, page 231.) This program requires 8 columns of information: The object
name, X and Y location of one end of the tank, X and Y coordinate for the other end of
the tank, tank elevation, radius, and color.

98
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Example:

Sample file: buried tanks.atd.

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Grafix 3D heading and select Horizontal Storage Tanks.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Horizontal Tanks Data Format. See page 22 for more
Help information.

Vertical Tanks
These files are used to build a 3D image containing vertical cylinders at specific XYZ
locations, with a declared radius, height and color. (See Grafix / 3D Utilities / Storage
Tanks / Vertical, page 232.) This program requires 8 columns of information: The
object name, X Y Z location of the tank, radius, height, and color.
Example:

99
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Sample file: Surface tanks.atd.

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Grafix 3D heading and select Vertical Storage Tanks.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / Vertical Tanks Data Format. See page 22 for more Help
information.

3D Triangles
These files are used to build a 3D image containing tipped triangles at specific locations,
with a declared XYZ coordinates for each triangle vertex. (See Grafix / 3D Utilities /
Triangles, page 232.)
Example:

Sample file: none.

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Grafix 3D heading and select 3D Triangles.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / 3D Triangles Data Format. See page 22 for more Help
information.

3D Tubes
These files are used to build a 3D image containing tubes or pipes drawn between pairs
of user-specified XYZ points. (See Grafix / 3D Utilities / Tubes, page 229.) This
program requires 8 columns of information: The "names" or labels for the individual
tubes, the tube color, and the X, Y, and Z coordinates for the beginning and ending
points of the tubes.

100
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Example:

Sample file: Mine workings.atd.

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Grafix 3D heading and select 3D Tubes.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /
Laying Out Your Datasheet / 3D Tubes Data Format. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Other Graphic Data

PicShow Image Lists

These files are used to display JPG or BMP images in a RockWorks "slide show," using
the PicShow option in the Util / Images menu. This program requires only two columns
of information: The names of the images to be displayed in the "slide show," and the
delay time between frame display.

101
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Example:

Sample file: none

Template: When creating a new file (File / New Datasheet / Datasheet Column Titles),
expand the Miscellaneous heading and select PicShow Image List.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data / Laying
Out Your Datasheet / PicShow Image Lists. See page 22 for more Help information.

Editing the Datasheet

Editing the Datasheet - Overview

This section summarizes some of the tools used to modify the contents of the Geological
Utilities datasheet in RockWorks.

More complete information can be found in the on-line help. See Help / Contents /
Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data / Datasheet Mechanics. See page 22 for
more Help information.

Changing Column Titles and Styles

Change a data column title

To change the name of a column in the current Geological Utilities datasheet, follow
these steps:
1. Access the Geological Utilities datasheet.
2. Select the View / Columns command.
The "Title" column in the Column Settings window lists the column names. The names
listed here are also displayed in the gray heading cells at the top of the datasheet.

102
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

3. Left-click in the cell containing the title to be changed to highlight the existing text.
4. Type in the new text for the column title.
! You should limit the column names to 20 characters, including spaces.
5. Repeat this process for as many columns as you wish in the scrolling list, by
clicking in each cell and typing a new name.

Change the Column Type

The column "type" determines how the information in a Geological Utilities datasheet
column will be displayed or how it will "behave": as text, graphic symbols, graphic
lines, graphic patterns, a hyperlink to a file, and so on.
To change the column type, follow these steps:
1. Access the Geological Utilities datasheet.
2. Select the View / Columns command.
The "Data Type" column in the Column Settings window lists the column types.
3. Left-click in the Data Type cell for the column to be changed.
The program will display a pop-up window that lists all of the available column
types.
4. Select the data column's type by clicking in the appropriate selection.
Text columns display their contents as textual characters, both alphabetic and
numeric.
Most of your columns will probably be set to Text columns, including X and Y
location coordinates, any sample ID’s, measured data values, and other project
information. Text columns simply display their contents as letters and numbers.

You may also display symbols, colors, lines, and patterns as text if you prefer not
to see their graphic display.
103
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Symbol columns display the contents of the column as graphic symbols, in a user-
selected color.
Datasheet columns that you set as Symbol columns are used to display actual
symbol designs and colors that you have selected for each well or sample site.

To select a symbol simply double-click in the appropriate cell in the datasheet's

Symbol column, and select a symbol from the displayed list.
The symbols are actually stored in the ATD file as textual entries of the selected
symbols' index numbers. If you were to look at the ATD file in a text editor, you
would see that symbol number 5 is recorded with a "5", and symbol number 17 is
recorded with a "17". See the Help messages for more information about symbol
columns.
Color columns display the contents of the column as a block of color.
Since RockWorks99, Color columns are not as commonly used as they were in
RockWorks98 and earlier versions, since the program now stores colors along
with symbols designs and line styles in the Geological Utilities datasheet.
You may still wish to use an independent Color column, however, if you have
strike and dip data and wish to create a strike and dip map with specific colors for
each sample, or if you are building stratigraphic grid lists and need to assign
different colors to different formations. Color columns are also still used for 3D
graphic items such as tanks and pipes.

104
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

! RockWorks98 and earlier users: See the Edit menu's Columns / Combine /
Symbols & Colors or Line Types & Colors commands for information about
how to automatically append color information to your symbol or line style
columns.
Line columns display the contents of the column as graphic lines in a user-selected
color.
Datasheet columns that you set as Line columns are used to select a line style and
thickness for each sample listed in rows in the main datasheet. The actual line
styles and colors are displayed in the column. These are typically used when
plotting lineation or arrow maps (Linears menu).

To select a line style and color, simply double-click in the appropriate cell in the
datasheet's Line column, and select a line style and width from the displayed list.
See the Help messages for more information about line columns.
Pattern columns display the contents of the column as a graphic pattern.
Datasheet columns that you set as Pattern columns are used to display actual
pattern designs and colors that you have selected for each sample or row in the
datasheet. These are often used in lease boundary files to declare a particular
pattern with which to fill the lease area in a map.

105
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

To select a pattern simply double-click in the appropriate cell in the datasheet's

Pattern column, and select a pattern and colors from the displayed list.
The patterns are actually stored in the ATD file as textual entries of the selected
patterns' index numbers. If you were to look at the ATD file in a text editor, you
would see that pattern number 1 is recorded with a "1", and pattern number 20 is
recorded with a "20".
Patterns are also stored with their "density" as well as the user-selected
foreground and background colors. In Text view, the pattern density, and color
of the pattern lines (foreground) and the color of the background will be listed
after the pattern index number.
Note that color numbers can range up into the millions.
File columns are used to list file names, such as grid models, images, or other files
to be processed within the program.
Setting a column to a “File” type will cause the program to display an open-file
dialog if the user double-clicks on the cell. This capability provides a useful
method for browsing for file names when setting up datasheets for program such
as the Grafix / 3D-Utilities / Images / Panels / Vertical application.
Note that file names can also be listed in basic Text-style columns.
Hyperlink columns are also used to list file names, such as grid models, images, or
other files to be processed within the program.
In contrast to “File” columns (above) which display a browse window when you
double-click in a cell, Hyperlink columns will actually load the file into whatever
Windows application is associated with the file name. For example, double-
clicking on a file ending with ".JPG" might load the file into a bitmap editor.
5. Repeat this process for as many columns as you wish in the scrolling list, by
clicking in each cell and choosing a type.
RockWorks99 users: Wondering where the Curve, Histogram, Lithology, and Zone
columns went? These data are now entered in the Borehole Manager. See Entering the
Borehole Data (page 38) for details.

Filtering Data
To create a filtered subset of the data currently displayed in the datasheet, follow these
steps:
1. Access the Geological Utilities datasheet.
2. Open the datasheet to be manipulated.
3. Click on the Filter button on the toolbar or choose the Edit / Filter command.

106
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

4. You can filter up to 5 columns of information in the datasheet. In the prompts along
the left side of the window you need to select the names of the columns you wish to
filter. Those columns whose filters you don’t activate will be ignored. For example,
if you turn on Filter A and Filter B (in the middle pane), be sure you have Column A
and Column B correctly selected.
5. In the middle pane of the window, you need to tell the program how many of the data
columns specified to the left you actually wish to filter. The filter letters correspond
to the column letters.
Filter "A": Insert a check here to specify filter information for the data selected to
the left in "Column A". Expand this heading to enter the Minimum and Maximum
numeric values that you wish to filter for.
Filter "B": Insert a check here to specify filter information for the data selected to
the left in "Column B". As above, expand this heading to enter the Minimum and
Maximum numeric values that you wish to filter for. Leave this check-box blank if
you don't want to apply this filter.
Continue in this manner for Filters "C" through "E".
Here's an example in which the filtered subset will contain only those records with
Easting coordinates between 652900 and 653000 AND Northing coordinates between
5535200 and 5535700.

! This operates as an "AND" filter, not an "OR" filter. That means that only those
records that meet all of the filtering criteria will be included in the output file.
! You cannot impose multiple filters on a single column.
6. Click the OK button to proceed.
The program will read through the data displayed in the main datasheet and determine
those records that meet all of the filtering parameters you established. These records
will be displayed in a new, untitled datasheet.
107
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Other Data Editing Tools

Delete: Deletes the contents of the highlighted cell(s) in the current datasheet. The
contents are not placed on the computer's clipboard memory; they are just deleted.
Cut All: Removes the entire contents of the current datasheet, placing the contents in
the computer's clipboard memory for later pasting. This is the same operation as would
occur if you were to hand-select all of the cells in the current datasheet and then select
the Edit / Cut command.
Copy All: Places a copy of the entire contents of the current datasheet in the clipboard
memory for later pasting. This is the same operation as would occur if you were to
hand-select all of the cells in the current datasheet and then select the Edit / Copy
command.
Paste All: Replaces the current datasheet with the contents of the clipboard.
Columns / Insert: Inserts a new, blank column in the active datasheet.
Columns / Delete: Deletes one or more columns from the active datasheet.
Columns / Math: Performs simple arithmetic operations on the values within a selected
column in the current datasheet.
Columns / Merge: Merges the contents of two columns in the active datasheet, with a
user-specified separator.
Columns / Increment: Lists numeric values in a column, incrementing the values by
the real number you declare.
Columns / Combine: Used to combine symbol + color columns or linestyle + color
columns, in the Geological Utilities datasheet only.
Columns / Fix: Strips out commas, tabs and spaces from numeric values in a selected
column.
Rows / Insert: Inserts a user-specified number of rows above the currently active row in
the datasheet, offering the user the option to change the default row number.
Rows / Delete: Deletes a user-specified number of rows in the current datasheet,
offering the option to change the default row number.
Rows / Go to: Advances to a specific row in the current datasheet.
Rows / Sort: Sorts the rows in the current datasheet based on a selected column of
values.

Importing Data
Many of you will enter your data right within the RockWare program's Geological
Utilities datasheet, by typing directly from the keyboard, or by cutting and pasting data
from another document.
108
RockWorks2004 Geological Utilities

Another method of getting data into the program is to import data from other
applications or commercial sources. The following import tools are available; see these
Help topics:

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /

Importing Data /… See page 22 for more Help information.
Importing ASCII Data into the Datasheet.
Importing DBF Files into the Datasheet.
Importing DeLorme Data.
Importing DXF XYZ Data into the Datasheet.
Importing GSM-19 Data.
Importing Laser Atlanta Data.
Importing ModPath Pathline Data.
Importing RockBase Data.
Importing SEG-P1 Shotpoint Data.
Importing XLS (Excel) Data.

Exporting Data from the Geological Utilities Datasheet

If you wish to export the data contained in the Geological Utilities datasheet, use the File
/ Export command. It offers export as a text file, a DBF-format file, or a Microsoft
Excel (XLS) file. See these Help topics:

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /

Exporting Data / …. See page 22 for more Help information.
Exporting the Datasheet to ASCII Format
Exporting the Datasheet to DBF Format
Exporting the Datasheet to XLS Format

Transferring Data to the Borehole Manager

Use the File / Transfer tools to transfer the following data from the Geological Utilities to
the Borehole Manager:
Locations / Utilities Datagrid -> Borehole Files: This tool reads specific data fields from
the Geological Utilities datasheet and records them in the Borehole Manager Location
tabs. This can be useful if you have done some coordinate manipulation in the Geological
Utilities and want the new coordinates to be represented in the Borehole Manager's BH
files. Or, this can also be a handy way to start a new set of BH files with location
information for a new project.
Stratigraphy / Utilities Datagrid -> Borehole Files: This tool reads specific data fields
from the Geological Utilities datasheet and records them in the Borehole Manager
109
Geological Utilities RockWorks2004

Stratigraphy tabs. This can be useful if you have done some manipulation of the
stratigraphic elevations in the Geological Utilities and want the modified data to be
represented in the Borehole Manager.
! It is required that the Geological Utilities data be listed in a specific order in order to
transfer properly. See the Help messages for details.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /

Transferring Data to the Borehole Manager. See page 22 for more Help information.

Digitizing Data

Digitizing Data - Overview

RockWorks offers two tools in the Edit menu that permit you to use an electronic
digitizing tablet to enter either X and Y point data or line endpoints directly into the
Geological Utilities datasheet. In this way, you can enter your sample site location
coordinates or lineation endpoint coordinates directly off of a paper map.
The digitizing tool is also available in the Polygon Vertices editor (see page 309).
! In order to use the digitizing capability of the program, you must have an electronic
digitizer attached to your computer and a Windows "driver" for the digitizer installed on
your computer. These drivers are supplied by the digitizer manufacturer. You must also
be sure that you have correctly set up your digitizing tablet. If there is no
communication between the digitizer and your computer, you aren’t going to be able to
digitize any points!
See also: Digitizing Data from Bitmaps (page 235).

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Entering Your Data /

Digitizing Data. See page 22 for more Help information.
Install the digitizer driver
Start the digitizing process
Calibrate the digitizer
Digitize Your Points

110
RockWorks2004 Maps

Chapter 4 – Creating Point, Contour and 3D

Surface Maps, and other Maps

These are some of the most commonly used tools of the RockWorks program: Mapping
sample locations (wells or simple surface sites), creating maps that illustrate a
quantitative value (elevations, formation thickness, surface geochemistry, density of
take-out pizza restaurants, etc.) measured at multiple X,Y locations. These can be 2D
contour maps or 3D surface maps. In addition, you can create maps that illustrate
shotpoint locations, land grid sections or leases, global points or polylines.

Point Maps
The procedures you will follow to create a point map will vary depending on whether you
have entered your data into the Borehole Manager (presumably you have well locations
and sub-surface data) or into the Geological Utilities datasheet (you have X,Y locations, at
minimum). This discussion is divided into Borehole Manager maps and Geological
Utilities maps.

111
Maps RockWorks2004

Borehole Manager: Creating a 2-Dimensional Borehole

Location Map

Use the Borehole Manager's Map / Borehole Locations / 2D tool to create a 2-

dimensional or plan view of your borehole locations. These maps may include unique
symbols and labels for each borehole, with optional borehole trace plots for deviated
holes, borders, and bitmap backgrounds. In addition, you can request a grid model of the
borehole surface elevations (also read from the Location tabs) for display as line or
color-filled contours with your point map.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool will specifically read the borehole Easting and
Northing coordinates and well symbols from the Location tab, and the downhole survey
data (if any) from the Orientation tab. If contours are requested, surface elevations are
read from the Location tabs. See Chapter 2 for details.
Menu command: Map / Borehole Locations
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Check your coordinates: If your borehole locations (as entered into the Location
tabs) are not in Eastings and Northings, you’ll need to translate your longitude/latitude
or Range/Township/Section descriptions first.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create a Borehole Location Map.

Help / Contents / Working with the Borehole Manager / Location Maps & Coordinate
Tools. See page 22 for more Help information.

112
RockWorks2004 Maps

Geological Utilities: Creating an EZ Symbol Map

The EZ-Map tool is used to build 2-dimensional (flat) maps for X, Y, and Z coordinate
data that can include several map layers. (Contour lines and color-filled contours are
optional. See also a later section regarding including contour lines.)
Datasheet: Geological Utilities “XYZ” file (page 74)
Menu command: Map / EZ-Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: RockWorks can create maps with uniform or variable symbol styles, and with
uniform or variable symbol sizes. This can be handy for differentiating your sites, and/or
for illustrating different measured values at those sites. You can include single or multiple
labels for each symbol. The program can automatically offset labels if overprinting is a
problem.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create Point and Surface Maps / Create an EZ Point
Map; Analyze Component Data / Create a Point Map with Variably-Scaled Symbols.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Mapping Tools / Contour and
Point Maps / Creating Easy Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

Geological Utilities: Creating Multivariate Maps

The Geological Utilities Map / Multivariate Maps tools are used to create maps that
illustrate two or more components at specific X,Y locations.

113
Maps RockWorks2004

Pie chart maps illustrate the relative percentage of the selected variables as varying-
width pie "slices" at each sample location. Examples include whole-rock geochemistry,
relative sand/silt/clay ratios, and non-geological parameters such as population
breakdowns.
Starburst maps illustrate the relative percentage of the selected variables as varying-
length pie "slices" at each sample location. Each component within a starburst has a
scaling factor that determines the radius of the wedge. This allows you to create
diagrams for variables with different units. For example, one wedge within a starburst
could represent amount of silica, which another could represent fracturing, which a third
might represent amount of alteration.
Bar chart maps illustrate the relative percentage of the selected variables as varying-
length histogram bars at each sample location.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities “XYZ” file, with multiple Z-value columns (page 74)
Menu command: Map / Multivariate Maps / Pie Chart Map or Starburst Map or
Bar Chart Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Refer to the Help messages for details about how to set up the data columns and
apply a scaling multplier for the starburst and bar chart maps.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Analyze Component Data / Illustrate Multiple
Components in a Pie Chart Map.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Mapping Tools / Multivariate

Maps. See page 22 for more Help information

2D Contour Maps
Contour maps illustrate quantitative values that have been measured over space. They can
be used to illustrate geological topics such as surface elevations, formation thickness or
average geochemical concentrations. They can illustrate non-geological topics such as
average voter turnout in a city or numbers of crimes in a neighborhood.
Entire books have been written about computer contouring, and that is a subject well
beyond the scope of this manual. Here we offer a summary of the tools you can use in
RockWorks to generate contour maps. For more information about the concepts of
gridding and contouring, please refer to the Help messages.

To grid or not to grid?

RockWorks offers two methods of creating 2D contour maps: Delaunay triangulation
contouring and grid-based contouring.

114
RockWorks2004 Maps

Delaunay Contouring
To generate contours, the Delaunay triangulation method constructs a series of triangles
with a data point at each vertex. The triangles are constructed so that the angles are as
close as possible to equi-angular. Contour lines are then interpolated between the
triangle vertices and connected together to form the map. This process has been referred
to as "dip-contouring" by some geologists.
Because it by-passes the gridding step, this mapping method operates the most quickly.
In addition, it honors all of the data values; many people prefer this method of
contouring since there is no loss of data integrity as a result of gridding. However,
RockWorks cannot build 3D surface maps using this method. Also, non-grid
triangulation can leave blank areas in the map where there are no control points, unless
you tell the program to insert "edge points." Contours tend to be very angular. You
must have at least four XYZ point triplets to create a Delaunay contour map using the
Geological Utilities Map / EZ Map tool. The Planes / 3-Point tool only requires 3
input triplets.

Grid-Based Contouring
Gridding is a process in which scattered, spatially-distributed data can be transformed into
a regular grid of numeric values. You might picture a grid model as a grid of imaginary
lines that overlays your source data points. In the process of gridding, the program assigns
a value to the grid line intersections, called grid nodes. RockWorks offers several
mathematical methods to do this interpolation of your data. Each operates differently, and
each has strengths and weaknesses.
A grid file is the computer file of numbers that contains the results of the gridding process.
It contains a listing of the X and Y location coordinates of the regularly-spaced grid nodes
and the extrapolated Z value at each node.
Because gridding is an interpolation process, it’s possible for the resulting map to look
quite different than you had expected. The benefits of gridding include having more
control over the map process, editing and filtering tools, smoother maps, and the ability to
construct 3D surfaces.
We generally recommend that you create both types of maps: Create a quick contour map
using the Delaunay triangulation technique, and then create another based on a grid model.
Compare them to determine which more accurately models your data. Some of the
mapping tools are discussed in the following topics.

115
Maps RockWorks2004

Geological Utilities: Creating a Delaunay-Triangulation

Contour Map

The EZ-Map tool is used to build 2-dimensional (flat) maps for X, Y, and Z coordinate
data, using the Delaunay triangulation technique. The maps can include several map
layers. (On an earlier page, we discussed creating a simple point map of X,Y data. It’s
the same program tool – just be sure to turn on line or color contours.)
Datasheet: Geological Utilities “XYZ” file (page 74)
Menu command: Map / EZ-Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Because this contouring method draws a triangulation network among the given
control points only, the Interpolate Edge Points map option can be used to force the map
edges to a full rectangular shape.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create Point and Surface Maps / Create an EZ Contour
Map.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Mapping Tools / Contour and
Point Maps / Creating Easy Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

Geological Utilities: Creating a Grid-Based Contour Map

The Geological Utilities Grid-Based Map tool is used to create grid models of XYZ data
in the Geological Utilities datasheet or in an external ASCII file. The Z values can
represent surface elevations or geochemistry or virtually any measured value. You can
choose the "gridding" method used to model the Z values. You can then create a 2-
116
RockWorks2004 Maps

dimensional (flat) map or 3-dimensional surface map of the grid model. This section
discusses 2D maps.
! If you have borehole data and wish to create grid-based formation structure maps, see the
next topic.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities “XYZ” file (page 74). Note that this tool will also grid
and map XYZ data stored in an external ASCII file
Menu command: Map / Grid-Based Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: This tool can create a grid model alone (no map), a map of an existing grid
model, and a new grid model and map of the XYZ data. Since the grid model is saved
on disk, you can create a map from an existing grid model (no need to re-grid). This is
useful if you have processes a grid model through the filtering tools in the Geological
Utilities Grid menu. This tool can create 3D surface maps of grid models, as well.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create Point and Surface Maps / Create a Grid-Based
2D Contour Map.
Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Mapping Tools / Contour and
Point Maps / Grid-Based Maps. See page 22 for more Help information

Borehole Manager: Creating 2D Borehole Elevation Maps

The Borehole Manager’s Map / Borehole Locations tool is used to create a symbol map
of the borehole locations. It can also be used to generate a grid model and a 2D contour
map of the borings’ surface elevations.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool reads location and elevation information from
the Location tabs.
Menu command: Map / Borehole Locations
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: To create a 3D image of the resulting surface grid model, you can use the
Geological Utilities Map / Grid-Based Map tool, selecting Use Existing Grid.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create a Borehole Location Map.

117
Maps RockWorks2004

Help / Contents / Working with the Borehole Manager / Location Maps & Coordinate
Tools. See page 22 for more Help information.

Borehole Manager: Creating 2D Stratigraphic Structure Maps

Use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Structural Elevations / 2-Dimensional

tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat) contour map representing the elevations at the
surface of a selected stratigraphic unit. You can choose the gridding method to be used
to model the formation elevations. The structure map can include a variety of map
layers.
See also: Grid-based maps for information about creating 2D contour maps from simple
XYZ data in the Geological Utilities datasheet.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, and 44).
Menu command: Stratigraphy / Structural Elevations / 2-Dimensional
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Be sure you have your formations listed correctly in the Stratigraphy Table. The
grid model that’s created in this program can be manipulated using the Geological
Utilities Grid menu tools, and displayed using Map / Grid-Based Map (choose
Existing Model). If you wish to transfer your stratigraphic data to the Geological
Utilities datasheet, you can do so using the File / Transfer / Borehole Files -> Utilities
Datagrid or Stratigraphy / Export tools.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Stratigraphy Diagrams / Create 2D Stratigraphic
Surface Maps.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Stratigraphy Tools / Structure

Maps 2D & 3D. See page 22 for more Help information

118
RockWorks2004 Maps

Borehole Manager: Creating 2D Stratigraphic Thickness

(Isopach) Maps

Use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Stratigraphic Thicknesses / 2-

Dimensional (Isopach) tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat) contour map representing
the thickness of a selected stratigraphic unit. The "isopach" map can include line
contours, color contours, border annotation, and/or labeled cells (representing grid
values).
RockWorks creates the thickness model by gridding the formation's upper surface
elevations, gridding the formation's lower surface elevations, and then subtracting the
lower grid from the upper. The resulting isopach grid can be saved for future use.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data.
Menu command: Stratigraphy / Stratigraphic Thicknesses / 2-Dimensional
(Isopach)
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Be sure you have your formations listed correctly in the Stratigraphy Table. If
you want the program to save on disk the grid model of formation thickness, be sure to
insert a check in the Save Grid box and enter a grid file name.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Stratigraphy Tools / Isopach

Maps. See page 22 for more Help information

3D Surface Maps
“3-dimensional” surface maps are really just a 3D view of a 2-dimensional contour map.
Like the 2D maps, they illustrate quantitative values that have been measured over space.
Like the 2D maps, they can be used to illustrate geological topics (surface elevations,
formation thickness, average geochemical concentrations) as well as non-geological topics
such as crime incidents in a precinct.
RockWorks offers both a grid-based and a non-grid based means of creating 2D maps. By
contrast, 3D surface maps must be generated from a grid model. See the previous section
for details.
119
Maps RockWorks2004

Geological Utilities: Creating a Grid-Based 3D Surface Map

The Geological Utilities Grid-Based Map tool is used to create grid models of XYZ data
in the Geological Utilities datasheet or in an external ASCII file. The Z values can
represent surface elevations or geochemistry or virtually any measured value. You can
choose the gridding method to be used to model the Z values. You can then create a 2-
dimensional (flat) map or 3-dimensional surface map or flat projection of the grid model.
This section discusses 3D maps.
! If you have borehole data and wish to create grid-based formation structure maps, see the
next topic.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities “XYZ” file (page 74) Note that this tool will also grid
and map XYZ data stored in an external ASCII file
Menu command: Map / Grid-Based Map
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes: This tool can create a grid model only (no surface), a surface of an existing grid
model, or a new grid and surface. Since the grid model is saved on disk, you can create
a surface from an existing grid model (no need to re-grid). This is useful if you have
processes a grid model through the filtering tools in the Geological Utilities Grid menu,
created the grid originally in the Borehole Manager, etc. This tool can create 2D surface
maps of grid models, as well (discussed previously).
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create Point & Surface Maps / Create a Grid-Based 3D
Surface.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Mapping Tools / Contour &
Point Maps / Grid-Based Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

120
RockWorks2004 Maps

Manually Building Stacked 3D Surfaces

The Geological Utilities Grid / Grids -> 3D Stack program is used to plot multiple, flat
grids in 3D space for the purpose of visual comparisons. These grid models can represent
any real number values (geochemical concentrations, elevations, porosity values, quality
readings, you name it). These are grid models that already exist on your computer.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. It reads a file containing a single column of grid (.GRD)
file names, listed from the top down in the same order in which they are to be stacked,
top-down, in the diagram.
Menu command: Grid / Grids -> 3D Stack
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes: Be sure the grid models actually exist in the current project folder. Once
displayed in RockPlot3D, you can turn individual surfaces on and off by
inserting/removing the check-marks by the grid model names in the RockPlot3D data
tree (you may need to expand the “Stack” heading). If you expand the grid model groups
in the data tree, and double-click on any of the Flat Grid entities, you can adjust the color
scheme, drawing style, and other visual characteristics

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Grid Model Tools / Stacked
Surface Tools. See page 22 for more Help information.

Borehole Manager: Creating 3D Stratigraphic Structure Maps

121
Maps RockWorks2004

Use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Structural Elevations / 3-Dimensional

tools to create 3-dimensional images representing the surface elevations of one or all
stratigraphic unit(s) in the project.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, and 44).
Menu commands: Stratigraphy / Structural Elevations / 3-Dimensional / One
Surface or All Surfaces.
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes: If you create surfaces for all formations, the program will automatically name the
grid models using the formation name with the “*.grd” file name extension. Be sure you
have your formations listed correctly in the current Stratigraphy Table.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Stratigraphy Diagrams / Create 3D Stratigraphic
Structure Maps.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Stratigraphy Tools / Structure

Maps 2D & 3D. See page 22 for more Help information.

Borehole Manager: Creating 3D Stratigraphic Thickness Maps

Use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Stratigraphic Thicknesses / 3-

Dimensional tool to create a 3-dimensional image which represents the thickness of a
selected stratigraphic unit. The completed image will be comprised of a surface
representing the formation's top, a surface representing the formation's base, and
enclosing sides.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, and 44).
Menu command: Stratigraphy / Stratigraphic Thicknesses / 3-Dimensional
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes: In RockPlot3D the program will display the computed volume and mass of the
selected formation. In order for these computations to be accurate, be sure that your depth
units are the same as your X,Y units (such as feet) so that the cubic volume (as in ft3)
122
RockWorks2004 Maps

makes sense. In addition, the mass computation is based on the density per cubic unit as
declared in your Stratigraphy Table.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Stratigraphy Tools / Isopach

Maps 2D & 3D. See page 22 for more Help information

Land Grid Maps

The Land Grid option in the Map menu contains two tools designed to work with
Jeffersonian Land Grid information:
* It creates "section maps" that illustrate Range, Township, and Section land grids
(either commercial or idealized).
* It creates maps illustrating lease boundaries.
In order to create a land grid section or lease map, you must have a set of land grid data
imported or “interpolated” into the program.

Creating Section Maps

Section maps illustrate Jeffersonian land grid boundaries (Range, Township, Section).
Datasheet: Land Grid Table (page 306)
Menu command: Map / Land Grid / Section Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
! In order to create a land grid section map, you must have already created a "Land Grid
Table" which lists the longitude and latitude coordinates of each section’s corners. This
table can be the result of (1) Importing a commercial data grid or (2) Creating a new,
idealized grid. See also page 306.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create Land Grid Maps.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Mapping Tools / Land Grid
Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

123
Maps RockWorks2004

Creating Lease Maps

Use the Map / Land Grid / Lease Map tool to create a map illustrating lease block
boundaries, filled with patterns and/or colors.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities land grid lease descriptions (page 80).
Menu command: Map / Land Grid / Lease Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: The input data file should include lease corner coordinates and patterns. Use the
Coords / Spot Jeffersonian Polygons tool if your lease blocks are listed only in Range,
Township, and Section descriptions. (You need to have X, Y corner coordinates.)
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create Land Grid Maps.

Help / Contents / The Geological Utilities / Creating Maps / Land Grid Maps. See
page 22 for more Help information.

Shotpoint Maps

The Shotpoints command in the Map menu is used to create a map that illustrates
shotpoint locations as read from the datasheet.
The shotpoint data must include (at minimum) a shotpoint line number, a symbol, and an
X and Y coordinate for the individual shotpoint. You may optionally include the point
number (not used in the map) and a label for points, typically representing distance. Each
seismic line will have two or more data rows containing individual point records.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities shotpoint data (page 78).
Menu command: Map / Shotpoints
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: See also Importing SEG-P1 Data (page 108) re: import of SEG-P1 shotpoint files.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Mapping Tools / Shotpoint

Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

124
RockWorks2004 Maps

Global Maps

The Sphereplot 2D and 3D options in the Geological Utilities Map menu create global
maps in either a spherical or cylindrical (flat) projection, or in 3D format. 2D maps can
contain low-resolution global information (coastlines, islands, rivers) from a program
database. It can also read user-entered longitude and latitude coordinates from the main
datasheet for plotting of individual points and/or connected line segments ("polylines") on
the global map.
Applications include seismic events, volcanoes, ocean temperatures, atmospheric
temperatures, and more.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities, global map point and/or polyline data (pages 81and 83).
Menu command: Map / Sphereplot
Output window: RockPlot2D and RockPlot3D

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Mapping Tools / Global Maps.
See page 22 for more Help information

Borehole Manager: Translating Map Coordinates

The Borehole Manager requires that the well locations, which are entered into the
Location tab, be declared in the same units as the depth data. This assures that the
downhole surveys, stratigraphic volumes, and solid (lithology, geochemistry, etc.)
volumes are correctly computed. Use the Borehole Manager's Map / Adjust Coordinates
tool to translate longitude and latitude or land grid (range/township/section) well locations
into Eastings or Northings.
The Map menu contains two coordinate translation tools should your coordinates not
match your depth measurement units.

Help/Contents/The Borehole Manager/Maps/Translating Map Coordinates/How to…

Convert lon/lat coordinates to meters or feet.
Convert RTS locations to meters or feet.
See page 22 for more Help information

125
Maps RockWorks2004

Geological Utilities: Translating Jeffersonian Locations (RTS) to

X,Y
The Geological Utilities Coords / Jeffersonian Points->Cartesian option is used to
translate well locations listed in Range, Township, Section descriptions (footage or
quarter/quarter) to Cartesian X,Y coordinates. This translation is based on either an
"idealized" or a commercially-purchased "Land Grid Table".
This tool was previously located in the Map / Land Grid menu.
! In order for this tool to work, it is necessary that it have land grid information upon
which to translate the Section descriptions. This information must be in the form of a
"Land Grid Table." This table can be created from commercial land grid data, or from an
idealized land grid, as discussed in the Land Grid Tables section (page 306).

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Coordinate Conversion

Tools / Translating Range Township Section Locations to X,Y. See page 22 for more
Help information

Geological Utilities: Translating Jeffersonian Polygons (RTS) to

X,Y
The Geological Utilities Coords / Jeffersonian Polygons->Cartesian option is used to
generate X,Y coordinates for each corner of leases that are listed with Range, Township,
Section descriptions (quarter/quarter or lots). This translation is based on an "idealized" or
commercial "Land Grid Table".
This tool was previously located in the Map / Land Grid menu.
! In order for this tool to work, it is necessary that it have land grid information upon
which to translate the lease descriptions. This information must be in the form of a "Land
Grid Table." This table can be created from commercial land grid data, or from an
idealized land grid, as discussed in the Land Grid Tables section (page 306).

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Coordinate Conversion

Tools / Translating Range Township Section Polygons to X,Y. See page 22 for more
Help information

Geological Utilities: Translating Map Coordinates

The Geological Utilities Coords menu contains a number of utilities that can be used to
translate coordinates that are listed in the Geological Utilities datasheet.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Coordinate Conversion

Tools.

126
RockWorks2004 Logs & Sections

Chapter 5 - Creating Strip Logs & Log Sections

Creating Strip Logs & Log Sections - Overview

There are a variety of tools available in the Borehole Manager's Striplogs menu for
creating 2-dimensional (flat) or 3-dimensional logs of individual or multiple borings.
The log data is taken directly from the Borehole Manager data tabs.
The log settings are pretty much the same for these different log views. You may choose
to include any combination of the following in the logs: Well name, log axis, depth labels,
left and/or right curves (for downhole point data), left and/or right bar graphs (for
downhole interval data), left and/or right reference grids for the curves and bar graphs,
patterns and text captions for observed lithology, patterns and text captions for interpreted
stratigraphy, aquifer intervals, special symbols, special pattern blocks, fractures (3D only),
and border annotation.
See also: Profiles and Sections in Chapters 6 , 7, and 8 for information about creating
vertical slice views (“profiles”) of stratigraphic or solid models.

Creating 2D Logs, Log Profiles, and Projected Log Sections

Creating a Single 2D Strip Log

127
Logs & Sections RockWorks2004

Use the Borehole Manager's Striplogs / Single Log (2D) tool to create a vertical, 2-
dimensional (flat) strip log of a single well. The log can include any combination of the
available log items listed on page 133. The log data is read from the data tabs. The boring
can be vertical, inclined, or deviated.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool reads information from all of the available tabs,
depending on which log items are requested (see page 38).
Menu command: Striplogs / Single Log (2D)
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Before selecting the menu command, be sure to click on the name of the borehole
whose data is to be displayed in the log, so that its name is highlighted. Be sure also that
the check-box to the left of the borehole name is checked so that the borehole is enabled.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Lithology Diagrams (lith logs), Create
Stratigraphy Diagrams (strat logs), Create I-Data Diagrams (bargraph logs), Create P-
Data Diagrams (curve logs), Create Water Level Diagrams (logs with water level
symbols).

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Logs and Cross Sections /
Creating a Single 2D Striplog. See page 22 for more Help information.

What is a Log Profile?

A log profile is one in which the logs of individual borings are "projected" onto a single
profile line cut.

128
RockWorks2004 Logs & Sections

These diagrams can display vertical, inclined, and deviated boreholes. By projecting onto
a line of section, the orientation of the logs will be honored.
In log profiles, the distance between logs is determined by their perpendicular projection
onto the profile line. (This differs from hole-to-hole sections, in which the distance
between the logs is proportional to the well distances on the ground.) In RockWorks,
drawing the profile line is easily done on a plan-view display of the well locations, or you
can enter known coordinates for the section endpoints. In addition, you can enter a
filtering distance to limit the cross section to only proximal wells.

Help / Contents / Laying Out Vertical Sections and Fences. See page 22 for more
Help information

Displaying Multiple Logs in a 2D Log Profile

Use the Borehole Manager's Striplogs / Multi-Log Profile tool to create a projected 2-
dimensional vertical display of strip logs of multiple boreholes. The logs can include any
combination of the available log items listed on page 133. The log data is read from the
data tabs. The borings can be vertical, inclined, or deviated.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool reads information all of the available tabs,
depending on which log items are requested (see page 38).
Menu command: Striplogs / Multi-Log Profile
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: When drawing the profile line among the boreholes, the program offers a
“clipping” zone beyond which distant logs will not be projected onto the profile. See
page 173 for information about drawing the profile slices.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Lithology Diagrams (lith log profile), Create
Stratigraphy Diagrams (strat log profile), Create I-Data Diagrams (bargraph log
profile), Create P-Data Diagrams (curve log profile).

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Logs and Cross Sections /
Displaying Multiple Logs in a 2D Profile. See page 22 for more Help information.

129
Logs & Sections RockWorks2004

What is a Hole to Hole Cross Section?

A hole to hole cross section is created by selecting individual boreholes, in any order, that
are to be displayed from left to right in the section.

Hole to hole sections can include strip logs (with any/all available log items displayed).
The logs can be hung on any listed stratigraphic interval.
In hole to hole sections, the distance between logs is proportional to the physical distances
between the boreholes on the ground. (This differs from log profiles, in which the
distance between logs is determined by their perpendicular projection onto a single profile
line.) Because the hole to hole trace can contain multiple segments that differ in direction,
it’s impossible to project a 3-dimensional log, so all boreholes are plotted as vertical.
In RockWorks, drawing the hole to hole section lines is easily done on a plan-view display
of the borehole locations. The program will remember the traces from one session to the
next within the current project.

130
RockWorks2004 Logs & Sections

Displaying Multiple Logs in a 2D Hole to Hole Section

Use the Borehole Manager's Striplogs / Multi-Log Section tool to create a 2-dimensional
vertical display of strip logs of multiple boreholes. The logs can include any combination
of the available log items listed on page 133, whose data is read from the data tabs. Multi-
log sections also offer the ability to hang the section from a selected stratigraphic unit.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool reads information all of the available tabs,
depending on which log items are requested (see page 38).
Menu command: Striplogs / Multi-Log Section
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Unlike log profiles, logs in hole-to-hole sections must be plotted as vertical.
In a hole-to-hole cross section, the order in which the drill holes are selected will
make a big difference in the appearance of the diagram. The first hole you select,
regardless of its position in the map, will be at the left edge of the cross section, and
the last will be at the right edge. The intermediate drill holes will be spaced in the
diagram relative to each other in space. You do not need to include all boreholes in
the cross section.
See page 174 for information about drawing the section trace.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Lithology Diagrams (lith sections), Create
Stratigraphy Diagrams (strat sections), Create I-Data Diagrams (bargraph sections),
Create P-Data Diagrams (curve sections).

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Logs and Cross Sections
Sections / Displaying Multiple Logs in a 2D Hole to Hole Section. See page 22 for
more Help information.

131
Logs & Sections RockWorks2004

Creating 3D Logs

Creating a Single 3D Strip Log

Use the Borehole Manager's Striplogs / Single Log 3-D tool to create a three-dimensional
view of the strip log of a single well. The log can include any combination of the
available log items listed on page 133. The log data is read from the data tabs.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool reads information all of the available tabs,
depending on which log items are requested (see page 38).
Menu command: Striplogs / Single Log 3-D
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes: Before selecting the menu command, be sure to click on the name of the borehole
whose data is to be displayed in the log, so that its name is highlighted. Be sure also that
the check-box to the left of the borehole name is checked so that the borehole is enabled.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Logs and Cross Sections /
Creating Single 3D Strip Logs. See page 22 for more Help information.

Displaying Multiple Logs in 3D

Use the Borehole Manager's Striplogs / Multi-Log 3-D tool to create a three-dimensional
view of the strip logs of two or more wells. The logs can include any combination of the
available log items listed on page 133. The log data is read from the data tabs.

132
RockWorks2004 Logs & Sections

Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool reads information all of the available tabs,
depending on which log items are requested (see page 38).
Menu command: Striplogs / Multi-Log 3-D
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes: Before selecting the menu command, be sure to click on the name of the borehole
whose data is to be displayed in the log, so that its name is highlighted. Be sure also that
the check-box to the left of the borehole name is checked so that the borehole is enabled.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Lithology Diagrams (lith logs), Create
Stratigraphy Diagrams (strat logs), Create I-Data Diagrams (bargraph logs), Create P-
Data Diagrams (curve logs).

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Logs and Cross Sections /
Displaying Multiple Logs in 3D. See page 22 for more Help information.

Log Item Summary

The following items are available for display in strip logs, displayed individually or in
groups, in 2D or in 3D. Note that not all components are available for all log views.
Title: Plots the boring's name at the top of the log, read from the Location tab. Font
settings adjust the text orientation, thickness, etc. 2D and 3D.
Axis: Plots the log's trace down the hole. This is most useful for deviated holes
when neither lithology nor stratigraphy patterns are being plotted. You can adjust
the line style, thickness, and color. Handy also for simply showing well locations in
sections and 3D views. 2D and 3D.
Depth Labels: Plots depth labels down the left side of the log. Settings include
labeling interval, font style, etc. 2D and 3D.
Left Curve, Right Curve: Plots a point to point curve, with or without fill, along the
left and/or right edge of the log, representing data read from the P-Data tab. The
Curves have a variety of settings, and in 3D you have the option of plotting discs.
2D and 3D.
Left Bargraph, Right Bargraph: Plots a bargraph along the left and/or right edge
of the log, representing data read from the I-data tab. The bargraphs have a variety
of settings. 2D and 3D (the latter offers additional display types).
Stratigraphy Column: Plots a column containing intervals of pattern and color that
correspond to formation names listed in the Stratigraphy tab. The pattern <->
stratigraphy name association is made in the active Stratigraphy Table. Options
include column width and inclusion of formation names and thickness. 2D and 3D
(the latter will not display text or patterns, but background color only).
133
Logs & Sections RockWorks2004

Lithology Column: Plots a column containing intervals of pattern and color that
correspond to observed rock types listed in the Lithology tab. The pattern - rock
type association is made in the active Lithology Table. Options include adjusting
the column width, and inclusion of lithology "keywords,", depths, and/or thickness.
2D and 3D (the latter will not display text or patterns, but background color only).
Aquifers: Plots one or more interval blocks (representing depth to surface and base
declared in the Water levels tab) in 2D and 3D logs.
Fractures: Plots an oriented disk in 3D logs to show fracture depth, orientation and
dip.
Special Symbols: Plots user-selected symbols at specific depths in the log, as read
from the Symbols tab. There are a variety of special-symbol options. 2D and 3D.
Special Patterns: Plots user-selected pattern blocks between specific depths in the
log, as read from the Patterns tab. These are commonly used to show screened
intervals, and they have a variety of options. 2D and 3D.
Other Options: This grouping contains settings that control downhole resolution for
deviated boreholes.
Clip Logs: This tool allows you to specify an elevation range for display in the
single or multiple log diagrams. 2D and 3D.
Lithology Legend: This legend displays rock types and colors as read from the
active Lithology Table. Settings include location, size, and offset. 2D and 3D.
Stratigraphy Legend: This legend displays formation names and colors as read
from the active Stratigraphy Table. Settings include location, size, and offset. 2D
and 3D.
Border: The border can display vertical elevations and horizontal distances. (2-D
logs, profiles, and sections only.)
Reference cage: (3-dimensional log displays only) The reference frame labels
elevations, and X and Y coordinates.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager / Logs and Cross Sections / 2D
Striplog Option Summary and 3D Striplog Option Summary for links to detailed
descriptions. See page 22 for more Help information.

134
RockWorks2004 Stratigraphy Tools

Chapter 6 - Creating Stratigraphy Profiles,

Sections, Maps, Fences, and Blocks
Creating Stratigraphic Diagrams - Overview

Use the tools in the Borehole Manager Stratigraphy menu to visualize your stratigraphic
data (listed in the project’s Stratigraphy tabs) in a variety of ways: Create 2D maps and
3D images of stratigraphic surfaces and thickness, 2D stratigraphic profiles and sections
sliced anywhere in the project area, “surface” maps of stratigraphy where it intersects a
surface, plan maps or horizontal slices of stratigraphy at specific elevations, 3D
stratigraphic fence diagrams, and 3D stratigraphic block diagrams.
We have already covered the surface and thickness maps back on page 111. In this
section, we will discuss the remaining Stratigraphy menu tools.
If you don’t have stratigraphic layers entered into your project’s Stratigraphy tabs, you can
use the Pick Formations tool to record stratigraphic depths from elogs or lithology logs.
Unlike lithology data, which represents observed rock types which can repeat in a
borehole and be inconsistent in order, stratigraphic data represents organized formations,
consistent in order between boreholes, and non-repeating. RockWorks uses surface
modeling or gridding tools to illustrate the stratigraphic layers. Because surface models
are created for these diagrams, you must have stratigraphic data for at least 4 boreholes.
Formation names and the colors and patterns to be used to represent them are listed in the
project’s Stratigraphy Table (see page 294).

Creating Stratigraphic Profiles

135
Stratigraphy Tools RockWorks2004

Use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Profile tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat)
vertical profile of a multiple stratigraphic layers read from the Stratigraphy data tabs,
between any two points in the study area. The profile layers can be color- or pattern-
filled. During the process of building the profile, the program will create a grid model for
each of the active stratigraphic layers using the user-selected gridding method. Striplogs
can be appended, and a map of the profile location can be created automatically.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, 44).
Menu command: Stratigraphy / Profile
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Be sure the stratigraphic names are correctly defined in the current Stratigraphy
Table (page 294). See Missing Formations (page 60) for tips on how to enter your
stratigraphy data. See page 173 for information about drawing the profile slice.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Stratigraphy Diagrams / Create a Stratigraphic
Profile.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools / Profiles &
Sections / Creating Stratigraphy Profile Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help
information

Creating Stratigraphic Cross Sections

Modeled Sections (Grid-Based)

Use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Section / Modeled tool to create a 2-

dimensional (flat) vertical multi-panel profile of a multiple stratigraphic layers read from
the Stratigraphy data tabs, between multiple points in the study area. The panel endpoints
can be anywhere within the project area – they don’t need to coincide with borehole
locations. The section’s layers can be color- or pattern-filled, and striplogs can be
appended. During the process of building the section, the program will create a grid
model for each of the active stratigraphic layers using the user-selected gridding method.

136
RockWorks2004 Stratigraphy Tools

See the next topic for creating “straight” sections using no interpolation. Logs can be
appended, and a map representing the section location can be created automatically.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, 44).
Menu command: Stratigraphy / Section / Modeled
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Be sure the stratigraphic names are correctly defined in the current Stratigraphy
Table (page 294). See Missing Formations (page 60) for tips on how to enter your
stratigraphy data. See page 174 for information about drawing the section slice. For
display of multi-paneled grid-based sections in 3D, see Modeled Fences on page 139.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Stratigraphy Diagrams / Create a Modeled
Stratigraphic Multi-Panel Section.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools / Profiles &
Sections / Creating Interpolated Stratigraphy Sections (Multi-Panel). See page 22 for
more Help information.

“Straight” Sections (No Interpolation)

Use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Section / Straight tool to create a 2-

dimensional (flat) vertical multi-panel profile of a multiple stratigraphic layers read from
the Stratigraphy data tabs, between multiple points in the study area. The panel endpoints
must coincide with borehole locations. The section’s layers can be color- or pattern-filled,
and striplogs can be appended. Unlike the Modeled section, the Straight section
correlations will simply be drawn as straight lines between like formations in adjacent
boreholes. See the previous topic for creating “modeled” sections based on grid surfaces.
Sections can be hung on a specified stratigraphic unit; see below. A map illustrating the
section location can be requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, 44).
Menu command: Stratigraphy / Section / Straight
Output window: RockPlot2D

137
Stratigraphy Tools RockWorks2004

Notes: Be sure the stratigraphic names are correctly defined in the current Stratigraphy
Table (page 294). See Missing Formations (page 60) for tips on how to enter your
stratigraphy data. See page 174 for information about drawing the section slice. For
display of multi-paneled straight sections in 3D, see Straight Fences on page 140
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Stratigraphy Diagrams / Create a Straight
Stratigraphic Multi-Panel Section.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools / Profiles &
Sections / Creating Interpolated Stratigraphy Sections (Multi-Panel). See page 22 for
more Help information.

More on Hanging Sections

138
RockWorks2004 Stratigraphy Tools

Creating Stratigraphic Fence Diagrams

Modeled Fences

Use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Fence / Modeled and Fence (ESRI-Format)
/ Modeled tools to create a 3-dimensional fence diagram that illustrates stratigraphic
layers, for output to RockPlot3D or to an ESRI Shapefile format.
Fence panel spacing can be regular (in a variety of configurations), or you can draw your
own panels. The stratigraphy will be color-coded based on the formation's background
color in the Stratigraphy Table. During the process of building the fence panels, the
program will create a grid model for the upper and lower surface of each of the active
stratigraphic layers using the user-selected gridding method.
3D striplogs can be appended, and a map illustrating the fence panel locations can be
requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, 44).
Menu commands: Stratigraphy / Fence / Modeled and Stratigraphy / Fence (ESRI-
Format) / Modeled.
Output window: RockPlot3D or ESRI Shapefiles (fence), RockPlot2D (fence location
map)
Notes: Be sure the stratigraphic names are correctly defined in the current Stratigraphy
Table (page294). See Missing Formations (page 60) for tips on how to enter your
stratigraphy data. See page 176 for information about drawing the fence panels.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Stratigraphy Diagrams / Create a Modeled
Stratigraphic Fence Diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools / Stratigaphic

Fence Diagrams / Interpolated Fence Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help
information.

139
Stratigraphy Tools RockWorks2004

Straight Fences

Use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Fence / Straight and Fence (ESRI-Format)
/ Straight tools to create a 3-dimensional fence diagram that illustrates stratigraphic
layers, for output to RockPlot3D or to an ESRI Shapefile format. Unlike Modeled fences,
above, the Straight fence correlations will simply be drawn as straight lines between like
formations in adjacent boreholes.
Fence panel spacing can be regular (in a variety of configurations), or you can draw your
own panels. For these hole-to-hole fences, the panels will be snapped to the closest
borehole. The stratigraphy will be color-coded based on the formation's background color
in the Stratigraphy Table.
3D striplogs can be appended, and a map illustrating the panel locations can be requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, 44).
Menu commands: Stratigraphy / Fence / Straight and Stratigraphy / Fence (ESRI-
Format) / Straight
Output window: RockPlot3D or ESRI Shapefiles (fence), RockPlot2D (fence location
map)
Notes: Be sure the stratigraphic names are correctly defined in the current Stratigraphy
Table (page294). See Missing Formations (page 60) for tips on how to enter your
stratigraphy data. See page 176 for information about drawing the fence panels.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Stratigraphy Diagrams / Create a Straight
Stratigraphic Fence Diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools / Fence

Diagrams / Creating Hole to Hole Fence Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help
information.

140
RockWorks2004 Stratigraphy Tools

Manually Building 3D Stratigraphic Fences

Use the Geological Utilities Grid / Grids -> Stratigraphic Fence tool is used to create a
stratigraphic fence diagram based on a list of existing grid models that represent the top
("superface") and base ("subface") of each unit. These are grid models that must already
exist on your computer. You may request regular fence panel spacing, in a variety of
configurations, or you can draw your own panels.
This program is designed for two types of applications:
Users who have created their grid models within other applications (e.g. ModFlow,
Surfer) and wish to use RockWorks to create stratigraphic (or hydrostratigraphic)
fence diagrams.
Users who have created their grid models within the Borehole Manager portion of
RockWorks but need more flexibility in dealing with stratigraphic relationships (e.g.
special manipulations with the grids).
This is a “manual” way of creating the kind of stratigraphic fence that’s available in the
Borehole Manager’s Stratigraphy / Fence tool.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads a “stratigraphy gridlist” data file (page
83).
Menu command: Grid / Grids -> Stratigraphic Fence
Output window: RockPlot3D (fence diagram), RockPlot2D (fence location map)
Notes: Be sure the grid models that are listed in the datasheet actually exist in the current
project folder. Use the “cutoff” setting to erode thin layers. See page 176 for information
about drawing the fence panels.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Grid Model Tools / Stratigraphic
Tools / Manually Building 3D Stratigraphic Fences. See page 22 for more Help
information.

141
Stratigraphy Tools RockWorks2004

Creating Stratigraphy-Based Geology Maps

Use the Stratigraphy / Surface Map tool to create a 2-dimensional map representing the
stratigraphy where it intersects a designated surface, typically the surface topography. In
other words, it creates a geological map based on downhole stratigraphic data. The
process involves creating a stratigraphic model for the study area, storing it as a temporary
solid model (MOD), and determining the intersection of the different formations with a
user-specified surface model. This is stored as a RockWorks grid model (GRD), and the
map is displayed in the RockPlot2D window.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, 44).
Menu command: Stratigraphy / Surface Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Be sure the stratigraphic names are correctly defined in the current Stratigraphy
Table (page294). You need to be sure, also, that the dimensions and node density of the
grid model and the solid model are the same. See Missing Formations (page 60) for tips
on how to enter your stratigraphy data. Use the RockPlot2D Export / RockPlot3D tool to
drape the surface stratigraphy map over a grid model and display it in 3D (as in the image
above).

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools / Creating

Stratigraphy-Based Geology Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating Plan-View Stratigraphy Maps

142
RockWorks2004 Stratigraphy Tools

Use the Stratigraphy / Plan Map tool to create a 2-dimensional map representing the
stratigraphy along a horizontal slice, at a specified elevation. This is stored as a
RockWorks grid model (GRD), and the map is displayed in the RockPlot2D window.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, 44).
Menu command: Stratigraphy / Plan Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Be sure the stratigraphic names are correctly defined in the current Stratigraphy
Table. See Missing Formations (page 60) for tips on how to enter your stratigraphy data.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools / Creating

Stratigraphy Plan-View Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating Stratigraphic Block Diagrams

Use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Model tool to create a 3-dimensional block
diagram that illustrates stratigraphic layers. The stratigraphy will be color-coded based on
the formation's background color in the Stratigraphy Table.
During the process of building the block diagram, the program will create a grid model for
the upper and lower surface of each of the active stratigraphic layers using the user-
selected gridding method. These grid models will be stored in the project folder.
The completed diagram will be displayed in a RockPlot3D window, with formation upper
surfaces, lower surfaces, and side panels. Volume and mass of each formation will be
displayed in the RockPlot3D window.
The program offers optional creation of a 3D solid model containing stratigraphy grid
models layered from the bottom up, for use with other analysis tools.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, 44).
Menu command: Stratigraphy / Model
Output window: RockPlot3D

143
Stratigraphy Tools RockWorks2004

Notes:
Be sure the stratigraphic names are correctly defined in the current Stratigraphy
Table.
See Missing Formations (page 60) for tips on how to enter your stratigraphy data.
! Insert a check in the Save Model option if you want the program to store on disk a
numeric 3-dimensional solid model, with voxel nodes representing stratigraphy type.
Use a “.mod” file name extension.
RockWorks will not use this MOD file when displaying the stratigraphic block in
RockPlot3D at this time; it will instead display the grid surfaces. But, you may still
want to store the model on disk for later filtering, volumetric computations, etc., and
later 3D display with the Geological Utilities Solid menu tools.
The program will create grid models of the surfaces and bases of the formations listed
in the Stratigraphy tabs, storing the models on disk. The grid files will be assigned
names in the background based on the formation: "formation_top.grd" and
"formation_base.grd". Two grid models will be created for each formation.
If you have requested a 3D stratigraphic model, it will be initialized, at the north-
>south and east->west dimensions of the grid models, and with an elevation range to
accommodate the lowest and highest stratigraphic elevations. It will then "insert"
each gridded formation into the numeric stratigraphic model, by assigning the voxel
the integer "G" value listed in the Stratigraphy Table. The program will store this
stratigraphic model file on disk using the file name you requested.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Stratigraphy Diagrams / Create a Stratigraphic
Block Model Diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools /

Stratigraphic Block Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

Manually Building 3D Stratigraphic Diagrams

The Geological Utilities Grid / Grids -> Stratigraphic Model tool is used to create a 3D
stratigraphic model diagram based on a list of existing grid models that represent the top
("superface") and base ("subface") of each unit. These are grid models that must already
exist on your computer.
This program is designed for two types of applications:
Users who have created their grid models within other applications (e.g. ModFlow,
Surfer) and wish to use RockWorks to create stratigraphic (or hydrostratigraphic)
diagrams.

144
RockWorks2004 Stratigraphy Tools

Users who have created their grid models within the Borehole Manager portion of
RockWorks but need more flexibility in dealing with stratigraphic relationships (e.g.
special manipulations with the grids).
This is a “manual” way of creating the kind of stratigraphic model that’s available in the
Borehole Manager’s Stratigraphy / Model tool.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads a “stratigraphy gridlist” data file (page
83).
Menu command: Grid / Grids -> Stratigraphic Model
Output window: RockPlot3D (model), RockPlot2D (fence location map)
Notes: Be sure the grid models that are listed in the datasheet actually exist in the current
project folder. Use the “cutoff” setting to erode thin layers.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Grid Model Tools / Stratigraphic
Tools / Manually Building 3D Stratigraphic Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Picking Stratigraphic Contacts

Use the Borehole Manager’s Stratigraphy / Pick Contacts tool to determine depths to
stratigraphic tops (and bases) from geophysical, lithology, or other log data.
This is one of the most powerful tools in this program since it lets you visualize existing
lithology blocks or geophysical curves in a 2D display, and then point-and-click to pick
the stratigraphic contacts. The contact depths are recorded in the project’s Stratigraphy
tabs.
! This tool will assign formation depths assuming vertical boreholes. If your boreholes are
deviated, you may need to eventually edit by hand the picked formation depths, based on
how the stratigraphic surfaces or log intervals look when displayed in diagrams that can
accommodate the borehole’s deviated downhole trace.
We encourage you to follow very carefully the steps listed in the How To section of the
Help messages which are summarized below.
1. Enter your known data: Typically this would be lithology intervals down the hole, or
geophysical (elog) measurements.
2. Build a log section: This is not required, but it’s helpful to be sure your data is good,
for setting up the proper section alignment, and for determining the formations that
are present.
3. Create a Stratigraphy Table: With a good idea of the look of the existing downhole
145
Stratigraphy Tools RockWorks2004

lithology or geophysical data, you need to create a "Stratigraphy Table" which lists
the names of the formations, from the surface downward, that are represented in your
project.
4. Set up the formation picker display: This should be set up just like the hole to hole
section in step 2.
5. Pick the wells to be displayed: You can choose the same boreholes as were chosen in
step 2.
6. Pick the first formation in the Contact Picker window: Select the name of the
formation to be recorded and left-click on each log where that formation’s top is
displayed. The program will record the depths in the table. Right-click on each log at
the formation’s base, and these will be recorded.
7. Pick the next formations: Select the name of the next formation to be recorded, left-
click to pick tops and right-click to pick bases. Continue in this manner for additional
formations.
8. End the session: Click on the Exit button and discard, save, or adjust-and-save
changes.
What next? Now that you have the stratigraphic units defined, use the Stratigraphy /
Model tool to create a 3-dimensional solid model of the units. The Stratigraphy menu
also offers display of structural surfaces, thicknesses, profiles, sections, fences, and plan-
view and stratigraphy surface maps. Create 3-Dimensional log displays of the borehole
data, and append them to the stratigraphic model.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools / Picking

Stratigraphic Contacts. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Stratigraphic Volume Report

146
RockWorks2004 Stratigraphy Tools

Use the Borehole Manager’s Stratigraphy / Volumetrics tool to read a saved

stratigraphic model and compute the total volume or mass for each stratigraphic layer as a
function of the relative depth/elevation. The resulting computations are displayed in the
Geological Utilities datasheet.
Input: This tool reads data from an existing stratigraphic solid model (MOD file) created
if Save Model is checked in the Stratigraphy / Model menu item (page 140).
Menu command: Stratigraphy / Volumetrics
Output window: Geological Utilities datasheet
Notes:
Be sure the stratigraphic names are correctly defined in the current Stratigraphy
Table.
You can select from the following results: Nodes, Volume, Mass, or Percent.. Nodes
reports the numbers of nodes of each stratigraphic type at each elevation slice.
Volume will be reported in cubic units (typically meters or feet, depending on your X,
Y, and depth/elevation units). If you select the Mass option, these computations are
based on the Density Factor declared in the current Stratigraphy Table which declare
mass per cubic unit. Percent represents the percent volume of each stratigraphy type
at each elevation level. Multiple units can be selected.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools / Creating a

Stratigraphic Volume Report. See page 22 for more Help information.

Exporting Stratigraphy Data

Use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Export tool to export stratigraphy depth,
elevation, or thickness data for each borehole to an ASCII (Text) XYZ file. The resulting
file will contain the X and Y location coordinates for the formation contact in each
borehole (taking into account any boring deviation or inclination), and the selected depth,
upper elevation, lower elevation, or thickness. (Thickness is drilled thickness, as recorded
in the Stratigraphy tab, not grid-based thickness.) This file can be imported into the
RockWorks Geological Utilities datasheet or into other applications, or opened
automatically into the default Windows text editor (such as Notepad).
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and stratigraphy data (pages 39, 41, 44).
Menu command: Stratigraphy / Export
Output window: ASCII XYZ file representing observed depth, upper elevation, base
elevation, or thickness.

147
Stratigraphy Tools RockWorks2004

Notes:
Be sure the stratigraphic names are correctly defined in the current Stratigraphy
Table.
To load this exported file into the Geological Utilities datasheet, follow these steps:
Click on the Geological Utilities tab, choose File / New Datasheet, select the
"Generic XYZ" format for the layout, and use the File / Import / Into Geological
Utilities / ASCII option to import the text file into the data window.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools / Exporting

Stratigraphy Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

148
RockWorks2004 Aquifer Tools

Chapter 7 - Water Levels: Display as Profiles,

Sections, Plans, Fences, and Blocks
Creating Water Level Diagrams - Overview

Use the tools in the Borehole Manager Aquifer menu to visualize your water level data
(listed in the project’s Water Level tabs) in a variety of ways: Create 2D profiles and
surface maps, 3D fences and block diagrams of the upper and lower surfaces. These can
be particularly useful when combined with other 2D and 3D diagrams of your project (as
in the example above, combined with a stratigraphy diagram).
The water levels are modeled using surface modeling or gridding tools.
The Borehole Manager Aquifer menu was previously named “Hydrology”.

Creating a Water Level Profile Diagram

Use the Borehole Manager's Aquifer / Profile tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat) vertical
profile of a single aquifer listed for a particular date or date range in the Water Levels tab.
The profile can be drawn between any two points in the study area. The profile can be
color- or pattern-filled. During the process of building the profile, the program will create
a grid model of the upper and lower surface of the aquifer using the user-selected gridding
method. You can request an automatic map representing the location of the profile cut.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and water level data (pages 39, 41, 52).
Menu command: Aquifer / Profile
149
Aquifer Tools RockWorks2004

Output window: RockPlot2D.

Notes: The grid models will be named automatically: “date_top.grd” and
“date_base.grd.” See page 173 for information about drawing the profile slice.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Aquifer Tools / Creating

Aquifer Profile Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Water Level Section Diagram

Use the Borehole Manager's Aquifer / Section tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat)
vertical multi-panel profile of a single aquifer listed for a particular date or date range in
the Water Levels tabs. The panel endpoints can be anywhere within the project area. The
profile can be color- or pattern-filled. During the process of building the section, the
program will create a grid model of the upper and lower surface of the aquifer using the
user-selected gridding method. Logs can be appended, and a map representing the section
location can be created automatically.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and water level data (pages 39, 41, 52).
Menu command: Aquifer / Section
Output window: RockPlot2D.
Notes: The grid models will be named automatically: “date_top.grd” and
“date_base.grd.” See page 174 for information about drawing the section slice.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Aquifer Tools / Creating

Aquifer Sections (Multi-Panel). See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Water Level Fence Diagram

150
RockWorks2004 Aquifer Tools

Use the Borehole Manager's Aquifer / Fence tool to create a 3-dimensional fence diagram
that illustrates the aquifer at a selected date or date range. You may request regular panel
spacing, in a variety of configurations, or you can draw your own panels. During the
process of building the fence panels, the program will create a grid model for the upper
and lower surface of the aquifer layers using the user-selected gridding method. 3D logs
can be appended, and you can request a map representing the fence panel locations.
The completed fence diagram will be displayed in a RockPlot3D window, where you can
manipulate the image and append other 3D images.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and water level data (pages 39, 41, 52).
Menu command: Aquifer / Fence
Output window: RockPlot3D (fence), RockPlot2D (fence location map)
Notes: The grid models will be named automatically: “date_top.grd” and
“date_base.grd.” See page 176 for information about drawing the fence panels.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Aquifer Tools / Creating a

Water Level Fence Diagram. See page 22 for more Help information

Creating a 2D Water Level Surface or Thickness Map

Use the Borehole Manager's Aquifer / Plan tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat) contour
map of the aquifer surface, base, or thickness for a particular date or date range. During
the process of building the contour map, the program will create a grid model for the
upper and lower surfaces of the aquifer, and of the aquifer thickness, using the user-
selected gridding method. The grid models will be stored as ".grd" files on disk.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and water level data (pages 39, 41, 52).
Menu command: Aquifer / Plan
Output window: RockPlot2D.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Aquifer Tools / Creating a

Water Level Surface or Thickness Map. See page 22 for more Help information.

151
Aquifer Tools RockWorks2004

Creating a Water Level Block Diagram

Use the Borehole Manager's Aquifer / Model tool to create a 3-dimensional block
diagram that illustrates a selected aquifer layer at a particular date or over a specified date
range. The later will be displayed in the color of your choice. During the process of
building the block diagram, the program will create a grid model for the upper and lower
surface of the aquifer using the user-selected gridding method. These grid models will be
stored in the project folder.
The completed diagram will be displayed in a RockPlot3D window, with the upper
surface, lower surface, and side panels. Volume of the aquifer will be displayed in the
RockPlot3D window. The aquifer block can be combined with other 3D diagrams, such
as the stratigraphy block diagram above.
Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any), and water
level data (pages 39, 41, 52).
Menu command: Aquifer / Model
Output window: RockPlot3D.
Notes: The grid models will be named automatically: “date_top.grd” and
“date_base.grd.”

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Aquifer Tools / Creating a

Water Level Block Diagram. See page 22 for more Help information

152
RockWorks2004 Solid Models, Profiles & Fences

Chapter 8 - Creating Solid Models, Profile,

Section, Fence, Plan and Surface Diagrams
Solid Modeling Introduction
Solid modeling is a true 3-dimensional gridding process, used to create a “box” of
regularly-spaced nodes from your irregularly-spaced data. For known X,Y, and Z points
in space (such as boreholes) the program can interpolate measured values such as
geochemistry, geophysical measurements, even lithology types, or any other downhole or
subsurface quantitative value.
The Geological Utilities Solid / Model tool creates solid models from X, Y, Z, and G data
listed in the main datasheet or in an external ASCII file. The Borehole Manager
Lithology, I-Data, P-Data, and Fractures menu tools (Profile, Section, Fence and
Model) create solid models from lithology, interval- or point-sample quantitative data, or
fracture data in the respective data tabs.
Once it knows the dimensions of your study area, the program divides it into three-
dimensional cells or "voxels," their dimensions automatically or user-determined. Each
voxel is defined by its corner points or nodes. Each node is assigned the appropriate X, Y,
and Z location coordinates according to its relative placement within the study area. A
fourth variable, "G", which can represent grade of ore, concentration of pollutants, etc., is
estimated based on the G value of the given data points.

There are several methods offered to do this interpolation of your data. Each operates
differently, and each has strengths and differences. These are discussed under Solid
Modeling Methods in the Reference section.

What to do with a Solid Model?

Once you have a solid model (or “.MOD”) file created, illustrating the distribution of your
geochemistry, geophysical measurements, lithology, or other measured values, it can be
used in a variety of ways:

153
Solid Models, Profiles & Fences RockWorks2004

See it:
Illustrate it as a 3-dimensional block diagram.
Display a vertical slice of the model as a 2-dimensional profile (1 slice) or section
(multiple slices).
Display a horizontal slice of the model as a 2-dimensions “plan” map.
Display multiple vertical slices of the model as a 3-dimensional fence diagram.
Manipulate it:
Use the new RockPlot3D window to visually manipulate solid models, setting high
and/or low G value nodes to transparent, inserting slices, rotating the display.
Use the Geological Utilities Solid menu tools to filter models, perform computations
on nodes, edit models, and more.
Compute its volume (and mass):
Volume is automatically computed for the solid models (and updated as filters are
applied) when displayed in RockPlot3D.
Create a detailed volume report of the model after filtering it based on G values,
surface polygons, overburden ratios, and more.
Create a simplified pit design by fitting a grid surface below specified zones of a solid
model.

Geological Utilities: Creating a Solid Model of XYZG Data

If you have X,Y,Z,G data displayed in the Geological Utilities datasheet, or stored in an
external ASCII file, you can use the Solid / Model tool to create solid models of this data.
The X (Eastings), Y (Northings) and Z (elevation) coordinates note the sample locations,
and "G" represents the measured value to be modeled. G can represent geochemical
concentrations, geophysical measurements, etc. A variety of modeling algorithms are
available. The Solid / Model tool is also used to create 3-dimensional diagrams to
illustrate solid models.
The Solid / Profile tool displays a single, vertical slice of the solid model in 2D; and the
Solid / Section tool displays multiple, connected profile slices of the solid model in 2D.
154
RockWorks2004 Solid Models, Profiles & Fences

The Solid / Plan tool displays a single, horizontal or plan-view slice in 2D; and the Fence
tool displays multiple vertical slices in 3D.
! If you have geochemical, geophysical, or lithology data from boreholes, recorded as
depths and measured values, use the Borehole Manager’s tools to create solid models and
corresponding diagrams. (See next topic.)
Datasheet: Geological Utilities “XYZG” file (see 75).
Menu commands: Solid / Model, Profile, Section, Fence, and Plan
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes: You can use this tool to create a solid model only (e.g. no diagram). You can use
this tool to create a 3-D diagram from an already-existing solid model (e.g. no new
model).

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Solid Model Tools. See page
22 for more Help information.

Borehole Manager: Creating Lithology Solid Models, Fences,

Profiles, Sections, Surface and Plan Maps

Creating Lithology Diagrams - Overview

Use the tools in the Borehole Manager's Lithology menu to display your downhole
lithology in a variety of ways: a vertical profile or cross section, a fence diagram with any
number and arrangement of panels, a plan-view slice, a “geology” map where lithology
intersects a surface, and a solid block diagram.
The lithology descriptions are read from the Lithology tab, which lists depths and
observed rock types. Unlike stratigraphy listings, lithology descriptions can repeat, and
don't need to be listed in the same order in each boring.
Because of this, RockWorks does not use surface modeling tools to display lithology, but
rather, solid modeling tools. There is a specific solid model algorithm designed to
interpolate lithology from depth intervals in borings out to a solid model, called
"lithoblend." The resulting solid model can be sliced vertically (profile, section, and fence
diagrams), sliced horizontally (plan map), displayed on a surface, and/or displayed as a 3D
block.

155
Solid Models, Profiles & Fences RockWorks2004

Lithology types are represented in the solid model as integer values, based on the "G"
value you have listed for each rock type in the Lithology Table (page 293). For example,
"gravel" might be coded with a "1", and "sand" with a "5," for example. In the output
diagrams, each lithology is represented using the background color you've selected for its
pattern, also in the Lithology Table.

Creating a 3D Lithology Block Diagram

Use the Borehole Manager's Lithology / Model tool to create a 3-dimensional block
diagram that illustrates lithology types. The lithologies will be color-coded based on their
background colors in the Lithology Table. During the process of building the block
diagram, the program will create a solid model of the lithologies using the “lithoblend”
algorithm. 3D striplogs can be appended. Selected lithology types can be displayed and
volumes computed.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and lithology data (pages 39, 41, 42).
Menu command: Lithology / Model
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes:
Be sure the lithology keywords are listed in the currently-defined Lithology Table
(page 293).
For lithology models, the program will use the Horizontal Lithoblending algorithm
because it was designed specifically to model lithology types.
Optional surface filtering is available to zero-out nodes above a unit or ground
surface, and/or below a unit.
Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for future
block, fence, and profile diagrams.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Lithology Diagrams / Create a lithology solid
model diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Lithology Tools / Creating 3D

Lithology Block Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

156
RockWorks2004 Solid Models, Profiles & Fences

Creating a Lithology Fence Diagram

Use the Borehole Manager's Lithology / Fence tool to create a 3-dimensional fence
diagram that illustrates lithology. You may request regular panel spacing, in a variety of
configurations, or you can draw your own panels.
The different lithologies will be color-coded based on their background color in the
Lithology Table. During the process of building the fence panels, the program will create
a solid model for the entire project (or read an existing model), and then display the
lithologies present on the selected fence panels. 3D logs can be appended automatically.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and lithology data (pages 39, 41, 42).
Menu command: Lithology / Fence
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes:
Be sure the lithology keywords are listed in the currently-defined Lithology Table
(page 293).
For lithology models, the program will use the Horizontal Lithoblending algorithm
because it was designed specifically to model lithology types.
Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for future
block, fence, and profile diagrams.
See page 176 for information about drawing the fence panels.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Lithology Diagrams / Create a lithology fence
diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Lithology Tools / Creating

Lithology Fence Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

157
Solid Models, Profiles & Fences RockWorks2004

Creating a Lithology Profile Diagram

Use the Borehole Manager's Lithology / Profile tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat)
vertical profile of lithology, between any two points in the study area. The profile layers
are color-coded based on rock type. During the process of building the profile, the
program will create a solid model for the entire project area (or read an existing model),
and then "slice" the model vertically along the selected profile line. Striplogs can be
appended.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and lithology data (pages 39, 41, 42).
Menu command: Lithology / Profile
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes:
Be sure the lithology keywords are listed in the currently-defined Lithology Table
(page 293).
For lithology models, the program will use the Horizontal Lithoblending algorithm
because it was designed specifically to model lithology types.
Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for future
block, fence, and profile diagrams.
See page 173 for information about drawing the profile slice.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Lithology Diagrams / Create a lithology profile.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Lithology Tools / Creating a

Lithology Profile Diagram. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Lithology Section Diagram

158
RockWorks2004 Solid Models, Profiles & Fences

Use the Borehole Manager's Lithology / Section tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat)
vertical, multi-paneled section of lithology. The section panel endpoints can be drawn
anywhere in the study area. The section’s layers are color-coded based on rock type.
During the process of building the section, the program will create a solid model for the
entire project area (or read an existing model), and then "slice" the model vertically along
the selected panel lines. Striplogs can be appended.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and lithology data (pages 39, 41, 42).
Menu command: Lithology / Section
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes:
Be sure the lithology keywords are listed in the currently-defined Lithology Table
(page 293).
For lithology models, the program will use the Horizontal Lithoblending algorithm
because it was designed specifically to model lithology types.
Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for future
block, fence, profile, and section diagrams.
See page 174 for information about drawing the section slice.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Lithology Diagrams / Create a lithology multi-
panel cross section.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Lithology Tools / Creating

Lithology Sections (Multi-Panel). See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating Lithology-Based Geology Maps

Use the Lithology / Surface Map tool to create a 2-dimensional map representing the
lithology where it intersects a designated surface, typically the surface topography. In
other words, it creates a geological map based on downhole lithology data. The process
involves creating a solid lithology model for the study area, and determining the
intersection of the different lithology types with a user-specified surface model. This is

159
Solid Models, Profiles & Fences RockWorks2004

stored as a RockWorks grid model (GRD), and the map is displayed in the RockPlot2D
window.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and lithology data (pages 39, 41, 42).
Menu command: Lithology / Surface Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Be sure the lithology keywords are listed in the currently-defined Lithology Table
(page 293). You need to be sure, also, that the dimensions and node density of the grid
model and the solid model are the same. For lithology models, the program will use the
Horizontal Lithoblending algorithm because it was designed specifically to model
lithology types. Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing
model for future block, fence, profile, and section diagrams.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create Lithology Diagrams / Create a surface lithology
(geology) map.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Lithology Tools / Creating

Lithology Surface Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating Plan-View Lithology Maps

Use the Lithology / Plan Map tool to create a 2-dimensional map representing the
lithology along a horizontal slice, at a specified elevation. This is stored as a RockWorks
grid model (GRD), and the map is displayed in the RockPlot2D window.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and lithology data (pages 39, 41, 42).
Menu command: Lithology / Plan Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Be sure the lithology keywords are correctly defined in the current Lithology
Table (page 293).

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Lithology Tools / Creating

Lithology Plan-View Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.
160
RockWorks2004 Solid Models, Profiles & Fences

Borehole Manager: Creating Solid Models of Downhole Interval

Data: Models, Fences, Profiles, Sections, and Plan Maps

Creating I-Data Diagrams - Overview

Use the tools in the Borehole Manager's I-Data menu to display your downhole interval-
based data (representing geochemistry, geotechnical measurements, etc.) in a variety of
ways: As a vertical profile slice, a multi-panel profile or “section,” a 3D fence diagram
with any number and arrangement of panels, a horizontal slice or plan map, and as a 3D
isosurface or block diagram.
Downhole data that was recorded for depth intervals (as opposed to point measurements)
is entered into the Borehole Manager’s Intervals (I-Data) tabs. The I-Data tabs will show
two columns of depth listings, for each interval's top and bottom depth (uppermost
intervals listed first) and one or more columns of measured values. The data can represent
assay values, pollutant concentrations, aggregate quality or grain size, etc. (Point-
measured data is entered into the Points (P-Data) tab.)
RockWorks creates a solid model of the I-data for display as these diagram types. A
variety of modeling methods or algorithms is offered. The resulting solid model is then
sliced vertically to create the profile, section, and fence diagrams, sliced horizontally for
the plan map, or displayed in full as all voxels or as an isosurface. These are discussed in
the topics below.

Creating a 3D Isosurface or All-Voxel Diagram of Interval Data

Use the Borehole Manager's I-Data / Model tool to create a 3-dimensional block or
isosurface diagram that illustrates your downhole data values. The data values can be
color-coded in a variety of ways. During the process of building the diagram, the program
161
Solid Models, Profiles & Fences RockWorks2004

will create a solid model of the downhole data using the user-selected algorithm. 3D
striplogs can be appended
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and interval data (pages 39, 41, 46).
Menu command: I-Data / Model
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future block, fence, and profile diagrams. In RockPlot3D, there are a variety of filtering
and display tools available.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create I-Data Diagrams / Create an I-Data Isosurface
Diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ I-Data Tools / Creating Solid
Diagrams of Interval Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Fence Diagram of Interval Data

Use the Borehole Manager's I-Data / Fence tool to create a 3-dimensional fence diagram
that illustrates your downhole interval data. You may request regular panel spacing, in a
variety of configurations, or you can draw your own panels. The model’s data values can
be color-coded in a variety of ways. During the process of building the diagram, the
program will create a solid model for the entire project area, and then "slice" the model
vertically along the selected fence panel line(s). 3D striplogs can be appended. A map
illustrating the fence panel locations can be requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and interval data (pages 39, 41, 46).
Menu command: I-Data / Fence
Output window: RockPlot3D (fence), RockPlot2D (fence location map).
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future I-data diagrams. See page 176 for information about drawing the fence panels.
162
RockWorks2004 Solid Models, Profiles & Fences

Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create I-Data Diagrams / Create an I-data fence diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ I-Data Tools / Creating Fence
Diagrams of Interval Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Profile Diagram of Interval Data

Use the Borehole Manager's I-Data / Profile tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat) vertical
profile of your downhole interval data, sliced anywhere in the study area. The data values
can be color-coded in a variety of ways. During the process of building the profile, the
program will create a solid model for the entire project area, and then "slice" the model
vertically along the selected profile line. Or, you can slice an existing solid model.
Striplogs can be appended. A map illustrating the profile location can be requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and interval data (pages 39, 41, 46).
Menu command: I-Data / Profile
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future I-data diagrams. See page 173 for information about drawing the profile slice.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create I-Data Diagrams / Create an I-data profile.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ I-Data Tools / Creating Interval-
Data Profile Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Multi-Panel Section Diagram of Interval Data

Use the Borehole Manager's I-Data / Section tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat) vertical
multi-panel profile of your downhole interval data. The panel endpoints can be placed
163
Solid Models, Profiles & Fences RockWorks2004

anywhere in the project. The data values can be color-coded in a variety of ways. During
the process of building the section, the program will create a solid model for the entire
project area, and then "slice" the model vertically along the selected section panel lines.
Or, you can slice an existing solid model. Striplogs can be appended. A map illustrating
the section trace can be requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and interval data (pages 39, 41, 46).
Menu command: I-Data / Section
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future I-data diagrams. See page 174 for information about drawing the section trace.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create I-Data Diagrams / Create an I-data multi-panel
cross section.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ I-Data Tools / Creating Interval-
Data Sections (Multi-Panel). See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Plan-View Map of Interval Data

Use the Borehole Manager's I-Data / Plan Map tool to create a solid model representing
your downhole interval data (or read an existing model) and slice it horizontally at a user-
specified elevation. The resulting grid model (GRD) can be displayed as a 2-dimensional
map in which the data values can be color-coded in a variety of ways.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and interval data (pages 39, 41, 46).
Menu command: I-Data / Plan Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future I-data diagrams.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ I-Data Tools / Creating Interval-
Data Plan-View Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.
164
RockWorks2004 Solid Models, Profiles & Fences

Borehole Manager: Creating Solid Models of Downhole Point Data:

Models, Fences, Profiles, Sections, and Plan Maps

Creating P-Data Diagrams - Overview

Use the tools in the Borehole Manager's P-Data menu to display your downhole point-
sampled data (such as geophysical measurements) in a variety of ways: as a vertical
profile slice, a multi-paneled profile or “section,”, a 3D fence with any number and
arrangement of panels, a horizontal slice or plan map, and as a 3D isosurface or block
diagram.
Downhole data that was recorded at depth points (as opposed to depth intervals) is entered
into the Borehole Manager’s Points (P-data) tabs. The P-data tabs will show one column
of depth listings (uppermost depths listed first) and one or more columns of measured
values. The data can include all types of geophysical (elog) data: resistivity, gamma,etc.
By contrast, data measured at depth intervals is entered into the I-data tab.
RockWorks creates a solid model of the P-data for display as these diagram types. A
number of modeling methods or algorithms are offered. The resulting solid model is then
sliced vertically to create the profile, section, or fence diagrams, sliced horizontally for the
plan map, or displayed in full as all-voxels or as an isosurface. These are discussed in the
following topics.

Creating a 3D Isosurface or All-Voxel Diagram of Point Data

Use the Borehole Manager's P-Data / Model tool to create a 3-dimensional block or
isosurface diagram that illustrates your downhole elog or other point-sampled data. The
values can be color-coded in a variety of ways. During the process of building the block
diagram, the program will create a solid model of the downhole data using the user-
selected algorithm. 3D striplogs can be appended.
165
Solid Models, Profiles & Fences RockWorks2004

Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and point data (pages 39, 41, 49).
Menu command: P-Data / Model
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future block, fence, and profile diagrams. In RockPlot3D, there are a variety of filtering
and display tools available.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create P-Data Diagrams / Create a P-Data Isosurface
Diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ P-Data Tools / Creating Solid
Diagrams of Point Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Fence Diagram of Point Data

Use the Borehole Manager's P-Data / Fence tool to create a 3-dimensional fence diagram
that illustrates your downhole point data. You may request regular panel spacing, in a
variety of configurations, or you can draw your own panels. The model’s values can be
color-coded in a variety of ways. During the process of building the diagram, the program
will create a solid model for the entire project area, and then "slice" the model vertically
along the selected fence panel line(s). 3D striplogs can be appended. A map illustrating
the fence panel locations can be requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and point data (pages 39, 41, 49).
Menu command: P-Data / Fence
Output window: RockPlot3D (fence), RockPlot2D (fence location map).
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future P-data diagrams. See page 176 for information about drawing the fence panels.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create P-Data Diagrams / Create a P-data fence diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ P-Data Tools / Creating Fence
166
RockWorks2004 Solid Models, Profiles & Fences

Diagrams of Point Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Profile Diagram of Point Data

Use the Borehole Manager's P-Data / Profile tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat) vertical
profile of your downhole point data, between any two points in the study area. The data
values can be color-coded in a variety of ways. During the process of building the profile,
the program will create a solid model for the entire project area, and then "slice" the model
vertically along the selected profile line. Or, you can slice an existing solid model.
Striplogs can be appended. A map illustrating the profile location can be requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and point data (pages 39, 41, 49).
Menu command: P-Data / Profile
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future P-data diagrams. See page 173 for information about drawing the profile slice.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create P-Data Diagrams / Create a P-data profile.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ P-Data Tools / Creating Point-
Data Profile Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Multi-Panel Section Diagram of Point Data

Use the Borehole Manager's P-Data / Section tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat) vertical
multi-panel profile of your downhole point data. The panel endpoints can be placed
anywhere in the project. The data values can be color-coded in a variety of ways. During
167
Solid Models, Profiles & Fences RockWorks2004

the process of building the section, the program will create a solid model for the entire
project area, and then "slice" the model vertically along the selected section panel lines.
Or, you can slice an existing solid model. Striplogs can be appended. A map illustrating
the section trace can be requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and point data (pages 39, 41, 49).
Menu command: P-Data / Section
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future P-data diagrams. See page 174 for information about drawing the section trace.
Borehole Manager Tutorial: Create I-Data Diagrams / Create an I-data multi-panel
cross section.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ P-Data Tools / Creating Point-
Data Sections (Multi-Panel). See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Plan-View Map of Point Data

Use the Borehole Manager's P-Data / Plan Map tool to create a solid model representing
your downhole point data (or read an existing model) and slice it horizontally at a user-
specified elevation. The resulting grid model (GRD) can be displayed as a 2-dimensional
map in which the data values can be color-coded in a variety of ways.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and point data (pages 39, 41, 49).
Menu command: P-Data / Plan Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future P-data diagrams.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ P-Data Tools / Creating Point-
168
RockWorks2004 Solid Models, Profiles & Fences

Data Plan-View Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

Borehole Manager: Creating Solid Models of Downhole Fracture

Data: Models, Fences, Profiles, Sections, and Plan Maps

Creating Fracture Diagrams - Overview

Use the tools in the Borehole Manager's Fractures menu to generate a solid model of
fracture locations and display this model in a variety of ways: as a vertical profile slice, a
multi-paneled profile or “section,”, a 3D fence with any number and arrangement of
panels, a horizontal slice or plan map, and as a 3D isosurface or block diagram.
Downhole fracture data is entered into the Borehole Manager’s Fractures tabs. The
fractures are listed with depth, fracture orientation, and dip angle, radius and thickness. In
addition, color is specified for the fracture disc as displayed in 3d logs. The radius, listed
in your map units, affects the size of the disc in logs and, for modeling purposes, the
extent of the influence of the fracture.
RockWorks creates a solid model of the fractures for display as these diagram types. A
specific modeling method is used for this process. Fracture model G values represent
distance to the closest fracture, so that low values represent proximal fractures, and high
values represent areas where fractures are not prevalent. The resulting solid model is then
sliced vertically to create the profile, section, or fence diagrams, sliced horizontally for the
plan map, or displayed in full as all-voxels or as an isosurface. These are discussed in the
following topics.

Creating a 3D Isosurface or All-Voxel Diagram of Fracture Data

169
Solid Models, Profiles & Fences RockWorks2004

Use the Borehole Manager's Fractures / Model tool to create a 3-dimensional block or
isosurface diagram that illustrates proximity to your downhole fractures. The values can
be color-coded in a variety of ways. During the process of building the block diagram, the
program will create a solid model of the downhole fracture data using a dedicated
algorithm. 3D striplogs can be appended.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and fracture data (pages 39, 41, 51).
Menu command: Fractures / Model
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future fracture profile, section, fence, and other diagrams. In RockPlot3D, there are a
variety of filtering and display tools available. This tool is also available in the Geological
Utilities, in the Solid / Fracture Discs -> Solid menu item.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Fracture Tools / Creating Solid
Diagrams of Downhole Fracture Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Fence Diagram of Fracture Data

Use the Borehole Manager's Fractures / Fence tool to create a 3-dimensional fence
diagram that illustrates your downhole fracture data. You may request regular panel
spacing, in a variety of configurations, or you can draw your own panels. The model’s
values can be color-coded in a variety of ways. During the process of building the
diagram, the program will create a solid model for the entire project area, and then "slice"
the model vertically along the selected fence panel line(s). 3D striplogs can be appended.
A map illustrating the fence panel locations can be requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and fracture data (pages 39, 41, 51).
Menu command: Fractures / Fence
Output window: RockPlot3D (fence), RockPlot2D (fence location map).
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
future fracture diagrams. See page 176 for information about drawing the fence panels.

170
RockWorks2004 Solid Models, Profiles & Fences

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Fracture Tools / Creating

Fracture Fence Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Profile Diagram of Fracture Data

Use the Borehole Manager's Fractures / Profile tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat)
vertical profile of your downhole fracture data, between any two points in the study area.
The data values can be color-coded in a variety of ways. During the process of building
the profile, the program will create a solid model for the entire project area, and then
"slice" the model vertically along the selected profile line. Or, you can slice an existing
solid model. Striplogs can be appended. A map illustrating the profile location can be
requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and fracture data (pages 39, 41, 51).
Menu command: Fractures / Profile
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
additional fracture diagrams. See page 173 for information about drawing the profile
slice.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Fracture Tools / Creating

Fracture Profile Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Multi-Panel Section Diagram of Fracture Data

Use the Borehole Manager's Fractures / Section tool to create a 2-dimensional (flat)
vertical multi-panel profile of your downhole fracture data. The panel endpoints can be
171
Solid Models, Profiles & Fences RockWorks2004

placed anywhere in the project. The data values can be color-coded in a variety of ways.
During the process of building the section, the program will create a solid model for the
entire project area, and then "slice" the model vertically along the selected section panel
lines. Or, you can slice an existing solid model. Striplogs can be appended. A map
illustrating the section trace can be requested.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and fracture data (pages 39, 41, 51).
Menu command: Fractures / Section
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
additional fracture diagrams. See page 174 for information about drawing the section
trace.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Fracture Tools / Creating

Fracture Sections (Multi-Panel). See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Plan-View Map of Fracture Data

Use the Borehole Manager's Fractures / Plan Map tool to create a solid model
representing your downhole fracture data (or read an existing model) and slice it
horizontally at a user-specified elevation. The resulting grid model (GRD) can be
displayed as a 2-dimensional map in which the data values can be color-coded in a variety
of ways.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool specifically reads location, orientation (if any),
and fracture data (pages 39, 41, 51).
Menu command: Fracture / Plan Map
Output window: RockPlot2D
Notes: Once you have the solid model file created, you can use that existing model for
additional fracture diagrams.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Fracture Tools / Creating

Fracture Plan-View Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

172
RockWorks2004 Laying Out Sections & Fences

Chapter 9 - Laying Out Vertical Profiles, Sections

& Fences
During the process of building a vertical profile, cross section or fence diagram,
RockWorks displays a window that illustrates the borehole locations, onto which you
draw the section or fence panel line(s). The look of this window changes depending on the
type of diagram being created, but the general operations are the same. If you are creating
a profile, section, or fence from the Geological Utilities data window, the borehole
locations will not be displayed.

Drawing a Profile Line

The Borehole Manager Profile tools are available within the Lithology, Stratigraphy,
I-Data, P-Data, Fracture and Aquifers menus. They are used to display a vertical slice
from the inside of a solid or stratigraphic model to illustrate lithology distribution,
stratigraphic or water level elevations, geochemical/geophysical values, and fracture
proximities. Striplogs can be included in any of these profile diagrams.
A Profile tool is also available within the Geological Utilities Solid menu, to slice an
existing solid model containing any type of data.
In addition, log-only profiles are available using the Striplogs / Multi-Log Profile tool
which displays multiple boreholes as if projected onto a vertical line of section.
Once you have set up the diagram settings, the program will scan the project database and
extract the borehole locations (Eastings and Northings) from the Location tab of each
active borehole. It will display the well locations in the Profile Location window as a plan-
view map, with boring name and symbol color tied to each well. Any previous line drawn
for this project will also be displayed on the map. You may also turn on the display of the
borehole traces if your wells are inclined or deviated. (Note: if you are using the Solid /
Profile tool, only the project boundaries will be displayed.)
1. To accept the existing cross section cut as-is, simply click the OK button at the
bottom of the window.
2. Or, to draw a new profile line, along which the solid model will be sliced and/or onto
which the logs will be projected, simply left-click on the map location to become the
left edge of the profile and then left-click on the location to become the right edge of
the profile. You do not need to refresh the screen between drawing lines.

173
Laying Out Sections & Fences RockWorks2004

The line can be oriented in the direction of your choice. You may redraw this line of
section as many times as you like until you are pleased with its placement. Note that
the prompt at the top of the window will read "Click on panel starting point" or "Click
on panel ending point" to let you know what it's expecting.
3. For profiles containing logs, you can adjust the Clipping Distance, shown above by
the cross-hatched area. This represents the distance to either side of the actual profile
line that boreholes (or portions of boreholes, if the well is deviated) will be "grabbed"
for projection onto the line. You can change the clipping distance by clicking the up-
or down-arrows at the bottom of the window, or by typing an actual value into the
clipping distance prompt.
4. To snap the profile endpoints to actual well locations, insert a check in the Snap
check-box. After you select the profile endpoints, they will be repositioned to the
nearest boreholes.
5. If you want to type in specific endpoint coordinates, you can do so: Choose the Edit /
Manually Specify Endpoints option. Type in the known X and Y coordinates for
the beginning and ending points of the profile, and click the OK button.
Back at the profile-drawing window, click the Redraw button (or choose View /
Redraw) to redraw the screen with the new profile line.
6. Click OK when you are ready to continue.
The program will create the diagram and display it in the RockPlot2D window (page 239).

See also: Help / Contents / Laying Out Vertical Sections and Fences for additional
topics. See page 22 for more Help information.

Drawing a Multi-Panel Cross Section Trace

The Borehole Manager Section tools are available within the Lithology, Stratigraphy,
I-Data, P-Data, Fracture and Aquifers menus. They are used to display multiple,
connected, vertical slices from the inside of a solid or stratigraphic model to illustrate
174
RockWorks2004 Laying Out Sections & Fences

lithology distribution, stratigraphic or water level elevations, geochemical/geophysical

values, and fracture proximities. Striplogs can be included in any of these section
diagrams.
A Section tool is also available within the Geological Utilities Solid menu, to slice an
existing solid model containing any type of data.
In addition, log-only sections are available using the Striplogs / Multi-Log Section tool.
Once you have set up the diagram settings, the program will scan the project files and
extract the borehole locations (Eastings and Northings) from the Location tab of each
active borehole. It will display the well locations in the Select Boreholes window as a
plan-view map, with boring name and symbol color tied to each well. Any previous panels
drawn for this project will also be displayed on the map.
1. To accept the current selection, simply click the OK button at the bottom of the
window to proceed.
2. To redraw the section line, follow these steps:
Reset the display (if necessary): Rockworks will remember any panel selections from
previous sessions. If you wish to discard any existing selections and start well-picking
from scratch, click the Edit menu’s Reset option. DON'T do this if you want to
append to an existing section.
Pick the first panel endpoint / Append another panel: Click on the location to be
represented along the left edge of the first panel of the section. If you are appending
to an existing trace, pick the location for the next panel to be added to the existing list.
The program will draw a line from the last endpoint to this one.
Pick the next endpoint, and the next and the next. Each selected panel point will be
connected to the previous selection with a line.
3. To snap the panel endpoints to actual well locations, insert a check in the Snap check-
box at the bottom of the window. After you select the panel endpoint pairs, they will
be repositioned to the nearest boreholes.
Lithology, modeled stratigraphy, i-data, p-data, fracture, and aquifer section panels
can lie between boreholes - the slices can be placed anywhere within the model.
However, if you choose to include striplogs in these section diagrams and if the panel
endpoints don't lie at borehole locations, the program will simply project the closest
log onto the panel.
Straight stratigraphy sections must be drawn borehole to borehole, and the program
will automatically snap panel endpoints to well locations.
4. Click OK to accept the section trace.
The program will create the diagram and display it in the RockPlot2D window (page 239).
175
Laying Out Sections & Fences RockWorks2004

Notes:
Well Order: In a section diagram, the order in which the panel endpoints are selected
will make a big difference in the appearance of the diagram. The first panel you
select, regardless of its position in the map, will be at the left edge of the cross
section, and the last will be at the right edge.
Mistakes? Choose the Edit / Undo option to remove the last-picked point. You can
use this command repeatedly to remove panels in backward order. Or, choose Edit /
Reset to clear the display and start over.

See also: Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Laying Out Vertical
Sections and Fences for additional topics. See page 22 for more Help information.

Drawing Fence Diagram Panels

The Borehole Manager Fence tools are available within the Lithology, Stratigraphy, I-
Data, P-Data, Fractures, and Aquifers menus. They are used to display one or more
vertical slices from the inside of a solid model to illustrate lithology distribution,
stratigraphic or water level elevations, fracture proximity, or geochemical/geophysical
values. A Fence tool is also available within the Geological Utilities Solid menu, to slice
an existing solid model containing any type of data.
Once you have set up the diagram settings, the program will scan the project database and
extract the borehole locations (Eastings and Northings) from the Location tab of each
active borehole. It will display the well locations in the Fence Diagram Configuration
window as a plan-view map, with boring name and symbol color tied to each well. Any
previous lines drawn for this project will also be displayed on the map. You may also turn
on the display of the borehole traces if your wells are inclined or deviated. (Note: if you
are using the Solid / Fence tool, only the project boundaries will be displayed.)
1. To accept any existing fence panel arrangement, simply click the OK button at the
bottom of the window to proceed. The program will build the fence diagram and
display it in the RockPlot3D window.
2. To clear the current display to start over, choose the Edit / Reset option.
3. To draw a new fence panel or to add a new panel to the existing display, you have
some options:
Manually draw the line: Simply left-click on the map location to become the one
edge of the cut and then left-click on the location to become the other edge of the cut.
The program will connect the points with a line. For projected fence diagrams, the
slice endpoints do not need to correspond to borehole locations. For "straight" fence
diagrams (Stratigraphy menu), the lines you draw will be snapped to the closest
boreholes.

176
RockWorks2004 Laying Out Sections & Fences

Pre-configured panels: Another option for fence panels is to select a pre-configured

panel arrangement by choosing an option from the Panels menu. For example, for an
automatic “X” panel layout that extends to the edge of the solid model, choose the
Panels / Diagonal option. The different panel layouts are shown below. As
mentioned above, the slices do not need to conform to borehole locations for
projected fence panels. They do for hole to hole fences (Stratigraphy menu) and the
program will snap the drawn endpoints to the closest boreholes.

You can use any combination of hand-drawn and pre-configured panels that you
wish.
4. To snap the panel endpoints to actual well locations, insert a check in the Snap check-
box at the bottom of the window. After you select the panel endpoint pairs, they will
be repositioned to the nearest boreholes.
Lithology, modeled stratigraphy, i-data, p-data, fracture, and aquifer fence panels can
lie between boreholes - the slices can be placed anywhere within the model.
Straight stratigraphy fences must be drawn borehole to borehole, and the program will
automatically snap panel endpoints to well locations.
177
Laying Out Sections & Fences RockWorks2004

Notes: Mistakes? Choose the Edit / Undo option to remove the last-picked panel. You
can use this command repeatedly to remove panels in backward order. Or, choose Edit /
Reset to clear the display and start over.

See also: Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Laying Out Vertical
Sections and Fences for additional topics. See page 22 for more Help information.

178
RockWorks2004 Grid Model Tools

Chapter 10 - Grid Model Tools

Grid Model Tools - Overview
Within RockWorks, you can perform "basic" gridding of XYZ data using the Geological
Utilities Map / Grid-Based Map command. You can also create grid models of
stratigraphic surfaces using the Borehole Manager’s Stratigraphy menu tools, and water
level surfaces using the Aquifer menu tools. The program offers several gridding
methods to do this interpolation of your data. Each operates differently, and each has
strengths and differences. See "Gridding Methods", page 322.
The tools in the Geological Utilities Grid menu are used to summarize, manipulate, and
illustrate existing numeric grid models.

Computing Grid Statistics

The Grid menu’s Statistics utility is used to get a general summary of the contents of an
existing grid file. The computations are reported as a:
• Textual report, in which the summary of grid node values and computed statistics are
displayed in a document in a text editor.
• Plottable frequency histogram of the node values, reported as numbers or percent.
• Plottable "Krajewskigram" or X,Y scattergram of original Z values (X-axis) versus
computed node values (Y-axis).
• Computed grid residuals, representing the difference between observed XY values
and computed grid values at the same locations.
• New grid anomalies model, created in batch from multiple grid models, to highlight
areas where multiple variables show anomalous tendencies.
• Standard deviations of grid node values.
• In addition, grid nodes can be normalized for comparing different models with unlike
Z value ranges.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads existing grid models (*.grd files). For the
residuals computations and Krejewskigrams, you’ll also need the original XYZ data from
which the grid model was computed.
Menu command: Grid / Statistics
Output window: Text report: text window; histogram & Krajewskigram: RockPlot2D;
residuals: Geological Utilities datasheet; anomalies, standard deviations, normalized
values: grid file (.GRD).
Notes: You can use the statistical summaries in a variety of ways:
179
Grid Model Tools RockWorks2004

If you are performing mathematical operations with two grid files, you can create a
report summary of each to assure that they have the same dimensions and numbers of
nodes. If you are creating a grid model of a surface using different gridding
algorithms, you can create a report or histogram summary of each model to view the
differences in the range and/or distribution of the Z-values. If you have created a
grid model of a column of thickness values, the grid summary will give you a quick
volume summary. A Krajewskigram can give you a quick look at the relationship
between observed and computed Z-values and offer some quantitative error analysis,
and the Residuals tool will list these difference values in the datasheet. If you want to
compare multiple models representing different parameters in the same area, the
multivariate anomalies tool does a batch analysis of anomalous zones.

Help / Contents / The Geological Utilities Datasheet / Grid Model Tools / Computing
Grid Statistics. See page 22 for more Help information.

Performing Arithmetic Operations with Grid Models

The tools in the Grid / Math menu are used to perform a variety of mathematical
operations on an existing grid file, storing the results in a new grid file.
Grid & Grid: This tool performs arithmetical operations with the grid node Z-values
in two existing grid files.
Grid & Constant: This tool performs arithmetical operations with the node Z-values in
a single grid model and a constant.
Density Conversion: Use this tool to multiply the grid cell volume (cell-width * cell-
height * Z-value, thickness) by a constant (representing density per unit volume) to
create a new "density" grid.
Absolute Value: Use this tool to convert the Z-values within an existing grid file to
their absolute values, storing the new node values in a new grid file.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These tools read existing grid models (*.grd files).
Menu command: Grid / Math / Grid & Grid Math, Grid & Constant Math / Density
Conversion/ Absolute Value
Output window: Results are re-stored in a grid model (.GRD); 2D map: RockPlot2D; 3D
map: RockPlot3D
Notes: ! In order for the program to match up corresponding nodes in the two input
grid files in the Grid & Grid Math option, they must have the same dimensions (X
and Y coordinates and range) and numbers of nodes. If you aren’t sure of the "size"
of any grid file, use the Grid / Statistics / Report option to obtain a summary.
During gridding, you can manually establish the grid dimensions and node spacing by
activating the Confirm Model Dimensions check-box in the Model Dimensions
window.
! For the Density Conversion tool, the Z-values of the input grid must represent
180
RockWorks2004 Grid Model Tools

thickness, and the thickness units must be the same as the X and Y coordinate units in
order to compute a meaningful volume. You can use the tools in the Coords menu to
translate X and Y coordinates to different units. You can use the RockWorks Edit /
Columns / Thickness command to compute the thickness between two selected data
sheet columns. The thickness values can then be gridded using the Map / Grid-
Based Map option. Sample conversion factors can be found in the Density Factors
system library.
Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Grid Model Tools /
Mathematical Tools. See page 22 for more Help information.

Filtering Grid Models

The tools in the Grid / Filter menu are used to read an existing grid file and alter the grid
node Z values by imposing a filter of some kind. The resulting node values are stored in a
new grid file.
The Boolean Filter transforms a real number grid file to a Boolean (true/false) file in
which nodes are set to "1" if their Z-value falls within a user-specified range, and a
"0" if the Z-values do not.
The Limit Filter is used to compare the nodes of one grid model with the
corresponding nodes in another. Nodes whose Z values exceed or fall below those in
the second grid can be re-assigned those node values. This is handy for constraining
stratigraphy based on lower or upper layers.
The Minimum Area Filter is used to filter from Boolean or conventional grid models
contiguous nodes whose areas fall below a threshold, setting them to zero, to
eliminate exploration target areas that are too small.
The Normalizing Filter normalizes the node values in an existing grid file to range
between two user-entered values.
The Polygon Filter reads a user-created file listing polygon boundary coordinates, and
sets a grid file’s nodes that lie either inside or outside the polygon to a constant value
or to the value of the corresponding node in another grid model.
The Range Filter deletes high or low Z-values from a grid file, reassigning them a
user-specified constant.
The Rounding Filter reads Z-values stored in a grid file and rounds them up or down
to the user-declared rounding interval.
The Smoothing Filter reads an existing grid file and averages the Z-values based on a
user declared "filter" size. The smoother can be run 1 or more times, to get rid of
spurious "noise" within the grid model and bring out regional trends.
The Standardizing Filter computes the standard deviation for each node in an existing
grid file, and stores those values in a new grid file. This can be helpful in finding
anomalies in your data.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These tools read existing grid models (*.GRD files).

181
Grid Model Tools RockWorks2004

Menu command: Grid / Filters / Boolean, Limit, Minimum Area, Normalize, Polygon
Clip, Range, Round, Smooth, Standardize.
Output window: Results are re-stored in a grid model (.GRD); 2D map: RockPlot2D; 3D
map: RockPlot3D.
Notes:
The Polygon Vertices editor contains a button that will plot the polygon in a
RockPlot2D window. If you save that image, it can then be plotted over your resulting
map using RockPlot2D's Utilities / Append command. See Polygon Vertices Tables
(page 308) for more information.

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Grid Model Tools / Grid
Filtering Tools. See page 22 for more Help information.

Editing Grid Models

The Grid / Edit command is used to edit the node values stored in a RockWorks grid
model, or to create from scratch a new grid with user declared dimensions and node
values.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This Grid tool reads existing grid models (*.grd files).
Menu command: Grid / Edit.
Output window: Results are re-stored in a grid model (.GRD).
Notes: The Grid Editor is used to modify node "Z" values only. It cannot be used to
modify the X,Y location coordinates of the nodes themselves

See Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Grid Model Tools /
RockWorks Grid Editor. See page 22 for more Help information.

Performing a Slope/Aspect Analysis on Grid Models

The Slope/Aspect Analysis command in the RockWorks Grid menu is used to compute
the changes in Z-values (elevations, concentrations, etc.) between neighboring nodes in an
existing grid file, and store these in up to three new grid files:
A slope grid which contains the change (or slope) between node Z-values, expressed
in degrees, percent, or radians.
An aspect grid which contains the direction of the slope, expressed in azimuth
degrees.
A second-derivative grid which contains the change in slope (the slope of the slope
grid) to illustrate bends.
182
RockWorks2004 Grid Model Tools

Your "basic" grid file containing structural elevation values, for example, can generate a
nice looking contour map from which you can determine the elevation for any particular
location. The Slope/Aspect Analysis tool can take this information one step further. A
slope grid can tell you the steepness of a tightly-contoured structural face, and an aspect
grid can inform you of the direction it is facing.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These Grid menu tools read existing grid models
(*.GRD files).
Menu command: Grid / Slope/Aspect Analysis.
Output window: Results are re-stored in a grid model (.GRD).
Notes:
The grid files that result from the Slope/Aspect Analysis utility can be used to create
a directional map (Grid / Directional Maps) such as upgradient or downgradient
vector maps, flow maps, or strike and dip maps. These require both a slope (dip) grid
and an aspect (direction) grid.
They can also be used to create a contour map (Map / Grid-Based Map) to illustrate
selected slope angles (for example, areas where slope exceeds 10 degrees).

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Grid Model Tools /

Slope/Aspect Analysis. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating Directional Maps of Slope/Aspect Grid Models

The Directional Maps option in the RockWorks Grid menu is used to illustrate slope and
aspect grid models (from Grid / Slope/Aspect Analysis) as a variety of 2-dimensional
maps:

Downgradient vector maps display a small arrow at each node, pointing down-slope in the
direction of the slope as modeled in the slope and aspect grid models. You may request
that the arrows be scaled proportionally to the slope value.
Upgradient vector maps display a small arrow pointing up-slope at each node, with the
option of the arrows scaled proportionally to the slope steepness.

Strike and dip maps display at each node a small line in the direction of the strike, with a
smaller line perpendicular to this in the direction of the dip. Locations with zero dip angle
are noted with closed circle symbols.
183
Grid Model Tools RockWorks2004

Flow maps illustrate the high-to-low pathway in the grid models using lines in a 2D map.
3D flow diagrams illustrate the high-to-low pathway in an existing surface model for
display in 3D.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These tools read existing grid models (*.GRD files).
Menu command: Grid / Directional Maps / Downgradient Vectors, Upgradient
Vectors, Strike and Dip Symbols, Flow Map, 3D Flow Diagram.
Output window: RockPlot2D, RockPlot3D
Notes: See also Arrow Maps in the Linears menu (page 209) for information about 2-
dimensional maps with arrows that represent lineations.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Grid Model Tools / Directional
Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

Performing a Trend Surface Analysis

Use the Grid / Trend Surface Analysis tools to determine regional trend for selected data
in the main data sheet. This can help you to determine what trend order to select when
creating a Trend Surface grid model, and it can help you to isolate regional anomalies by
computing trend residuals. These tools are offered:
Use the Trend Surface Analysis / Report command to perform a trend surface
analysis on a selected Z-value column in the data sheet and to list the correlation and
residuals for first through sixth order polynomials in a report. The completed report
is loaded into a RockWare text window. You may save the report text to disk, print
the report, or copy its contents to the Clipboard for pasting into other applications.
Use the Trend Surface Analysis / Residuals command to perform a trend surface
analysis on a selected z-value column and compute the residuals for a selected
polynomial order, representing the difference between observed z-values and trend z-
values. The residuals are stored in a data sheet column of the user’s choice.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These tools read existing grid models (*.GRD files).
Menu command: Grid / Trend Surface Analysis / Report, Residuals.
Output window: Report: text window. Residuals: Geological Utilities datasheet.
Notes: The trend surface report can be used to determine how well any of the trend
surface models fit your data. The higher the correlation coefficient, the better the fit.
This information can be helpful in determining whether there is much regional trend
184
RockWorks2004 Grid Model Tools

to your data. By isolating regional behavior, local anomalies can stand out.
This report can also be helpful if you are creating a trend surface map of your data, by
providing correlation information. See Trend Surface Gridding in the Help messages
for information about creating trend surface maps, and examples of different
polynomials.
Use the residuals to determine where localized differences from the regional
background may be.
Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Grid Model Tools / Trend
Surface Analysis. See page 22 for more Help information.

Importing Grid Models into RockWorks

The Grid / Import Grid command is used to read an existing set of gridded data stored in
one of the accepted formats and translate the data into a RockWorks grid file format. This
tool also imports JPG or BMP images and translates them into a grid format.
ASCII: ASCII grid files consist of a list of space-delimited xyz values in which each
line contains one node, also referred to as "Text" format.
Bitmap: RockWorks can import BMP or JPG images and store them as grid models.
Be sure the input file, declared at the top of the window, has a ".bmp" extension if it's
a BMP file, and a ".jpg" extension if it's a JPG file.
Digital Elevation Model (DEM): RockWorks can import Canadian Government,
USGS 30-Meter, or USGS 3 Arc Second DEM formats.
ESRI ASCIIGRID: This tool imports a grid model from an ESRI GIS (r) program
that has been saved in an ASCII format.
GXF: This represents GXF (Grid eXchange Files) output from the Geosoft program.
This program does not import "compressed" GXF grid models.
RockWorks7: These grid models are binary files that were created by the last DOS
version of RockWorks.
Surfer: RockWorks can import Surfer version 6 or version 7 and 8 ASCII or binary
grid models.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These tools read external grid models for import as
RockWorks grid models.
Menu command: Grid / Import.
Output window: Imported grids are saved as RockWorks grid models (.GRD).

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Grid Model Tools / Importing
& Exporting Grid Models. See page 22 for more Help information.

185
Grid Model Tools RockWorks2004

Exporting RockWorks Grid Models

Use Grid / Export Grid to export the data contained in a RockWorks grid model to
another file format. It offers export to a variety of formats, with a variety of options:
ASCII XYZ: X and Y node locations and Z values are listed in three columns, with
user-selected delimiter character, decimal precision, with or without a header.
ASCII Matrix: The Z-values only of the grid file are listed in rows and columns,
with the number of entries corresponding to the numbers of nodes horizontally and
vertically in the grid file. The Z-values are listed at the decimal precision you select.
AutoCAD DXF Matrix: These ASCII files can be read into any software application
that reads files in a DXF format. They will appear as a three-dimensional mesh
surface; line color, layer number, vertical exaggeration, and others user-selected.
Geosoft GXF: GXF (Grid eXchange) are an ASCII grid format read by Geosoft.
ESRI ASCIIGRID: Export the RockWorks grid to an ASCII grid file that's
importable into ESRI GIS programs for contouring and other spatial analysis.
Ohio Automation ENZ: X and Y node locations and Z values are listed in three
columns in an ASCII format, with columns separated by commas. The node order is
the same as that listed for the ASCII XYZ, above.
RockWorks7: This grid file format is read by the RockWorks version 7 program for
DOS, published by RockWare.
RockWare RTM: The RockWare Terrain Model (RTM) is a binary grid file format
originally designed as a method for shipping Digital Elevation Model (DEM) data.
Surfer: Choose from Surfer/6 binary or Surfer/7 and Surfer/8 ASCII and binary
formats.
VistaPro: This is a binary grid format read by VistaPro, as DEM data.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These Grid menu tools specifically read RockWorks
grid models (*.GRD) for export to other grid model format.
Menu command: Grid / Export.
Output window: n/a.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Grid Model Tools / Importing
& Exporting Grid Models. See page 22 for more Help information.

186
RockWorks2004 Solid Model Tools

Chapter 11 – Solid Model Tools

Solid Menu Tools - Overview
Solid models are discussed in Chapter 8. They are used to illustrate the 3-dimensional
distribution of geochemistry, geophysical, lithology, or other measured values.
The tools in the Geological Utilities Solid menu are used to filter, extract, edit, and
otherwise manipulate these solid models.
See also: Creating Solid Models (page 153), Solid Modeling Reference (page 326).

Computing Solid Model Statistics

The Geological Utilities Solid / Statistics utility is used to get a general summary of the
contents of an existing solid model file. The statistical summary can be displayed in two
ways:
As a textual report, in which the summary of node values and computed statistics are
displayed in a document in a text editor.
As a plottable frequency histogram of the node values, reported as numbers or
percent.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads existing solid models (*.MOD files).
Menu command: Solid / Statistics
Output window: Text report: text window; histogram: RockPlot2D
Notes: You can use the statistical summaries in a variety of ways:
If you are performing mathematical operations with two solid model files, you can
create a summary of each to assure that they have the same dimensions and numbers
of nodes.
If you are creating a solid model of geophysical or geochemical data using different
modeling methods, you can create a summary of each model to view the differences
in the range of the G-values.
Be warned that histograms of high-density solid models may take a significant
amount of time to create, or they may exceed the capacity of your computer system.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Solid Model Tools / Solid
Model Statistical Tools. See page 22 for more Help information.

187
Solid Model Tools RockWorks2004

Performing Arithmetic Operations with Solid Models

The tools in the Geological Utilities Solid / Math option are used to perform arithmetic
operations on the values stored in an existing solid model file, storing the results in a new
solid model file. The following options are available:
Model & Model: This tool performs arithmetical operations with the node G-values
in two existing solid model files.
Model & Constant: This tool performs arithmetical operations with the node G-
values in a single solid model and a constant.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These tools read existing solid models (*.MOD files).
Menu command: Solid / Math / Model & Model, Model & Constant
Output window: Results are re-stored in a solid model (.MOD); RockPlot3D
Notes:

! In order for the program to match up corresponding nodes in the two input model,
they must have the same dimensions (X, Y, and Z coordinates and range) and
numbers of nodes. If you aren’t sure of the "size" of any solid model, use the Solid
/ Statistics / Report option to obtain a summary. During modeling, you can
manually establish the model dimensions and node spacing by activating the
Confirm Model Dimensions check-box in the Model Dimensions window.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Solid Model Tools /

Mathematical Tools.

Filtering Solid Models

The Filter option in the Solid menu is used to filter the nodes contained within an existing
solid model file.
The following tools are available.
The Distance Filter is used to filter an existing solid model file based on the nodes'
distances from the drill holes. All nodes that lie beyond the distance cutoff will be set
to zero. This can be used to remove low-confidence areas from a model.
The Grid Filter is used to adjust the voxel values in a solid model based on their
location above or below one reference grid model, or above, between, or below two
reference grid models. This can be a handy way to assert stratigraphic surface or
ground surface constraints on a solid model.
The Polygon Filter reads a user-created file listing polygon boundary coordinates, and
sets a solid model’s nodes that lie either inside or outside a vertical projection of the
188
RockWorks2004 Solid Model Tools

polygon to "0".
The Range Filter deletes high or low G-values from a solid model file, reassigning
them a user-specified constant.
The Rounding Filter reads G-values stored in a solid model file and rounds them up
or down to the closest user-declared rounding interval.
The Smoothing Filter tool reads an existing solid model and averages the G-values
based on a user declared "filter" size. The smoother can be run 1 or more times, to
get rid of spurious "noise" within the model and bring out regional trends.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These tools read existing solid models (*.MOD files).
Menu commands: Solid / Filter / Distance Filter, Grid Filters, Polygon Clip, Range
Filter, Rounding Filter, Smooth.
Output window: Results are re-stored in a solid model (.MOD); RockPlot3D
Notes:
The model-smoothing tool pays no attention whatsoever to the original data from
which the model was generated and makes no effort to honor the observed data
values.
The polygon filter tool requires an existing “polygon vertices table” that lists the X
and Y coordinates of the polygonal area (assumed to be on the surface) below which
the solid model will be clipped.
When filtering a solid model based on one or two grid surfaces, note that the input
solid model and the input grid file must have the same dimensions and numbers of
nodes in the X and Y directions in order for this filter to work. If you aren't sure, you
can use the Statistics option in the Grid and Solid menus to view a summary of
model dimensions and node spacings for grid and solid models, respectively.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Solid Model Tools / Solid
Model Filtering Tools. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating and Manipulating Boolean Solid Models

The Solid menu's Boolean Ops listing contains tools to transform a real number solid
model file to a Boolean (true/false) file in which nodes are set to "1" if their G-value falls
within a user-specified range, and a "0" if the G-values do not. In addition, there are tools
to manipulate the resulting Boolean models.
The following options are available:
Boolean Conversion: This tool transforms a real number solid model file to a Boolean
(true/false) file. In this process, the G-values of nodes are set to "1" if their original
G-value falls within a user-specified range, and to a "0" if the G-values do not fall
189
Solid Model Tools RockWorks2004

within the range. (Then, multiply this model back against the original to zero-out
areas where your criteria aren't met.)
Minimum Ore Zone Thickness: This tool is used to specify a minimum thickness for
any individual ore or material zone to be included in the output model and
computations. This is a means of discarding non-economic areas from the totals.
Minimum Total Ore Thickness: This tool is used to specify a minimum thickness for
the combined, total ore or material zones to be included in the output model and
computations. This is also a means of discarding non-economic areas from the totals.
Maximum Total Waste Thickness: This tool is used to remove small pockets of "non-
ore" material from surrounding "ore" blocks, translating them to "ore" classification
and including them in the output solid model for future calculations.
Stripping Ratio: This tool is used filter a Boolean solid model based on the ratio
between the thickness of the overburden ("waste") and the thickness of the zone of
interest ("ore"). Several methods of computing the stripping ratio are offered, based
on individual ore zones or total ore zones.
Density Conversion: This tool is used to enter a multiplier for individual Boolean
voxels so that the program can compute total mass as well as total volume. The X, Y,
and Z-values of the input model must be in the same units in order to compute a
meaningful volume
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These tools read existing solid models (*.MOD files).
Menu commands: Solid / Boolean Ops / Boolean Conversion, Minimum Ore Zone
Thickness, Minimum Total Ore Thickness, Maximum Waste Thickness, Stripping
Ratio, Density Conversion.
Output window: Results are re-stored as a Boolean solid model (.MOD); RockPlot3D
Notes: The tools listed after Boolean Conversion can read ONLY BOOLEAN SOLID
MODELS.
The computations can be constrained by a grid model representing surface elevations.
Be sure the grid and solid models have the same XY dimensions and node spacings.
See also the Solid / Convert / Ore Thickness to Grid tool if you wish to convert the
output Boolean model to a grid model for display as a 2D contour map.
Be sure that the conversion factor you enter for the Density Conversion tool matches
the volume units that the program is using! If the program will be computing volume
in cubic feet but your conversion constant represents weight per cubic inch, you
would need to convert the constant to weight per cubic foot before entering it here.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Solid Model Tools / Boolean
Model Tools. See page 22 for more Help information.

190
RockWorks2004 Solid Model Tools

Converting and Extracting Solid Model Data

The Solid menu's Convert listing contains tools to convert certain solid model data to 2-
dimensional grid model format, to extract 2-dimensional "layers" from solid models as
grid files, and to insert 2-D grid model layers into solid models. These tools are available:
Ore Thickness to Grid: This tool translates a Boolean solid model file representing
"ore" versus "not-ore" into a 2-dimensional grid file that represents total ore
thickness, for display as a contour map, 3D surface, etc.
In this example, the solid model displays in dark clay zones that are > 3 feet thick
(created in the Solid / Boolean Ops / Minimum Ore Zone Thickness tool). The
contour map shows a plan view of the total clay thickness.

Overburden Thickness to Grid: This tool is used to translate a Boolean solid model
file representing "ore" versus "not-ore" into a 2-dimensional grid file that represents
total overburden ("not-ore") thickness. The resulting grid file can be illustrated as a
contour map, 3D surface, etc.
In this example, the solid model displays in dark clay zones that are > 3 feet thick
(created in the Solid / Boolean Ops / Minimum Ore Zone Thickness tool). The
contour map shows a plan view of the total thickness of the NOT-CLAY or
“overburden”.

Extract Grid from Model: This tool "pulls" out a 2-dimensional grid file from an
existing real number or Boolean solid model file. The grid file can be extracted from
any horizontal (constant Z) or vertical (constant Y or X) layer in the original solid
model.
191
Solid Model Tools RockWorks2004

Insert Grid into Model: This tool is used to insert a 2-dimensional grid file "slice"
into an existing real number or Boolean solid model file, replacing the existing node
values with the grid's node values. The grid file can be inserted into any horizontal
(constant Z) or vertical (constant Y or X) layer in the original solid model.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These tools read existing solid models (*.mod files).
Menu commands: Solid / Convert / Ore Thickness -> Grid, Overburden Thickness ->
Grid, Extract Grid from Model, Insert Grid Into Model.
Output window: Results are re-stored as a solid model file (.MOD) or grid file (.GRD).
Notes:
The Ore Thickness to Grid and Overburden Thickness to Grid tools read ONLY
BOOLEAN SOLID MODELS.
See Notes on Orientation (below) for information on the coordinates that are
represented in the Extract and Insert Grid tools.
See Editing Grid Models (page 182) for details about editing the extracted grid model.
See Creating Grid-Based Maps (page 116) if you wish to illustrate the extracted grid
file as a map.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Solid Model Tools /

Converting, Extracting, Inserting Grid Models. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Notes on Orientation
Because of the different orientations of the different slice planes, the X and Y axes of the
2-dimensional slice that is extracted from a solid model are not always going to coincide
with the X and Y axes of the solid model. For the north/south and east/west vertical
slices, the following drawings illustrate how the program will define the X and Y axes of
the 2-D slice it extracts:
South-North Vertical Section: X in grid = Y in model. Y in grid = Z in model.

192
RockWorks2004 Solid Model Tools

West-East Vertical Section: X in grid = X in model. Y in grid = Z in model.

In the case of horizontal slices, however, the X and Y axes remain the same:

Editing Solid Model Slices

The Edit command in the Solid menu is used to edit the contents of a real number or
Boolean solid model file, one "slice" at a time. The slice you specify will be loaded into
the Grid Editor for viewing and editing. When your work in the Grid Editor is complete,
the edited slice will be re-inserted into the solid model. The modified solid model is saved
on disk under a different file name.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads existing solid models (*.mod files).
Menu commands: Solid / Edit.
Output window: Results are re-stored as a solid model file (.MOD).
Notes: Because of the different orientations of the different slice planes, the X and Y axes
of the 2-dimensional slice that is extracted from a solid model are not always going to
coincide with the X and Y axes of the solid model. See Notes on Orientation (above) for
information. In addition, the solid model voxel G value will be displayed in the Editor as
the Z value.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Solid Model Tools / Editing
Solid Model Slices. See page 22 for more Help information.

193
Solid Model Tools RockWorks2004

Morphing Solid Models

The Solid / Morph tool is used to read a list of existing solid model files (*.MOD) and
create a dynamic “movie” within RockPlot3D that shows time-based changes within these
models. You can specify any number of intermediate, transitional models be generated
between the existing models.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This utility reads a simple list of solid model file names
(*.MOD), in the order in which they are to be displayed in the morphed sequence.
Menu command: Solid / Morph.
Output window: RockPlot3D
Notes: Be sure the solid model files have the same dimensions and number of nodes to
morph successfully.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Solid Model Tools / Morphing
Solid Models. See page 22 for more Help information.

Importing Solid Models

The Solid / Import command is used to read an existing set of regularly-spaced XYZG
data stored in an ASCII format and translate the data into a RockWorks solid model file
format.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads external solid model files.
Menu commands: Solid / Import.
Output window: Results are stored as a RockWorks solid model file (.MOD).
Notes: See the Solid Model Import Format in the Help messages for details about the
input file’s required structure.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Solid Model Tools / Importing
Data into a Solid Model. See page 22 for more Help information.

194
RockWorks2004 Solid Model Tools

Exporting Solid Models

If you wish to export the data contained in a solid model file created within RockWorks,
use the Solid / Export command. It offers model export to these different formats, with a
variety of options:
ASCII XYZG: XYZ node locations and G values are listed in four columns,
separated by the character of your choice, at the decimal precision you select, with or
without a header.
NOeSYS (T3D): The NOeSYS program provides an excellent way to visualize
XYZG data modeled in RockWorks. The output file is ASCII in format. RockWorks
permits you to launch T3D automatically when the file export is completed.
Slicer Dicer: This program is another excellent visualization tool for 3D data.
RockWorks offers launching of Slicer Dicer automatically when the export process is
complete.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. These tools read existing solid model files (.MOD).
Menu commands: Solid / Export.
Output window: Results are stored as an external solid model file.
Notes:
See the help messages for details about the output file structure.
See the help messages, also, for details about “automatic” versus “manual” opening of
the exported file in the Slicer Dicer program.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Solid Model Tools / Exporting
Solid Models to Other Formats. See page 22 for more Help information.

Initializing a Blank Solid Model

Use the Solid / Initialize tool to create a new solid model from scratch, at the dimensions
and node spacing you declare. All model nodes will be initialized to a single, user-
declared value.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities.
Menu commands: Solid /Initialize.
Output window: Results are stored as a RockWorks solid model file (.MOD).

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Solid Model Tools / Initializing
a Blank Solid Model. See page 22 for more Help information.
195
Solid Model Tools RockWorks2004

Notes

196
RockWorks2004 Volume Tools

Chapter 12 - Computing Volumes

Volume Menu Tools - Overview
RockWorks offers a number of tools for computing volumes of stockpiles, of
formations, and of specific material zones in solid models.
The Geological Utilities EZ Volume tool reads X, Y, and thickness values from the
datasheet and computes volume using a Delaunay triangulation method. The output is a
textual report. This is often used to compute stockpile volume.
The Geological Utilities Extract Solid reads an existing solid model (such as soil
chemistry or lithology type), determines the volume of a pit that would be required to
extract the portions of the solid model that fall within a specified range (e.g.
contaminated soil or a selected lithotype). The output is a report that lists the pit and
contaminant volumes and the stripping ratios, a 2D diagram illustrating the pit
elevations, and/or a 3D diagram showing the filtered solid and the pit elevations.
The Borehole Manager’s Stratigraphy Volumetrics tool computes volumes of
stratigraphic layers at elevation intervals, displaying a report in the Geological Utilities
datasheet. This is an easy method for computing volumes of stratified material.
The Borehole Manager’s Lithology Volumetrics tool computes volumes of lithology
zones at elevation intervals, displaying a report in the Geological Utilities datasheet.
This is an easy method for computing volumes of non-stratified material.
The Borehole Manager’s I-Data Volumetrics tool performs a variety of filtering
operations on an existing solid model to create a detailed report and diagram of
material volume (or mass). Filters include overburden (stripping ratio), zone thickness,
polygon boundaries, distances from boreholes. This can be used in both mining
(marketable-material volumes) and remediation (contaminated soil volumes).

Geological Utilities: EZ Volume of X, Y, Thickness Data

This "EZ" volume calculator is used to compute the volume for a column of thickness
values in the Geological Utilities datasheet and list the volume in a textual report. It uses
a basic approach: Volumes are computed using a Delaunay triangulation method in which
the samples are connected together in a network of triangles, a sample at each vertex. The
volume of each triangle is computed, based on the thicknesses used as Z-values, and then
the total volume added up.

197
Volume Tools RockWorks2004

This method tends to provide lower estimates of total volume than an orthogonal grid-
based calculation. Optional volume-to-mass conversion is available.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads XYZ files where the Z value represents
thickness. (See page 74.)
Menu command: Volumetrics /EZ Volume.
Output window: The report is displayed in a text window.
Notes:
This tool is well suited to computing simple volumes of stockpiles. Be sure the
surface elevations of your stockpile are adjusted to represent thickness (subtract the
base elevation from the surface elevation).
The X and Y coordinates and the Thickness values must be in the same units in order
for the volume calculations to make sense! (Cubic degree-feet units aren’t very
intuitive…) Therefore, if your X and Y coordinates are in decimal longitude and
latitude, for example, you would need to have the program convert them to feet or
meters to match your thickness units in order to get a sensible volume calculation.
RockWorks contains a variety of coordinate conversion utilities (see the Coords
menu).
If you want meaningful mass computations, be sure that the conversion factor
you enter matches the volume units that the program is using! If the program
will be computing volume in cubic feet but your conversion constant represents
weight per cubic inch, you would need to convert the constant to weight per cubic
foot before entering it here. See the help messages for details. If you want no
conversion, enter 1.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Volume Tools / Computing

Volumes based on Thickness Values. See page 22 for more Help information.

198
RockWorks2004 Volume Tools

Geological Utilities: Extracting Solids

The Geological Utilities Volume / Extract Solid tool reads an existing solid model (such
as soil chemistry or lithology type), determines the volume of a pit that would be required
to extract the portions of the solid model that fall within a specified range (e.g.
contaminated soil or a selected lithotype). The output is a report that lists the pit and
contaminant volumes and the stripping ratios, a 2D diagram illustrating the pit elevations,
and/or a 3D diagram showing the filtered solid and the pit elevations.
This program assumes you have already created a solid model that illustrates the
distribution of the desired material. This can be created using the Geological Utilities
Solid / Model tool (for XYZG data in the datasheet or external file) or using the Borehole
Manager Model tools (Lithology, Stratigraphy, I-Data, P-Data menus). You may also
input solid models that have already been filtered for G value range or with a polygon
filter (Solid / Boolean Ops or Solid / Filter tools).
The program also requires that you have an existing grid model of the surface elevations
for the project. This will create more accurate computations and surface models.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads existing real number or Boolean solid
model files.
Menu command: Volumetrics /Extract Solid.
Output window: The report is displayed in a text window; the grid surface in RockPlot2D
or 3D; the solid diagram in RockPlot3D.
Notes:
This extraction process assumes that the excavation walls are vertical (no benches or
slopes).
Use the Report Captions settings to fully customize your report to your units. See the
help messages for examples.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities/ Volume Tools / Extracting

Solids. See page 22 for more Help information.

199
Volume Tools RockWorks2004

Borehole Manager: Creating a Lithologic Volume Report

Use the Borehole Manager’s Lithology / Volumetrics tool to read an existing lithologic
solid model and compute volume, mass, number of nodes, and/or percent of each rock or
soil type at user-declared elevation levels. Lithology solid models can be created in the
Lithology / Profile, Section, Fence, Surface Map, Plan Map and/or Model options.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool reads existing lithology solid model (.mod) files.
Menu command: Lithology /Volumetrics.
Output window: The report is displayed in the Geological Utilities datasheet.
Notes:
Be sure the Lithology Table that was used when the lithology solid model was created
is currently set as the default table. (See page 293.)
If you select the Mass option, these computations are based on the Density Factors
declared in the current Lithology Table which declare mass per cubic unit.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Lithology Tools / Computing

Lithology Volumes. See page 22 for more Help information.

200
RockWorks2004 Volume Tools

Borehole Manager: Creating a Stratigraphic Volume Report

Use the Borehole Manager’s Stratigraphy / Volume tool to read a saved stratigraphic
model and compute volume, mass, number of nodes, and/or percent of each stratigraphic
type in each user-defined elevation layer. Stratigraphic models can be saved when you
create a block diagram using the Stratigraphy / Model tool.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool reads existing stratigraphic solid model files.
Menu command: Stratigraphy /Volumetrics.
Output window: The report is displayed in the Geological Utilities datasheet.
Notes:
Be sure the Stratigraphy Table that was used when the stratigraphy model was created
is currently set as the default table. (See page 294.)
If you select the Mass option, these computations are based on the Density Factors
declared in the current Stratigraphy Table which declare mass per cubic unit.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ Stratigraphy Tools / Computing

Stratigraphy Volumes. See page 22 for more Help information.

201
Volume Tools RockWorks2004

Borehole Manager: Creating Detailed Geochemistry Volume

Reports and Diagrams
The Borehole Manager’s I-Data / Volumetrics tool is designed to perform a variety of
“what-if” filtering operations and volume computing operations on an existing solid
model. The input model can represent precious metal assays, contaminant concentrations,
or any measurable component for which you wish to compute volume.
This volume calculator specializes in models that are not stratified or homogeneous. You
can filter the solid model for interbed thickness, material zone thickness, polygon areas,
and distance from a borehole.
Datasheet: Borehole Manager. This tool reads existing solid model files.
Menu command: I-Data /Volumetrics.
Output windows:
The final, filtered Boolean solid model file that represents the distribution of
favorable materials can be displayed in RockPlot3D.
The final thickness or mass grid model can be displayed in RockPlot2D or 3D.
The detailed or summarized text report is displayed in a text window.
Notes:
This tool replaces the RockWorks99 Volume / 3D Solid Model tool.
See also: RockPlot3D for display of solid model or stratigraphy volume right in the
3D window. The Solid / Statistics / Report tool for a quick report of dimensions and
volume of any solid model.

Help / Contents / Working in the Borehole Manager/ I-Data Tools / Creating Detailed
I-Data Volume Reports and Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

202
RockWorks2004 Hydrology & Hydrochemistry

Chapter 13 – Hydrology/Hydrochemistry Tools

The Geological Utilities Hydrology and Hydrochemistry menus contain tools used for
computing water level drawdown, creating water level and precipitation graphs, and
hydrochemistry diagrams and calculations.
In earlier versions of RockWorks, these tools were lumped under the “Hydro” menu.

Computing Drawdown for a Single Well

The Geological Utilities Hydrology / Drawdown (1 Well) utility is used to calculate

water-level drawdown for a single well using the Theis non-equilibrium equation. Data
for a single well is entered directly into the program dialog box; it is not read from the
program datasheet.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. The user inputs data directly into the program
window.
Menu command: Hydrology / Drawdown (1 well).

203
Hydrology & Hydrochemistry RockWorks2004

Output windows: The program will display computed drawdown numbers at user-selected
distance increments in the program window. The optional diagram is displayed in
RockPlot2D.
Notes: See the help messages for a listing of the Theis equation.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create Hydrology/Hydrochemisty Diagrams / Compute
water level drawdown for a single well.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Hydrology Tools / Computing

Drawdown for a Single Well. See page 22 for more Help information.

Computing a Drawdown Surface

The Geological Utilities Hydrology / Drawdown Surface utility is used to generate a

potentiometric surface model based on pumping and/or injection wells using the Theis
non-equilibrium equation.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool reads drawdown data (page 87).
Menu command: Hydrology / Drawdown Surface.
Output window: RockPlot2D or RockPlot3D.
Notes: See the help messages for a listing of the Theis equation.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create Hydrology/Hydrochemisty Diagrams / Compute
water level drawdown for multiple wells.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Hydrology Tools / Computing

a Drawdown Surface. See page 22 for more Help information.

204
RockWorks2004 Hydrology & Hydrochemistry

Plotting Water Level versus Precipitation

The Geological Utilities Hydrology / Hydrograph command reads from the main
datasheet listings of water level and precipitation measurements over time, and creates a
HydroGraph diagram that illustrates their relationship.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool reads hydrograph data (page 87).
Menu command: Hydrology / HydroGraph.
Output window: RockPlot2D.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Hydrology Tools / Creating

Hydrographs. See page 22 for more Help information.

Computing Total Dissolved Solids

The Geological Utilities Hydrochemistry / Total Dissolved Solids command is used to
read a listing of ion concentrations from the datasheet and compute total dissolved solids
for each sample.
Total dissolved solids represent the sum of all "declared" ions, as listed in the Data Input
Columns, in the parts per million (or milligrams per liter) units read from the Geological
Utilities datasheet.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, Hydrochemistry data (page 88).
Menu command: Hydrochemistry / Total Dissolved Solids.
Notes: You may choose up to 4 additional cations and up to 4 additional anions in the
computations.
Output window: Geological Utilities datasheet.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Hydrochemistry Tools /

Computing Total Dissolved Solids.

205
Hydrology & Hydrochemistry RockWorks2004

Computing Ion Balance

The Geological Utilities Hydrochemistry / Ion Balance tool is used to read a listing of
ion concentrations from the datasheet and compute cation:anion ratio for each sample, in
milli-equivalents per liter.
RockWorks uses the following equation for the ion balance:
(( cations - anions ) / ( cations + anions ) ) x 100
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, Hydrochemistry data (page 88)
Menu command: Hydrochemistry / Ion Balance.
Output window: Geological Utilities datasheet.
Notes: You may choose up to 4 additional cations and up to 4 additional anions in the
computations.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Hydrochemistry Tools /

Computing Ion Balance. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating Piper Diagrams

The Geological Utilities Hydrochemistry / Piper command is used to read a listing of ion
concentrations from the datasheet and create a Piper diagram for groundwater ion
concentration analysis.
Piper diagrams consist of three parts: Two trilinear diagrams along the bottom and one
diamond-shaped diagram in the middle. The trilinear diagrams illustrate the relative
concentrations of cations (left diagram) and anions (right diagram) in each sample. Each
sample will be represented by a point in each trilinear diagram; unique symbols may be
selected for each sample and can be referenced in a symbol index at the top of the

206
RockWorks2004 Hydrology & Hydrochemistry

diagram. Symbols may be accompanied by labels if desired. The diamond field is

designed to show both anion and cation groups.
Circles may be plotted around each point to illustrate total dissolved solids ("TDS") for
the sample. The total dissolved solid computation will include all components listed in the
data file ("standard" ions and additional ions).
Concentrations entered in the source data file in units of milligrams per liter are converted
to milli-equivalents per liter for display on the diagram.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, Hydrochemistry data (page 88)
Menu command: Hydrochemistry / Piper.
Output window: RockPlot2D.
Notes: You may choose up to 4 additional cations and up to 4 additional anions for the
TDS computations.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create Hydrology/Hydrochemisty Diagrams / Create a
Piper diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Hydrochemistry Tools /

Creating Piper Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating Stiff Diagrams

The Geological Utilities Hydrochemistry / Stiff command is used to read a listing of ion
concentrations from the datasheet and create a Stiff diagram for groundwater ion
concentration analysis.
Stiff diagrams plot milli-equivalent concentrations of cations on the left side of the
diagram and of anions on the right. Each ion is plotted as a point, and the points are
connected to form a polygonal shape. The ions are plotted in a consistent order (Na+K
207
Hydrology & Hydrochemistry RockWorks2004

across from Cl; Ca across from HCO3 + CO3; Mg across from SO4) so that each polygon
becomes that sample's "signature". Additional ions, if present, are plotted in the order that
they are listed, below the standard ions.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, Hydrochemistry data (page 88)
Menu command: Hydrochemistry / Stiff.
Output window: RockPlot2D.
Notes:
You may choose up to 4 additional cations and up to 4 additional anions for display in
the Stiff polygons.
Use the Vertical Point Spacing and Polygons Per Page settings to control lengths of
polygons. Use the Horizontal Scaling setting to determine widths of polygons; if you
choose Automatic and there are multiple pages, be warned that each page may
represent a different horizontal scale.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create Hydrology/Hydrochemisty Diagrams / Create a
Stiff diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Hydrochemistry Tools /

Creating Stiff Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

208
RockWorks2004 Directional & Geotechnical Tools

Chapter 14 - Directional Statistics Tools

The Geological Utilities Linears and Planes menus contains tools used for performing
analyses on and creating diagrams of directional (2D or 3D) data. The Geotechnical
menu offers a movement analysis computer.
These tools were previously lumped under the “Dirstat” menu.

Creating Arrow Maps

The Geological Utilities Linears / Arrow Map tool is used to create a map in which
lineations are represented with arrows plotted from the beginning X,Y coordinates to the
ending coordinate pair.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, X1Y1X2Y2 data (page 91).
Menu command: Linears / Arrow Map.
Output window: RockPlot2D.
Notes: See Digitizing data for information about digitizing line endpoint data directly into
the data sheet. See Creating Lineation Maps (below) for maps without arrowheads..

209
Directional & Geotechnical Tools RockWorks2004

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Linear Feature Tools /

Creating Arrow Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

Gridding and Mapping Lineation Frequencies, Lengths, and

Intersections

The Geological Utilities Linears / Lineation Gridding menu command is designed to

read lineation data (in X1, Y1, X2, Y2 endpoint coordinate format), and create a grid file
that models the lineation frequency, cumulative lengths, and/or intersections, with a
variety of weighting options.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, X1Y1X2Y2 data (page 91).
Menu command: Linears / Lineation Gridding.
Output windows: RockPlot2D or RockPlot3D.
Notes: See Digitizing Data for information about digitizing line endpoint coordinates
directly into the data sheet. See Creating Lineation Maps (in this chapter) for mapping the
lineations themselves.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create Lineation Maps and Rose Diagrams / Compute
lineation densities and display them as a color-filled contour map.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Linear Feature Tools /

Gridding and Mapping Lineation Frequencies, Lengths, and Intersections. See page
22 for more Help information.

210
RockWorks2004 Directional & Geotechnical Tools

Creating Lineation Maps

The Geological Utilities Lineation Map utility (Linears menu) is used to create a map of
lineations from line endpoint data.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, X1Y1X2Y2 data (page 91).
Menu command: Linears / Lineation Map.
Output window: RockPlot2D.
Notes: See Digitizing Data for information about digitizing line endpoint coordinates
directly into the data sheet. See Creating Arrow Maps (earlier topic) for information about
creating maps in which the lineations contain arrowheads.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create lineation maps and rose diagrams / Display
lineations in a 2D map.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Linear Feature Tools /

Creating Lineation Maps. See page 22 for more Help information.

Computing Lineation Bearing, Length, and Midpoint

The Geological Utilities Linears / Lineation Properties command is used to compute the
bearing, length, and/or midpoint of lineations listed in the main datasheet as X1 Y1 X2 Y2
line endpoint coordinates.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, X1Y1X2Y2 data (page 91).
Menu command: Linears / Lineation Properties.
Output window: Separate columns in the Geological Utilities datasheet.
Notes: See Digitizing Data for information about digitizing endpoint data directly into the
datasheet.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Linear Feature Tools /

Computing Lineation Length, Bearing, and Midpoint. See page 22 for more Help
211
Directional & Geotechnical Tools RockWorks2004

information.

Creating Rose Diagrams

The Geological Utilities Linears / Rose Diagram utility reads either bearing or line
endpoint data and generates a directional diagram that depicts the orientations of the linear
features. Full or half-rose diagrams are available. Line endpoint data can be interpreted
as directional (1-direction) or oriented (2-directions).
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, bearing data (page 89) or X1Y1X2Y2 line
endpoint data (page 91).
Menu command: Linears / Rose Diagram.
Output window: RockPlot2D.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create lineation maps and rose diagrams / Display
lineation directions in a rose diagram.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Linear Feature Tools /

Creating Rose Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

Importing DXF Lineations into the Datasheet

The Geological Utilities Linears / Import / DXF Lineations utility is used to import
lineation endpoint data from a DXF file, storing the endpoint coordinates in the main
RockWorks data sheet.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool reads external DXF files.
Menu command: Linears / Import / DXF Lineations.
Output window: Geological Utilities datasheet.
Notes: "LINE" and "POLYLINE" entities only are read from the DXF file.
"POLYLINE" entities will be broken down into their individual segments. See also
212
RockWorks2004 Directional & Geotechnical Tools

Importing Files into RockPlot2D (page 241) for information about importing DXF images
into the plotting window.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Linear Feature Tools /

Importing DXF Lineations into the RockWorks Datasheet. See page 22 for more
Help information.

Computing the Orientation of a Single Plane Based on Three

Points

The Geological Utilities Planes / 3-Points -> Planes / One Set tool is used to compute
strike and dip based on three points and plot a surface as a contour map. The X,Y,Z points
are typed into the program window (they are not read from the datasheet).
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. Data is typed into the program window rather than the
datasheet.
Menu command: Planes / 3-Points -> Planes/ One Set.
Output window: RockPlot2D.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Planar Feature Tools /

Computing the Orientation of a Single Plane based on Three Points. See page 22 for
more Help information.

Computing Plane Orientations Based on Three Points

Given a list of xyz coordinates for three points along a series of planes, the Planes / 3-
Point -> Planes / Multiple Sets program computes the dip direction (or strike) and dip
angle for planes that pass through these points. The output is stored within two new
datasheet columns.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities, multiple sets of X1Y1Z1 X2Y2Z2 X3Y3Z3 data points.
Menu command: Planes / 3-Points -> Planes/ Multiple Sets.
Output window: Columns within the Geological Utilities datasheet.
213
Directional & Geotechnical Tools RockWorks2004

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Planar Feature Tools /

Computing Plane Orientations bassed on Three Points. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Computing Planar Intersections

The Geological Utilities Planes / Beta Intersections command reads a listing of planar
orientations from the RockWorks data sheet and calculate the lineations resulting from the
intersections of all of the planes in the file. The linear values will be stored in an ASCII
text file that can be displayed in the RockWorks text editor when completed.
The number of intersections that will be computed is:
number = n ( n - 1 ) / 2 where n is the number of individual planes in the input file.
As the number of original planes increases, the number of resulting lineations increases
dramatically. For example, a data set with 20 planes will result in 190 lineations, and 200
planes will produce 19,900 lineations!
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, strike and dip data (page 89).
Menu command: Planes / Beta Intersections.
Output window: ASCII text file.
Notes: A comparison: Beta Intersections reads a listing of individual planar strike and dip
measurements from the data sheet and calculates the lineations that result from the
intersection of each plane with each other plane in the data set. This can result in a
tremendous number of computed lineations! Beta Pairs, on the other hand, reads strike
and dip measurements for pairs of planes, and for each pair computes the single resulting
lineation..

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Planar Feature Tools /

Computing the Intersections of Planes. See page 22 for more Help information.

Computing Planar Intersections - Planar Pairs

The Geological Utilities Planes / Beta Pairs tool is used to read the strike and dip of pairs
of planes and calculate the lineations resulting from their intersections. The bearing and
plunge of these lineations are stored in new columns in the datasheet.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, beta pairs data (page 92).
Menu command: Planes / Beta Pairs.
Output window: Geological Utilities datasheet.
214
RockWorks2004 Directional & Geotechnical Tools

Notes: A comparison: Beta Intersections (previous) reads a listing of individual planar

strike and dip measurements from the data sheet and calculates the lineations that result
from the intersection of each plane with each other plane in the data set. This can result in
a tremendous number of computed lineations! Beta Pairs, on the other hand, reads strike
and dip measurements for pairs of planes, and for each pair computes the single resulting
lineation.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Planar Features Tools /

Computing the Intersections between Pairs of Planes. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Rotating 3D Data
Use the Geological Utilities Planes / Rotate Planes command to rotate 3D features
(planes or 3D lineations) by a specified amount, and to list the resulting strike and dip (or
dip direction, dip angle) values in two new columns of your data sheet. The input data can
be entered using the right-hand rule or as dip direction, dip angle.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, strike and dip data (page 89).
Menu command: Planes / Rotate Planes.
Output window: Geological Utilities datasheet.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Planar Feature Tools / Rotating
Planes about a Line. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating Stereonet Diagrams

The Geological Utilities Planes / Stereonet utility reads planar, linear, or rake data from
the data sheet, and displays the orientation of these features on a stereonet diagram using
points and great circles. Optional gridding is available to display point density with line
or color-filled contours.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool reads strike and dip data (page 89)
representing planar features, linear features, or rake data.
Menu command: Planes / Stereonet.

215
Directional & Geotechnical Tools RockWorks2004

Output window: RockPlot2D.

Notes: Data can be listed as right-hand rule or dip direction. Equal area and Equal angle
projections are available. Gridding can be using the Step Function or Spherical Gaussian
methods. See the help messages for details about the stereonet statistics and more.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create a Strike & Dip Map and Stereonet Diagram /
Create a stereonet diagram of planar data.
Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Planar Feature Tools / Creating
Stereonets. See page 22 for more Help information.

Converting Strike Bearing to Dip Direction

The Geological Utilities Planes / Strike -> Dip Direction command is used to translate
azimuth bearings representing strike to dip direction. This permits you to change the
format of your data from "right hand rule" to "dip direction."
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, strike and dip data (page 89) recorded using the
right hand rule.
Menu command: Planes / Strike -> Dip Direction.
Output window: Geological Utilities datasheet.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Planar Feature Tools /

Converting Strikes to Dip Direction.

Creating Strike and Dip Maps

The Geological Utilities Planes / Strike & Dip Map utility is used to plot a strike and dip
map based on X and Y coordinates, strike, dip, and color data from the data sheet.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool reads strike and dip data (page 89).
Menu command: Planes / Strike & Dip Map.
Output window: RockPlot2D.
216
RockWorks2004 Directional & Geotechnical Tools

Notes: See also directional maps of slope/aspect grid models (page 183).
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Create a Strike & Dip Map and Stereonet Diagram /
Create a strike and dip map of planar data.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Planar Feature Tools / Creating
a Strike and Dip Map. See page 22 for more Help information.

Converting Polylines to Planes

The Planes / Import / Polylines -> Planes program reads xyz polyline coordinates from
an ASCII file and computes the orientations of planes that pass through the polyline
vertices. It is designed for applications in which the user has xyz coordinates that
represent the intersections between fractures or contacts and surface topography. By
computing the orientations of planes that pass through these points, it is possible to
analyze and/or visualize the relative positions and orientations of these structures.
Datasheet: External ASCII file.
Menu command: Planes / Import / Polylines -> Planes.
Output window: Geological Utilities datasheet.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Planar Feature Tools /

Converting Polylines to Planes. See page 22 for more Help information.

Analysis of Movement of Slope Materials

The Geological Utilities Geotechnical / Movement Analysis utility is used to determine
the direction, inclination, distance, and velocity for X, Y, Z and time data.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet, movement data (page 92).
Menu command: Geotechnical / Movement Analysis.
Output window: Geological Utilities datasheet.
Notes: Be sure that elevations, if used, are in the same units as the X and Y coordinates.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Geotechnical Tools /

Analyzing Movement of Slope Materials. See page 22 for more Help information.

217
Directional & Geotechnical Tools RockWorks2004

Translating Coordinates

Converting Azimuth <-> Quadrant

The Geological Utilities Coords menu contains two tools for translating decimal-style
azimuth bearings (i.e. 135) into quadrant-style bearings (i.e. S45E), and vice versa.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet (strike and dip data, page 89)
Menu command: Coords / Azimuth -> Quadrant and Quadrant -> Azimuth
Output window: Geological Utilities datasheet.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Coordinate Conversion Tools /

Converting Azimuth Data to Quadrant Format, Converting Quadrant Data to Azimuth
Format. See page 22 for more Help information

218
RockWorks2004 Statistical Tools

Chapter 15 - Statistical Tools

Statistical Tools - Overview

The Geological Utilities Stats menu includes program for computing univariate, bivariate,
and trivariate statistics as well as for creating a variety of statistical diagrams.

Computing Univariate Statistics

The Geological Utilities Stats / Univariate tool is used to calculate statistics for a single
column of samples in the current datasheet. Data may be filtered out when an appropriate
filter range is selected.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool reads a single column of numeric
values.
Menu command: Stats / Univariate.
Output window: Text window report.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Statistical Tools / Creating a

Statistical Report for a Column of Values. See page 22 for more Help information.

219
Statistical Tools RockWorks2004

Creating Histogram Plots

The Geological Utilities Stats / Histogram tool is used to read a single column of data
from the datasheet and determine the frequency or percentage of the total number of
measurements for that variable that falls in each user-defined grouping or "cell." These
values are represented as a bar histogram plot.

It also contains a tool for creating multiple histogram plots of separate data columns and
combining them into a single image.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool reads a single column of numeric
values.
Menu command: Stats / Histogram / Single or Multiple.
Output window: RockPlot2D.
Notes: The Multiple Histogram tool is a handy way to see quickly the distribution of
numerous variables.
Geological Utilities Tutorial: Analyze Component Data / Create a histogram plot of a
single variable.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Statistical Tools / Creating a

Frequency Histogram for a Column of Values, Creating Multiple Frequency
Histograms for Two or More Columns of Values. See page 22 for more Help
information.
220
RockWorks2004 Statistical Tools

Creating a Scattergram (X, Y) Plot for Two Variables

The Geological Utilities Stats / Scattergram tool is used to plot the data listed within a
designated column in the datasheet against the data within another column.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool reads two columns of numeric values.
Menu command: Stats / Scattergram.
Output window: RockPlot2D.
Notes: Linear Regression and Polynomial Fit are available for interpolation.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Statistical Tools / Creating a

Scattergram (X,Y) Plot for two Variables. See page 22 for more Help information.

Creating a Ternary Diagram for Three Variables

The Geological Utilities Stats / Ternary tool is used to generate a trilinear diagram based
on three columns of data. Optional contouring is available to show point density.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool reads three columns of numeric
values.
Menu command: Stats / Ternary.
Output window: RockPlot2D.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Statistical Tools / Creating

Ternary (Tri-lateral) Diagrams. See page 22 for more Help information.

221
Statistical Tools RockWorks2004

Normalizing Data
The Stats / Normalize utility is used to read a single column of values from a RockWorks
data sheet and normalize the data values so that they range between two user-specified
values. The resulting data are listed in a new data sheet column.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet containing a single column of numeric values.
Menu command: Stats / Normalize.
Output window: The Geological Utilities datasheet.
Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Statistical Tools / Normalizing
Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Standardizing Data
The Geological Utilities Stats / Standardize utility is used to read a single column of
values from a RockWorks data sheet and to calculate the mean and the deviation of each
sample value relative to the mean. The resulting data are stored in a new column in the
data sheet. Once computed, display the standardized values as a contour map to show
anomalous areas
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet containing a single column of numeric values.
Menu command: Stats / Standardize.
Output window: The Geological Utilities datasheet.
Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Statistical Tools /
Standardizing Data.

Generating Random Numbers

The Geological Utilities Stats / Random utility is used to generate random numbers
within a specified range or from a normal distribution. This utility can generate both
positive and negative numbers with or without decimal values.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool generates a single column of numeric
values.
Menu command: Stats / Random / Completely Random or Normal Distribution.
Output window: The Geological Utilities datasheet.
Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Statistical Tools / Generating
Random Numbers. See page 22 for more Help information.

222
RockWorks2004 Survey Tools

Chapter 16 - Survey Tools

Survey Menu - Overview
The Survey option in the Map menu contains a variety of tools designed to translate
different kinds of survey data:

Converting Bearing / Distance Data and Creating Maps

The Geological Utilities Survey / Bearing/Distance tools are used to convert survey data
to XYZ coordinates for display in a new datasheet, and/or to create a plottable map in 2D
or 3D that illustrates the survey stations and/or transect lines with a variety of labeling
options. The survey data must list one or more control points, and bearing, distance, and
inclination to the survey stations.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool reads survey (bearing/distance) data
(page 76).
Menu commands: Survey / Bearing/Distance.
Output windows: The XYZ coordinates will be stored in the Geological Utilities
datasheet, and the survey map will be displayed in RockPlot2D or RockPlot3D.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Survey Tools / Converting

Survey Data to XYZ, Plotting 2D Survey Maps, Plotting 3D Survey Maps. See page
22 for more Help information.

Converting Triangulation Data to XYZ

The Geological Utilities Survey / Triangulation tool is used to convert triangulation
survey data to XYZ coordinates for display in the current datasheet. This program
requires that two or more stations have known X,Y, Z (elevation) coordinates from which
other coordinates can be computed.

223
Survey Tools RockWorks2004

Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool reads survey (triangulation) data
(page 77).
Menu command: Survey / Triangulation.
Output window: The XYZ coordinates will be stored in the Geological Utilities datasheet.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Survey Tools / Converting

Triangulation Data to XYZ Coordinates. See page 22 for more Help information.

Setting Up X,Y Stations

The Geological Utilities Survey / Setup XY Stations tool is used to create a new set of
X,Y coordinates based on a single user-entered coordinate, a known grid-based station
arrangement, and a user-entered spacing.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool generates XY coordinates.
Menu command: Survey / Setup XY Stations.
Output windows: The XY coordinates will be displayed in the Geological Utilities
datasheet.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Survey Tools / Setting Up X,Y
Stations. See page 22 for more Help information.

Interpolating Points Along a Line

224
RockWorks2004 Survey Tools

The Survey / Interpolate Points Along a Line tool is used to create a new set of X,Y
coordinates based on beginning and ending coordinates of a line, and the point spacing
along that line.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool generates XY coordinates.
Menu command: Survey / Interpolate Points Along a Line.
Output window: The XY coordinates will be displayec in the Geological Utilities
datasheet.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Survey Tools / Interpolating

Points Along a Line. See page 22 for more Help information.

Computing Downhole Survey Coordinates

The Survey / Drill Hole Survey tool is used to read depths, bearings, and inclinations
from a downhole survey table, and compute XYZ coordinates at user-specified intervals
down the borehole. It also offers a 2D and 3D diagram view of the deviated borehole.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities datasheet. This tool generates XY coordinates.
Menu command: Survey / Drill Hole Survey.
Output windows: The XYZ coordinates can be saved in the Geological Utilities datasheet;
2D images are displayed in RockPlot2D; 3D images are displayed in RockPlot3D.

Help / Contents / Working in the Geological Utilities / Survey Tools / Computing

Downhole Survey Coordinates. See page 22 for more Help information.

225
Survey Tools RockWorks2004

Notes

226
RockWorks2004 OpenGL 3D Tools

Chapter 17 –Accessory Image Tools

3D Images

The RockPlot3D plotting window, part of RockWorks, is used for display of surfaces,
solids, fences, and other 3-dimensional images created in many Borehole Manager and
Geological Utilities tools discussed in earlier chapters.
The Grafix menu (available from both the Borehole Manager and the Geological Utilities)
contains additional tools for creating general-purpose 3D images which can be appended
to other 3D images right within RockPlot3D (File / Append).

3D Discs

The Discs program plots 3D discs based on xyz coordinates, dip-direction, and dip
amount. It is designed to display the relative orientations of planes in three-dimensions.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads a 3D “Discs” file (page 93).
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Discs.
Output window: RockPlot3D.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Plotting Oriented Data as 3D Discs.

See page 22 for more Help information.

227
OpenGL 3D Tools RockWorks2004

3D Bitmaps
Use the Grafix / 3D Utilities / Images tools to apply 3-dimensional characteristics to
bitmap (BMP or JPG) images. This includes floating a bitmap horizontally at a specified
elevation, draping an image over a surface, or displaying images as horizontal or vertical
panels.

Float a bitmap at a particular elevation

This tool reads an existing bitmap image and, given input user coordinates and an
elevation, generates a flat, floating 3D image of the bitmap.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities or Borehole Manager. This tool reads an existing bitmap
image (JPG or BMP).
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Images / Float.
Output window: RockPlot3D.
Notes: Be sure the X and Y coordinates you assign to the bitmap corners are in the same
units as those in the project with which you’ll be combining this image. Once the image is
created, use RockPlot3D’s File / Save As to save the floating bitmap view, then use File /
Append to append an existing RockPlot3D view to this image.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Creating a “Floating” Bitmap. See

page 22 for more Help information.

Drape a bitmap over a surface

This tool reads an existing bitmap image and, given an existing grid model, generates a 3D
image of the bitmap that confirms with the grid surface.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities or Borehole Manager. This tool reads an existing bitmap
image (JPG or BMP) and an existing RockWorks grid model (.GRD) over which it will be
draped.
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Images / Drape.
Output window: RockPlot3D.

228
RockWorks2004 OpenGL 3D Tools

Notes: Use RockPlot3D’s File / Save As to save the draped bitmap view, then use File /
Append to append an existing RockPlot3D view to this image.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Draping Bitmaps over Grid Models.
See page 22 for more Help information.

Display bitmap images as vertical panels

This tool read a list of bitmap images and their coordinates, and displays them as vertical
image panels.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads a Vertical Panel Image List (page 96).
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Images / Panels / Vertical.
Output window: RockPlot3D.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Displaying Bitmap Images as

Vertical Panels. See page 22 for more Help information.

Display bitmap images as horizontal panels

This tool read a list of bitmap images and their coordinates, and displays them as
horizontal or inclined image panels.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads a Horizontal Panel Image List (page 95).
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Images / Panels / Horizontal.
Output window: RockPlot3D.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Displaying Bitmap Images as

Horizontal Panels. See page 22 for more Help information.

Display Bitmaps on a 3-Dimensional Cube

This program reads a list of images from the Geological Utilities datasheet and display
them on a 3 dimensional cube for display in RockPlot3D. These can be used to create
displays of building in 3D.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads Cube Image Lists (page 94).
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Images / Cubes.
Output window: RockPlot3D.

229
OpenGL 3D Tools RockWorks2004

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Plotting Images on 3D Cubes. See

page 22 for more Help information.

3D Oriented Objects

The Oriented Objects tool reads location, bearing, and inclination data from the datasheet
and draws 3-dimensional cones at those locations for display in RockPlot3D. Use this to
display fossils, archeological items or other oriented items in 3D space.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads an “Oriented Objects” file (page 97).
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Oriented Objects.
Output window: RockPlot3D.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Plotting Oriented Objects in 3

Dimensions. See page 22 for more Help information.

3D Perimeter

The Grafix / Perimeter option reads X and Y coordinate listings from the datasheet and
plots fence-like perimeter edges for subsequent inclusion within other three-dimensional
diagrams. During building of the perimeter “fence” you can specify its base and top
elevation.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads a simple list of X and Y coordinates. To
close the polygon you must repeat the beginning X,Y coordinates at the end of the list.
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Perimeter.
Output window: RockPlot3D.
230
RockWorks2004 OpenGL 3D Tools

Notes: Use RockPlot3D’s File / Save As to save the image, then use File / Append to
append an existing RockPlot3D view to this image.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Creating a 3-Dimensional Perimeter.

See page 22 for more Help information.

3D Spheres

The Grafix / Spheres option reads XYZ locations and radius declarations from the
datasheet and draws 3D spheres (or oblates) at these locations for display in RockPlot3D.
Use this to illustrate magnitudes in 3D space.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads a “3D Spheres” file (page 97).
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Spheres.
Output window: RockPlot3D.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Plotting Spheres in 3 Dimensions.

See page 22 for more Help information.

3D Storage Tanks

The Storage Tanks tools reads location, elevation, radius and color data from the
datasheet and draws 3-dimensional cylindrical tanks at those locations for display in
RockPlot3D. Use this to display underground or surface tanks with your 3d images. The
tanks can be oriented vertically or horizontally.
Notes: Use RockPlot3D’s File / Save As to save the tank image, then use File / Append
to append an existing RockPlot3D view to this image.

231
OpenGL 3D Tools RockWorks2004

Create a horizontal tank image

Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads a “Horizontal Tanks” file (page 98).
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Storage Tanks / Horizontal.
Output window: RockPlot3D.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Plotting Horizontal Storage Tanks.

See page 22 for more Help information.

Create a vertical tank image

Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads a “Vertical Tanks” file (page 99).
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Storage Tanks / Vertical.
Output window: RockPlot3D.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Plotting Vertical Storage Tanks. See
page 22 for more Help information.

3D Triangles

The Triangles program is used to plot a series of colored triangles in 3D space. The input
consists of a datasheet that lists the coordinates for each triangle vertex.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads a “3D Triangles” file (page 100).
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Triangles.
Output window: RockPlot3D.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Plotting Colored Triangles in 3D

Space. See page 22 for more Help information.

232
RockWorks2004 OpenGL 3D Tools

3D Tubes

The Grafix / Tubes option reads X1Y1Z1 X2Y2Z2 locations from the datasheet and
draws 3D tubes between these locations for display in RockPlot3D. Use this to display
pipes, mine workings, structural diagrams in 3D space.
Datasheet: Geological Utilities. This tool reads a “3D Tubes” file (page 100).
Menu command: Grafix / 3D Utilities / Tubes.
Output window: RockPlot3D.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / 3D Utilities / Plotting 3D Tubes. See page 22 for
more Help information.

Other Tools
The Grafix menu’s 3D Utilities also offers a stand-alone reference cage tool that’s the
same as the cage options listed within many of the program menus. (See 3D Diagram
settings, page 335.)
It also contains a stand-alone append-XML tool that functions just like the Append tool in
RockPlot3D. (See page 260.)

2D Utilities
The Grafix menu’s 2D Utilities tools are stand-alone duplicates of those that exist within
RockPlot2D:
Montage: Combines multiple 2D images into a montage. (See page 255.)
RockPlot2D -> RockPlot3D: Floats or drapes a RKW image in RockPlot3D.
RockPlot2D -> WMF: Exports a RKW image to a WMF format. (See page 257.)
RockPlot2D -> EMF: Exports a RKW image to an EMF format. (See page 257.)

233
OpenGL 3D Tools RockWorks2004

Other Tools

Displaying a RockWorks PicShow

The Grafix / Images / PicShow option is used to read a list of names of bitmap images
(BMP or JPG format) from the Geological Utilities data sheet, and display them in order,
with an adjustable delay between frames. The PicShow can run once or be continually
looped to repeat the display list.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / Misc Image Tools / Creating a Slide Show. See
page 22 for more Help information.

Translate BMP and JPG Images

The Grafix / Images / BMP -> JPG and JPG -> BMP tools are used to read an existing
BMP or JPG image and translate it to the other format.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / Misc Image Tools / Conveting BMP Images to a
JPEG Format and Converting JPEG Images to a BMP Format. See page 22 for more
Help information.

Raster Conversion
The Grafix / Images / Raster Conversion tool is used to read bitmap images and resize
and/or sharpen them. This would typically be done prior to displaying the images in
RockPlot2D. This procedure supports BMP, JPEG, TIFF (not LZW), WMF, EMF, PNG,
GIF, TGA, and PCX formats.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / Misc Image Tools / Converting Raster Images.
See page 22 for more Help information.

Raster to RKW
The Grafix / Images / Raster -> RKW tool can be used to add aerial photos to your maps
or raster well logs or core pictures to your strip logs, cross sections and fence diagrams.
This procedure supports BMP, JPEG, TIFF (not LZW), WMF, EMF, PNG, GIF, TGA,
and PCX formats. For very large images you may want to resize them to save disk space
and for better viewing quality using the new Raster Conversion utility, above.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / Misc Image Tools / Plotting Raster Images in
RockPlot2D. See page 22 for more Help information.

234
RockWorks2004 OpenGL 3D Tools

Rotate Bitmap
The Grafix / Images / Rotate Bitmaps tool reads bitmap images and allows you to enter
a rotation angle (0 to 360%). This procedure supports BMP, JPEG, TIFF (not LZW),
WMF, EMF, PNG, GIF, TGA, and PCX formats. For very large images you may want to
resize them to save disk space and for better viewing quality using the new Raster
Conversion utility, above. Use the File / Open command to open the bitmap image, and
File / Save if you wish to resave the rotated version.

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / Misc Image Tools / Rotating Bitmap Images. See
page 22 for more Help information.

Digitize from Bitmap

The Grafix / Images / Digitize From Bitmap program is used to import a bitmap (JPEG
or BMP), calibrate it to global coordinates, and digitize points, lines, polylines, and
polygons. As the items are selected, the global coordinates are stored within an editable
data window along the right side of the screen. This data may then be copied into other
applications.
See also: Digitizing data with an electronic digitizing tablet (page 109).

Help / Contents / Graphics Tools / Misc Image Tools / Digitizing Data from Bitmaps.
See page 22 for more Help information.

235
OpenGL 3D Tools RockWorks2004

Notes

236
RockWorks2004 Misc. Utilities

Chapter 18 - Miscellaneous Utilities

The RockWorks Geological Utilities Util menu contains a variety of miscellaneous
geology, financial, graphic, and reference tools.

For more information about each of these utilities, please see Help / Contents /
Working in the Geological Utilities / Miscellaneous Utilities. See page 22 for more
Help information.

Color Numbers
The Geological Utilities Util / Colors tools are used to generate integer color numbers for
use within RockWorks.
Color Numbers: Displays the color numbers for any color you select from a palette.
RGB -> Windows: Displays the integer color numbe for a known RGB color you enter.

Financial Utilities
The Geological Utilities Util / Financial Utilities tools are used to calculate cost and
profit breakdown, lease analysis, and amortization on loans by changing various factors
within the utility equations.
The Break-even Analysis program is used to determine when a project has paid for
itself. The program may also be used to estimate profits and losses.
The Lease Analysis program calculates square footage rates, monthly rent, and
annual rent based on any combination of the other variables.
The Loan Analysis (amortization) program is used to determine various loan-related
items such as when a loan will be paid off, the total amount paid at the end of the loan
period, and so on.

Geometry Calculator
The Geological Utilities Util / Geometry Calculator tool is used to perform geometric
calculations such as surface areas, volumes, and side lengths of various geometric shapes
and solids.

Geological Time Chart

The Geological Utilities Util / Geological Time Chart tool is an interactive program
designed to show the duration, ages, and major events of various geological time periods.

237
Misc. Utilities RockWorks2004

Igneous Rock Identification

The Geological Utilities Util / Igneous command is an interactive program used to
identify igneous rocks by displaying a series of questions about the rock characteristics,
and offering a classification based on your responses.

Periodic Table
The Util / Periodic Table tool is used to retrieve information about various elements by
pointing at the elemental symbol on the table and pressing the mouse button.

Trigonometry Calculator
The Geological Utilities Util / Trigonometry Calculator tool is used to perform various
trigonometric calculations, such as apparent dip or true dip, drilled thickness, strike and
dip from 3 points, and more.

Unit Converter
The Util / Unit Converter tool is used to convert measurement units (length, area,
pressure, velocity, etc.) By entering a single value in a particular measurement system,
you can create a table displaying an equal measurement in other units.
The program reads the conversion data from a text file named "unitconv.tab." This file
lists in blocks the different measurement types, and within each block the unit values for 1
"standard" unit.

Describe Rock
This program is designed to help users who are describing rocks by presenting a checklist
of things to look for. As items are selected from this checklist, a description is constructed
and saved, dynamically, within the Windows clipboard. At any stage, this description
may be pasted into other applications (e.g. Microsoft Word). The "pick list" may (and
should) be edited by selecting the "Edit Pick List" option at the base of the menu.

Compile RCL File

Use this tool to read a listing of program commands from a user-created “RCL”
(RockWare Command Language) file and to perform the listed operations. This is a
means of running RockWorks in “batch” mode to simplify repetitive tasks. The RCL file
can also be launched via a command line, eliminating the need to view the menus at all.
See the Help messages for more complete information.

238
RockWorks2004 RockPlot2D

Chapter 19 – Displaying 2D Images - RockPlot2D

RockPlot2D Overview

RockPlot2D is one of the plotting engines for RockWorks. It is used to display 2-

dimensional maps and diagrams as they are being created, and for opening saved images
at a later date. RockPlot2D contains its own set of menu and toolbar commands, which
are discussed in this section.
See also: RockPlot3D (page 259) for information about manipulating images in the
RockWorks 3D plotting window, and ReportWorks (page 277) for information about the
new page layout tool in RockWorks.

Managing RockPlot2D Files

This section discusses the process of opening and saving "RKW" files that are displayed
in the RockPlot2D window.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Managing RockPlot2D Files. See page 22 for more
Help information.

Creating a New RockPlot2D Window

A new RockPlot2D window is created automatically any time that a 2-dimensional map or
diagram is created within RockWorks. Multiple RockPlot2D windows may remain open
at any time.
239
RockPlot2D RockWorks2004

If you are working in RockWorks and wish to open an existing map or diagram that has
already been saved in a binary RKW format, you'll need to access a RockPlot2D window
first.
If a RockPlot2D window is already open, simply click in that RockPlot2D window to
make it active and follow the instructions about Opening Plot Files (below).
To locate an existing plot window that may be hidden behind the main RockWorks
data screen, you can either move the data window out of the way (by grabbing its title
bar) or click on its Windows menu to see a listing of available plot windows. From
there you can click on the name of the plot window you wish to access. You’ll also
see a list of RockPlot2D windows in the Windows Taskbar.
If there is no RockPlot2D window open, You can launch RockPlot2D by selecting the
RockPlot2D command from the RockWorks File menu

Opening a RockPlot2D Plot File

Use RockPlot2D's Open-file toolbar button or File menu / Open command to open an
existing 2-dimensional RockWorks graphic file, such as a map, cross section, or rose
diagram, that has been saved in a binary RKW format. This can be an RKW plot file
created by RockWorks2004, RockWorks2002, or "recent" versions of RockWorks99.
! If there is no RockPlot2D window yet displayed on the screen, you will need to create a
new RockPlot2D window first (previous topic).
! If you are opening an RKW file that was created with an older version of RockPlot
(older RockWorks99 [pre-7/21/99] and RockWorks98, or Stratos98 and RockWare
Utilities), the program will need to convert these older graphic formats to the newer
graphic format. The versions of RockWorks released after July, 1999 store data, process
data, and store graphics using an 8-byte, double-precision real number structure. This
means that large numbers with high precision (such as longitude/latitude coordinates) are
more accurate. You will be presented with a prompt notifying you of this conversion
process, with the option of canceling (see Step #4 below).
1. To open an existing RockWorks "RKW" graphic file, select the Open command from
the File menu.
The program will display a prompt window in which you may specify the name of the
file to open. RockPlot2D opens files that were stored in a binary "RKW" file format
only.
2. In the displayed dialog box, browse for and select the file you wish to open.
3. Click the OK button.
The program will load the plot file into the RockPlot2D window.

240
RockWorks2004 RockPlot2D

If the RKW file was created by an older version of RockWorks, you may be warned,
"Filename is a RockPlot 32-bit Single Precision file. Do you want to convert?"
4. Click Yes if it’s okay to convert the old graphic to the newer format, for display in a
new window. The new format cannot be opened in the older version of the program.
Click No if you do not wish to convert the graphic.

Saving RockPlot2D Files

When RockPlot2D is first "called" by RockWorks, it will display the map or diagram in a
new window. Graphic images will also be displayed in a new window if they have been
imported into RockPlot2D, have resulted from using the RockPlot2D Utilities menu tools,
etc.
1. If you wish to save the map or diagram on disk, select the File / Save As command.
The program will display a dialog box where you may specify the file name (and
other drive and directory path information) for the map or diagram.
2. Type in the name under which to store the plot file on disk, and click on the Save
button.
RockPlot2D always stores plot files in a binary "RKW" format. If you need to export the
image to a BMP, JPG, DXF, WMF, or EMF format, you can use the Export command.

Importing Files into RockPlot2D

RockPlot2D saves graphic images on disk in a binary "RKW" format.
There are also graphic importing/opening routines available so that other kinds of graphic
files can be displayed right within RockPlot2D, saved in a RKW format, combined with
existing RKW maps, etc. These imports include AGL import ("ASCII Graphics
Language" created by RockWare), DLG import (Digital Line Graph from the USGS),
DXF import (used in many CAD systems), E00 import (used in ArcInfo), and ESRI
Shapefiles.

See Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Importing Plot Files.

Importing AGL files
Importing DLG files
Importing DXF files
Importing ArcInfo E00 files
Importing ESRI Shapefiles
See page 22 for more Help information.

241
RockPlot2D RockWorks2004

DXF Import Limitations: The DXF Importer imports the following DXF entities: LINE,
POLYLINE, LWPOLYLINE, TEXT, and MTEXT, with the following limitations:
TEXT and MTEXT may not be placed or sized identically to the original. In
addition, there are cases where text may be cut off, if the text blocks extend beyond
other diagram entities upward or to the right.
The DXF Importer will not import BLOCK entities, HATCH patterns, line styles,
CIRCLE’s and more. If the program encounters an item in the DXF file that it does
not import, it will display a warning on the screen. At that time you may choose to
abort the import process or ignore unrecognized items.
DLG Import Limitations: DLG data is published by the U.S. Geological Survey and must
be acquired through them or their agents. DLG data is not provided with this program
other than in the form of a sample data file, called "dlg1.dlg."
The DLG import procedure can read USGS Digital Line Graph data extracted from
1:100,000 or 1:2,000,000-scale maps, Optional format. Boundary, transportation,
hydrography, hypsography (contour) and land grid categories are supported.
The SDTS format is not currently supported.
E00 Import Limitations: RockPlot imports "e00" polylines only.
The Shapefile importer reads points, lines, and polylines only.

Viewing RockPlot2D Files

RockPlot2D is the plotting engine for "flat" or 2-dimensional maps and diagrams within
RockWorks, and these maps and diagrams are plotted automatically into a RockPlot2D
window on the screen upon their completion.
Once the image is plotted on the screen, you may do any of the operations discussed in the
topics below.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Viewing Plot Files. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Resizing the RockPlot2D window

Follow these steps to resize a RockPlot2D window:

1. To fill the screen with the image window, click on the Windows Maximize button
in the upper-right corner of the window.
To make a maximized window smaller, click on the Windows Restore Down
button.

242
RockWorks2004 RockPlot2D

To adjust a window size by hand, position the cursor on a window boundary or

corner. When you see the cursor change shape to a double-sided arrow (<->), click
and hold the left mouse button, and drag the boundary to the desired location.
Once a window is resized, the image within it will not be redrawn until you select one of
the scaling buttons from the toolbar or menu commands; see below.

Changing the screen scaling of the image

When you have a diagram displayed in a RockPlot2D window, you may change the size
of the window (as discussed under Resizing Windows) as well as change how the diagram
is plotted within its window.
To adjust the display of an image in the plot window, select one of the scaling options:

Best Fit - The Best Fit command (View menu) or toolbar button will fill the
window as best it can with the current diagram while keeping the x (horizontal) and y
(vertical) axis scales equal. This is best for most maps, for single page diagrams
(rose, ternary, etc.), and for some RockWorks logs and cross-sections which are
rescaled as they are created for equal x and y axis scaling.

Stretch - The Stretch toolbar button or View menu command is used to fill the
current window with the diagram, regardless of the horizontal and vertical scaling
used. The represented vertical exaggeration will be displayed in the Exag item in the
toolbar.
! Note that if you prefer to have the vertical axis stretched or compressed by a specific
scale factor, use the Vertical Exaggeration option.
Example: Let's say you have opened a RockWorks strip log diagram. You can use your
mouse to resize the RockPlot2D window to be long vertically and narrow horizontally.
Then, choose the Stretch button to fill this window with the log.
See also: Printing RockPlot2D files (page 256) regarding print scaling.

Zooming in and out of the screen image

Follow these steps to enlarge/reduce the image display in the RockPlot2D window.
1. Use the Zoom In toolbar button or menu command to enlarge a portion of the map or
diagram plotted within RockPlot2D.

Select the Zoom In button or command.

Position the magnifying glass tool at one corner of the area to be enlarged. Depress
243
RockPlot2D RockWorks2004

the mouse button and drag the tool to the opposite corner.

Release the mouse button when you have reached the opposite corner of the area to be
enlarged. When you release the mouse button, the program will redraw the selected
area on the screen.

If the original image was plotted at equal x and y scales, its zoomed image also will
be.
2. Use the Zoom Out toolbar button or View menu command to restore the active
RockPlot2D window to its original scaling.

Simply click once on the Zoom Out tool to re-plot the active plot file at its
original scaling.
The original diagram scaling is restored even if you "zoomed in" several times. Equal vs.
non-equal x- and y-scaling will be preserved.

244
RockWorks2004 RockPlot2D

Using the Navigation Rose to shift the current view

RockPlot2D contains a new tool that you can use to shift your view of the current plot file
if it’s being viewed in a "zoomed in" state. This "navigation rose" sits in the RockPlot2D
toolbar (to the left of the image).

The inner set of arrows is used to shift the diagram by one-half of the current window size
in the indicated direction.
For example, let's say you have "zoomed into" a map as shown below.

Clicking the inside left arrow would pan to the left one-half screen, resulting in this
view:

The outer set of arrows is used to shift the diagram by the full window size in the
indicated direction.

245
RockPlot2D RockWorks2004

Adjusting the vertical exaggeration

RockPlot2D initially displays images on the screen at equal scales vertically and
horizontally. This can create problems if you are plotting logs or cross section that are
significantly longer (deeper) than wide, or significantly wider than deep.
You can use the Vertical Exaggeration button in the toolbar (and in the View menu) to
stretch or compress the vertical axis of the screen image by a specific factor. (By contrast,
the Stretch button will fill the screen with the image, often changing both the horizontal
and vertical axis scaling.)
1. Click on the Exag item in the left-hand toolbar, or choose the View / Vertical
Exaggeration command.
2. Type in the desired vertical exaggeration. To make the image taller, enter a value > 1.
To make the image flatter, enter a value < 1.
The program will redraw the current image at the indicated exaggeration. Subsequent use
of any of the other image resizing tools (zooming, panning with the navigation rose, etc.)
will maintain the selected exaggeration.
3. To restore the exaggeration to "1", click on the Exag item in the left-hand toolbar, or
choose the View / Vertical Exaggeration command, and type in: 1.

Returning to the main RockWorks data window

The RockPlot2D window is created automatically from RockWorks for display of 2-
dimensional (flat) maps and diagrams (2D logs, cross sections, ternary diagrams, rose
diagrams, etc.). RockWorks allows multiple RockPlot2D windows to remain open at the
same time.
Because of this, it’s quite easy to find your computer display full of windows. To access
the main RockWorks data window, either the Geological Utilities datasheet or the
Borehole Manager data tabs, follow these steps:

Click on the Return to Data Window button to move the plot window to the
background and display the data window.
Or, if the RockPlot2D window is small enough to see the RockWorks window in the
background, simply click on the RockWorks window. This will move the plot
window to the background, and move the data window to the top.

Accessing an already-open RockPlot2D window

RockWorks allows multiple RockPlot2D windows to be open simultaneously. As you
click back and forth between data and plot windows, it can become difficult to keep house
246
RockWorks2004 RockPlot2D

and locate buried images. To locate and bring to the front a specific plot window, follow
these steps:
1. Click on the Windows menu in any RockWorks or RockPlot2D window.
RockWorks will list there all currently-open RockPlot2D windows. Click on the
name of the RockPlot2D window you wish to access. Or,
2. Look for the RockPlot2D icon in the Windows taskbar (the file’s name will be
displayed if you point to the icon with your mouse) and click on it to bring it to the
front.
! RockPlot2D windows are created with the file name extension “.tmp.” Any window that
has not been saved as a RockPlot2D image ("RKW" file) will be displayed with the TMP
file name extension.

On-Screen Tools: Measuring and Digitizing

RockPlot2D contains eight tools used to record measurements and digitize coordinates
right on the screen itself. In addition, digitized points, lines, "polylines" and polygons
added to the screen can be appended to the underlying map or other graphic image.
Digitized coordinates or computed measurements are displayed in the "RockPlot2D data
window" that sits to the right of the graphic window. This information can be copied to
the clipboard for pasting into other applications.
RockPlot2D Tutorial / Measure Distances on the Map, Add Lines to the Map.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / On-Screen Tools: Measuring and Digitizing. See

page 22 for more Help information.

Measurement and Drawing Options

Use the Options command in the RockPlot2D Measure and Data menus to establish
settings for the measurement and digitizing tools.
1. If necessary, open the diagram to be measured/drawn on (see Opening Plot Files,
page 240) or click in the current RockPlot2D window containing the diagram.
2. Select the Options command from either the Measure or Data menu.
The program will display a set of tabs for the available items.
3. Click on the tab of the item whose settings you wish to view or modify. See Help for
details.
4. When you are ready to accept the changes you made and to return to the RockPlot2D
window, click the OK button. To discard any changes, click the Cancel button.

247
RockPlot2D RockWorks2004

The RockPlot2D Data Window

The RockPlot2D "Data Window" is displayed to the right of the RockPlot2D image
window. It is used to display computed measurements and coordinates which result from
the use of the Measure and Draw menu tools. Each plot window that is open will have its
own data window.

The RockPlot2D Data Window contains the following tools which can help you manage
your measurements or digitized coordinates. These tools are available as buttons above the
Data Window, or as commands in the Data menu.

Save: Saves the contents of the data window in a text file.

Clear: Clears all entries so that you can start a new data listing. You will NOT be
warned that data will be lost.

Copy all Data: Copies all data, including numbers and text labels, to the Windows
clipboard for pasting elsewhere. Below is an example of what's copied to the clipboard
for three points digitized using the Draw / Points command:
Point: 7,303.22 11,324.51
Point: 8,885.57 10,898.5
Point: 10,346.2 12,846
248
RockWorks2004 RockPlot2D

! Don't use Ctrl+C to copy the data displayed in the data window. That command is
reserved for copying the current plot - the picture itself - to the clipboard.

Copy Numeric Data: Copies numeric data only (computations and/or digitized
coordinates) to the Windows clipboard for pasting elsewhere.
Below is what's copied to the clipboard for the same three points as shown above:
7,303.22 11,324.51
8,885.57 10,898.5
10,346.2 12,846
! Don't use Ctrl+C to copy the data displayed in the data window. That command is
reserved for copying the current plot - the picture itself - to the clipboard.

New Graphic: Creates a new plot window containing the graphic representation of the
Draw items (points, lines, polylines, and/or polygons) listed in the data window. The line
style and color in which the lines are to be drawn should be established under Draw /
Options prior to creating the new graphic.
The new plot window can be saved as a RKW file (File / Save), appended to another
RKW file (Utilities / Append), and so on. Below is an example of digitized
correlation lines saved as a new graphic.

Append Current Graphic: Creates a new plot window containing the graphic
representation of the Draw items (points, lines, polylines, and/or polygons) which are
listed in the data window, overlaying the existing image in the current plot window. The
line style and color in which the lines are to be drawn should be established under Draw /
Options prior to creating the new graphic.
The new plot window can be saved as a RKW file (File / Save), appended to another
RKW file (Utilities / Append), and so on. Below is an example of these same
correlation lines appended to the existing graphic.

249
RockPlot2D RockWorks2004

! You need to use the data tools shown above to store the data in the clipboard or record
the data as graphic entities before closing the plot window, or you'll lose all of the data
items. The data items are not stored in the graphic RKW file.
! The Draw items are held in temporary memory only. If you redraw the image (using
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Best Fit, Stretch, or Vertical Exaggeration) the drawn items will
disappear from the graphic display. Since they are recorded, however, in the Data
Window, the Copy all Data, Copy Numeric Data, New Graphic, and Append Current
Graphic tools are still available.
! The Data Window is not designed for you to edit the coordinates or measurements there.
Thus, there is no Paste command for the Data Window. You may utilize either of two
copy-data buttons, described below, for copying the data to the Windows clipboard for
pasting elsewhere.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / On-Screen Tools:

Measuring the area within a polygon.
Measuring the bearing of a line.
Measuring the distance between two points.
Measuring the perimeter length of a polygon.
Drawing points.
Drawing lines.
Drawing polylines.
Drawing polygons.
Appending drawn items to the underlying graphic image.
Displaying the drawn items in their own plot window.
Copying the contents of the Data Window to the clipboard.
See page 22 for more Help information.
See also ReportWorks (page 277) for a interactive page layout and drawing window.

250
RockWorks2004 RockPlot2D

Locating the Closest Point

RockPlot2D has a nifty tool that allows you to search either the Borehole Manager or the
Geological Utilities datasheet for the data that lies closest to a location you select on a
map. There are two methods of retrieving this data:
1. Choose the View / Locate Closest Point menu option. In the displayed window, type
in the coordinates to be searched, specify the data window to be searched (Borehole
Manager or Geological Utilities) and, if the latter, confirm the data columns to be
searched for the X, Y coordinates.
2. With a map displayed in the RockPlot2D window, simply right-click on the locations
for which you wish to retrieve data. As above, confirm the coordinates to be searched
(they’ll be populated automatically based on your right-click selection), specify the
data window and columns if necessary.
The program will search for the requested information and display the data record closest
to the selected point.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Manipulating RockPlot2D Images / Locating the

Closest Point. See page 22 for more Help information.

Manipulating RockPlot2D Files

The commands in the RockPlot2D Utilities menu are used to manipulate plot files
displayed on the screen, with border annotations, legends, rescaling or combining files,
clipping images, and converting coordinates.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Manipulating RockPlot2D Images. See page 22 for

more Help information.

Adding Border Annotations to RockPlot2D Images

251
RockPlot2D RockWorks2004

The Annotate command in the RockPlot2D Utilities menu is used to add axis tick marks
and labels representing coordinate units to a two-dimensional map, such as a sample map
or contour map. In order to preserve the existing plot file, the annotated map will be
loaded into a new RockPlot2D window.
! RockWorks also permits you to include this annotation when the map or diagram is
being created.
If you wish to combine maps (via the Append command), you should combine the maps
first, then annotate them.
RockPlot2D Tutorial / Annotate the Map.

See Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Manipulating RockPlot2D Files / Adding Border

Annotations to RockPlot2D Images. See page 22 for more Help information.

Adding Legends to RockPlot2D Images

The Legend tool in the RockPlot2D Utilities menu is used to add a legend to a map or
diagram that is displayed on the screen, and to display the new map in a new RockPlot2D
window. The legend can include any combination of the following items: Bitmaps
(logos, etc.), titles, a north arrow, x-axis scale bar, y-axis scale bar, symbol index, pattern
index, color index, line style index, and seven lines of notes. The legend can be appended
to the right edge or the lower edge of the map or diagram.
See also: ReportWorks (page 277) for an interactive page layout tool.

See Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Manipulating RockPlot2D Files / Adding a

Legend to a 2D Map or Diagram. See page 22 for more Help information.

252
RockWorks2004 RockPlot2D

Combining 2D Plot Files

The Append command in the RockPlot2D Utilities menu is used to add the contents of a
RockPlot2D file (*.RKW) onto the end of a diagram displayed on the screen, thereby
combining the two. This is a handy way to combine, for example, project contours with a
reference base map.
In order to preserve the existing plot file, the combined image will be loaded into a new
RockPlot2D window.
Tips on Appending Files: One of the most important concepts in combining 2D plot files
is that the two maps or diagrams must occupy the same coordinates in space in order for
them to overlay correctly. Some examples:
* You can overlay a RockWorks point map of a data set with a contour map created of
the same data set since they have the same x and y coordinate range.
* You cannot overlay a map of Oklahoma onto a map of Maine since their real world
coordinates don't coincide.
* You cannot overlay a point map of Colorado cities that is in longitude and latitude
coordinates onto a contour map of Colorado that is in UTM coordinates - again, the
coordinates don't coincide.
You can use the coordinate display in the RockPlot2D toolbar to get an idea of the
coordinate range of any diagram. Just move the mouse pointer around the RockPlot2D
window and note the change in the coordinate listing.
You can use the RockPlot2D Utilities / Rescale command to rescale a map to a different
coordinate range. You can use the Utilities / Degrees to UTM or UTM to Degrees
commands to convert between decimal longitude / latitude and UTM coordinates.
See also: The Montage tool for information about rescaling and combining plots. The
ReportWorks program (page 277) for laying out pages with RKW images.
RockPlot2D Tutorial / Open, Zoom Into, and Combine Maps.
See Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Manipulating RockPlot2D Files / Combining 2D
Plot Files. See page 22 for more Help information.
253
RockPlot2D RockWorks2004

Rescaling 2D Plot files

The Rescale command in the RockPlot2D Utilities menu is used to change map or
diagram coordinates using one of two available schemes:
* Rescale by establishing a new X,Y origin coordinate and scaling the X and Y axes by
a constant value.
* Rescale by establishing new boundary coordinates for one or more axes.
Note that these rescaling schemes change the actual coordinates that are stored for the
lines, symbols, and such in a map or diagram. In order to preserve the existing plot file,
both utilities create a new plot window for display of the rescaled map or diagram.
If you do not need to change the coordinates of the plot file but simply want to change the
scale at which it is printed, this is done within RockPlot2D’s Print utility itself. See
Printing RockPlot2D Files (page 256) for more information. Or, if you want to change the
scale at which it is viewed on the screen, there are zoom-in and zoom-out tools for this –
see Viewing RockPlot2D Files (page 242).

See Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Manipulating RockPlot2D Files / Rescaling 2D

Plot Files. See page 22 for more Help information.
! If you need to know the coordinate range of any RockPlot2D image, select the Rescale /
By New Coordinates command from its Utilities menu. A dialog box will be displayed
with the current boundary coordinates for the plot. You can then select the Cancel button
to return to the RockPlot2D window.

Clipping RockPlot2D Files

The Clip command in the RockPlot2D Utilities menu is used to extract from an existing
map or diagram all of the contents that lie within a user-declared rectangular area. The
clipped image is displayed in a new RockPlot2D window.

This tool is also available using the Clip button in the left-hand toolbar.

254
RockWorks2004 RockPlot2D

This tool can be used, for example, to illustrate portions of a regional map that lie within
your study area or lease. Or, it can be used to clip only particular portions of a diagram
for export.
See also: RockPlot2D’s On-Screen Tools (page 247) for information about digitizing
coordinates on the screen.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Manipulating RockPlot2D Files / Clipping Two-

Dimensional Images. See page 22 for more Help information.

Combining Multiple RockPlot2D Images into a Montage

The Montage command in the RockPlot2D Utilities menu is used to combine multiple
plot files (*.RKW) into a single "montage," using coordinate information that you enter
into a table. The new image containing the combined plots is displayed in a new
RockPlot2D window.
The files to be combined must be RockWorks "plot" files, stored on disk as ".rkw" files.
The files must reside in the same directory as the montage table itself.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Manipulating RockPlot2D Files / Combining Multiple

RockPlot2D Images into a Montage. See page 22 for more Help information.

Converting Plot File Coordinates

The Degrees to UTM and UTM to Degrees commands in the RockPlot2D Utilities menu
are used to convert plot file coordinates from longitude / latitude decimal degrees to
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) meters, and vice versa. The converted map is
displayed in a new RockPlot2D window.
! These utilities convert graphic coordinates - the coordinates that are stored for each line,
symbol, etc., in the plot file. If you wish instead to convert the original X,Y data
coordinates that are listed in your datasheet, you can do so using the tools in the
RockWorks Geological Utilities Coords menu or the Borehole Manager’s Map menu.

255
RockPlot2D RockWorks2004

! The RockWorks and RockPlot2D coordinate conversions are based on NAD27. They
are probably adequate for relatively low resolution work, but may not provide the
accuracy of dedicated coordinate-conversion packages when working in small map areas.
If you need information about other conversion tools, please see the RockWorks web site
(www.rockware.com) and look for a program called Tralaine.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Manipulating RockPlot2D Files / Converting RKW

Diagram Coordinates. See page 22 for more Help information.

Printing RockPlot2D Files

You may output the map or diagram contained in a RockPlot2D window to your printer
using the Print Setup and Print commands (File menu).
RockPlot2D Tutorial / Print the Map.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Printing RockPlot2D Files. See page 22 for more
Help information.

How to set up your printer

The RockPlot2D Print Setup command (File menu) is used to establish the type of printer
you are using.
1. Select the File / Print Setup command.
When invoked, the program will display a dialog box with a pop-up list box
containing the printers that are currently installed within Windows.
2. You may select the printer you wish to use. You may also select paper size and
orientation. The Options command button will display additional printer
configuration dialog boxes for the selected printer.
! See your Windows documentation for information about installing printer drivers, and
see your printer's documentation regarding specific printer settings.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Managing RockPlot2D Files / Printing RockPlot2D

Files. See page 22 for more Help information

Printing…
The RockPlot2D File / Print command is used to send the graphic image to the printer.
When you select this command, you’ll see a large Printer Scaling Options window.

256
RockWorks2004 RockPlot2D

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Managing RockPlot2D Files / Printing RockPlot2D

Files and its topics on printing maps and diagrams, cross sections, and strip logs. See
page 22 for more Help information

Exporting RockPlot2D Files

The RockPlot2D program saves plot files on disk in a binary "RKW" format.
If you want to save the plot in a BMP (Windows Bitmap), JPG (JPEG), DXF (supported
by many CAD and drawing-style applications), WMF (Windows MetaFile), EMF
(Enhanced Metafile) format you can do so with the Export command (File menu). There
257
RockPlot2D RockWorks2004

is also an export to transfer RockPlot2D images to RockPlot3D allowing you to float any
2D image in the 3D window. You can also export an image in a raster format for loading
directly into your default paint style application.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Exporting Plot Files / …

Exporting RockPlot2D files to a Bitmap format
Exporting RockPlot2D files to a JPEG format
Exporting RockPlot2D files to a DXF format
Exporting RockPlot2D files to a WMF format
Exporting RockPlot2D files to an EMF format
Exporting RockPlot2D files to RockPlot3D
Exporting RockPlot2D files to a BMP format and load it into your default Paint
program.
See page 22 for more Help information.
RockPlot2D Tutorial / Export the Map and Insert it into a Document.

258
RockWorks2004 RockPlot3D

Chapter 20 - RockPlot3D
RockPlot3D Overview

RockPlot3D is a true 3-dimensional display tool that is used by the RockWorks2004

Borehole Manager and Geological Utilities for display of 3D objects, such as stratigraphic
and water level surfaces, solid models, strip logs, and other items such as bitmaps and
storage tanks. These items can be displayed individually, or in combination as shown
above.
RockPlot3D permits interactive movement of the display (rotate, zoom, pan) and easy
viewing and hiding of image objects.

Managing RockPlot3D Files

This section discusses the process of opening, appending, and saving "XML" files that are
displayed in the RockPlot3D window.
RockPlot3D Tutorial / All Topics.

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Managing RockPlot3D Files / … See page 22 for

more Help information.

Creating a new RockPlot3D window

A new RockPlot3D window is created automatically any time that a 3-dimensional image
is created within RockWorks. Multiple RockPlot3D windows may remain open at any
time.
If you are working in RockWorks and wish to open an existing image that has already
been saved as an R3D file, you’ll need to access a RockPlot3D window first.
If a RockPlot3D window is already open, simply click in that RockPlot3D window to
make it active and follow the instructions about Opening a RockPlot3D View (below).
259
RockPlot3D RockWorks2004

To locate an existing plot window that may be hidden behind the main RockWorks
data screen, you can move the data window out of the way (by grabbing its title
bar). Or, because RockPlot3D is run as a separate program, you will see its icon on
the Windows taskbar; just click on that icon to bring its window to the front.
If there is no RockPlot3D window open, you can launch RockPlot3D by selecting the
RockPlot3D command from the main RockWorks File menu (available in both the
Borehole Manager and the Geological Utilities).

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Managing RockPlot3D Files / Creating a New

RockPlot3D Window. See page 22 for more Help information.

Opening a RockPlot3D XML File

RockPlot3D saves its views in files with a file name extension “.XML”. * If you have
already saved a view in RockPlot3D, you can open it again into the program at any time.
Follow these steps:
1. Access RockPlot3D if necessary. (See above.)

2. Click on the RockPlot3D File button and choose Open. (Or, click on the File menu
and choose Open.)
3. In the pop-up menu click on the name of the XML file you wish to open.
Or, if you don't see the file listed there, click on the Select… option, and locate the
XML file you wish to display, accessing other drives or folders as necessary.
The program will close any existing file, and load the contents of the selected XML file.
4. At this time you can proceed to adjust the view (exaggeration, rotation, etc.),
manipulate the display, append another scene, print the scene, etc.
! Problems loading? See Troubleshooting File / Open (page 274).
(* Older versions of RockPlot3D saved views in "R3D" files which have a different
structure than XML. This format is still available, but XML is default.)

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Managing RockPlot3D Files / Opening a RockPlot3D

XML File. See page 22 for more Help information.

Appending Multiple RockPlot3D Views

RockPlot3D permits you to combine 3D views by appending the data objects in one XML
* file to the end of an existing view. Here's how:
260
RockWorks2004 RockPlot3D

1. If necessary, open the XML file to which another file is to be appended (above).

2. Click on the RockPlot3D Append button and choose Select. (Or choose the File /
Append menu command and click Select.)
3. In the displayed window, locate the existing XML file to append to the current view,
click on its name to highlight it, and click OK.
The program will load the data items from the selected XML file and display them in the
current view. The program will automatically update the view’s dimensions if necessary
to accommodate the new data elements.
4. To save this new view, choose the Save command to save it under the same file
name as the original scene, or the Save As command to assign the combined scene a
new name. (See Saving RockPlot3D Views, below.)
! The view being appended should reside in the same folder as the original XML file. If it
does not, be warned that any files liked to the appended view (MOD files, GRD files, etc.)
will need to be located for the program the next time the saved, appended image is
opened.
! If the scene being appended has radically different coordinate ranges, you may get a
strange-looking display. Be sure the data elements being appended really overlay each
other.
Problems loading? See Troubleshooting File / Open (page 274).
See also: Saving a RockPlot3D view as a Zip file (page 262).
(* Older versions of RockPlot3D saved views in "R3D" files which have a different
structure than XML. This format is still available, but XML is default.)

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Managing RockPlot3D Files / Appending Multiple

RockPlot3D Views. See page 22 for more Help information.

Saving a RockPlot3D view

Follow these steps to save a RockPlot3D view or changes made to an existing view:
1. If the scene is untitled (has no name) or if it has a name and you wish to save under
that name, click on the Save button, or choose File / Save.
If the scene is currently untitled, you can type in a name for the scene and click OK.
The default file name extension is XML *.
2. If you wish to save the scene changes under a different name, choose the File / Save
As command.

261
RockPlot3D RockWorks2004

Type in the new name to assign to the scene, and click OK. The default file name
extension is XML.
! RockPlot3D stores in the XML file a list of the data items, as well as the status of the
reference and data items: whether the item is "on" or "off", its transparency or color, and
other characteristics.
! RockPlot3D does not store in the XML file the actual data contained in grid models,
solid models, bitmap images, or other file-based items displayed in the current view.
Instead, it stores their file names. You need to be sure to keep all of these files together in
the same folder. See also: Save a RockPlot3D view as a zip file (below) for information
about zipping the R3D file and all linked files.
! RockPlot3D does not store any display information in the R3D file, such as last
viewpoint, lighting, or vertical exaggeration.
(* Older versions of RockPlot3D saved views in "R3D" files which have a different
structure than XML. This format is still available, but XML is default.)

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Managing RockPlot3D Files / Saving a RockPlot3D

View. See page 22 for more Help information.

Zipping a RockPlot3D View and its Linked Files

Because RockPlot3D’s "XML*" files can contain links to bitmap images, grid models,
solid models, and other external files, it can be confusing to keep track of what files to
send to co-workers for viewing, or what files you need to keep when you are house-
cleaning. RockPlot3D offers a save option that stores the XML and all linked files as a
ZIP file. Follow these steps:
1. Click on the File / Zip All Linked Files menu command.
2. In the File Name prompt, type in the name for the ZIP file, and then click Save
button.
RockPlot3D will create a ZIP-format file containing the XML file and all linked surface
grids, vertical grids, solid models, bitmaps, color tables, and other linked files. (All linked
file names are displayed in the “Linked File List” pane of the RockPlot3D window.) The
default file name extension is ".ZIP".
! RockPlot3D cannot open a ZIP-format file. To later access the contents of the ZIP file,
you will need to have a software program capable of extracting files from the ZIP archive.
(* Older versions of RockPlot3D saved views in "R3D" files which have a different
structure than XML. This format is still available, but XML is default.)

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Managing RockPlot3D Files / Zipping a RockPlot3D

View and its Linked Files. See page 22 for more Help information.
262
RockWorks2004 RockPlot3D

Printing a RockPlot3D View

Follow these steps to print a 3D image:
1. If necessary, open the R3D file you wish to print.
2. Adjust the image view to your satisfaction. This includes, but is not limited to, the
rotation angle, zoomed-in state, vertical exaggeration, etc. This is important
because the printing tool captures a bitmap image that’s based on what’s displayed
in the 3D View.
3. Select the File / Print menu command.
4. Be sure the printer information displayed along the right side of the screen is
correct. (This information is taken directly from the Window-installed printer
driver.) Double-check that the displayed printer name is the one to which the output
should be sent. Use the printer’s Properties or Setup button to access printer-
specific settings.
5. Along the left side of the print window, you can choose from Draft quality (150
dots per inch or dpi), Good quality (300 dpi), or Best quality (600 dpi) output.
6. Click OK to send the print job to the printer.
TIPS:
If you need printouts larger than a single page, we recommend that you export the image
to a high resolution JPG or BMP image, and then print from a graphic application. (See
Exporting RockPlot3D Images, page 273.)
The general shape of the image must be adjusted before selecting the File / Print
command (see step #2). Unlike 2-dimensional (flat) images like contour maps, 3D images
cannot be printed at a specific horizontal and vertical units-per-inch scale.

Viewing RockPlot3D Files

RockPlot3D is the plotting engine for all surfaces, fence diagrams, solid models and other
3-dimensional objects within RockWorks, and these images are plotted automatically into
a RockPlot3D window on the screen as they are generated.
What you'll see when RockPlot3D first opens is your image displayed on the left side or
"pane" of the screen, with a listing of the standard reference items and the current data
items shown in the right pane.

263
RockPlot3D RockWorks2004

Once the image is plotted on the screen, you may do any of the following operations
which are discussed in the Help topics below.

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Viewing RockPlot3D Files / …

Swapping the position of the image and data panes.
Changing the size of the 3D View pane.
Rotating the 3D view.
Zooming into/out of the view.
Moving the image in the 3D display.
Spinning the 3D image.
Selecting a pre-set view. (View / Above, Below, Plan View, Compass Points)
Selecting a custom view.
Changing the 3D view dimensions and vertical exaggeration.
Changing the lighting of the 3D view.
Changing the 3D view background color.
Turning off screen redraw.
See page 22 for more Help information.
RockPlot3D Tutorial / Plot 3D Logs, etc.
264
RockWorks2004 RockPlot3D

Manipulating RockPlot3D Images

The RockPlot3D screen contains an image pane (by default along the left), and a listing of
the data items (by default in the pane to the right). Note that you can swap the placement
of the image and data panes using the << and >> button above the linked file list.
You can adjust interactively the view of the image in the 3D Image pane by following the
instructions in Viewing RockPlot3D Files.
If you want to change the look of individual items in the Image view, that’s possible, too.
This section discusses these tools. This discussion is split up into the Reference Items,
which are available for all RockPlot3D images, and the Data Items which are specific to
each image created by RockWorks.
RockPlot3D Tutorial / All Topics.

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Manipulating RockPlot3D Images. See page 22 for

more Help information.

Reference Items
RockPlot3D offers the following reference items used to orient yourself in the scene:

Orientation marker: Displayed in the lower-right corner of the 3D View, it shows

the current orientation of the X-axis (red), the Y-axis (blue), and Z-axis or elevation
(green). If you rotate the display, the orientation marker will be updated.
Axes: The X, Y, and Z (elevation) axes are plotted in the middle of the currently-
265
RockPlot3D RockWorks2004

defined scene dimensions.

World Outlines: Expand this item to access individual reference grids for the Top,
Base, West, North, East, and South boundaries of the scene. Right-click on any
item to adjust the color, fill, and opacity of the reference grids. Choose View /
Dimensions to adjust the scene dimensions.
Axis labels, which note the Top, Base, West, North, East, and South directions.
These reference items are listed at the top of the Data List in the right pane of the
RockPlot3D screen.

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Manipulating RockPlot3D Images / Reference

Items…
Turning on/off the reference items.
Changing the axis label text.
Changing the appearance of the RockPlot3D reference grids.
See page 22 for more Help information.

Data Items
The "Data Items" are the logs, surfaces, solids, or other entities that were created by
RockWorks. They can be displayed individually…

or they can be displayed in groups.

266
RockWorks2004 RockPlot3D

Groups of items are shown with the Group symbol. Simply click on the Group’s "+"
button to view the data items within. Expand any data item’s "+" button to view its
components.
Each of the data types has characteristics you can modify right within RockPlot3D. Just
double-click on the item in the Data pane to access the settings.

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Manipulating RockPlot3D Images / Data Items / …

Turning on/off the RockPlot3D Data Items.
Adding New Data Groups in RockPlot3D.
Dragging and Dropping RockPlot3D Data Items.
Changing the RockPlot3D Surface Settings.
Changing the RockPlot3D Isosurface settings.
Changing the RockPlot3D Morph Settings.
Change the RockPlot3D Solid Model Settings (for solid models displayed
with all voxels).
Changing the RockPlot3D slice settings (for slices inserted into solid models).
Changing the RockPlot3D Fence Panel Settings.
General RockPlot Data Items – Adjusting Transparency.
See page 22 for more Help information.
267
RockPlot3D RockWorks2004

RockPlot3D Surface Settings

RockPlot3D can display 3-dimensional surfaces that are based on grid models. These
might result from gridding X/Y/Elevation data in the Geological Utilities datasheet (Map /
Grid-Based Map), from modeling a drawdown surface (Hydrology / Drawdown
Surface), or from modeling stratigraphic surfaces in the Borehole Manager (Stratigraphy
/ Structural Elevations). Surfaces can be displayed individually or in groups.

1. To access the surface settings, right-click on the surface item’s name or icon in
the right pane, and choose Options. You can also double-click on the surface item
to access the grid options.
The program will display a Grid Options window in which you can adjust the color
scheme, surface style, opacity, smoothing, and data filter.

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Manipulating RockPlot3D Images / RockPlot3D Data

Items / Surface Settings / …
Adjusting the surface color scheme.
Adjusting the surface style.
Adjusting the surface transparency.
Adjusting the surface smoothing.
Applying a Z-value filter.
See page 22 for more Help information.
RockPlot3D Tutorial / Append Stratigraphic Surfaces.

RockPlot3D Isosurface Settings

RockPlot3D can display 3-dimensional isosurfaces that are based on solid models. These
might result from modeling X,Y,Z,G data in the Geological Utilities datasheet (Solid /
Model), or from modeling quantitative downhole data in the Borehole Manager (I-Data /
Model, P-Data / Model, Fractures / Model).

268
RockWorks2004 RockPlot3D

1. To access the isosurface settings, right-click on the item’s name or icon in the
right pane, and choose Options. You can also double-click on the isosurface item
to access the options.
The program will display the Isosurface Options window in which you can adjust the
color scheme, surface style, opacity, and smoothing. You can change the minimum G
level enclosed in the isosurface "skin", and adjust the appearance of the model at the
boundary edges. You can also insert horizontal and vertical slices.

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Manipulating RockPlot3D Images / RockPlot3D Data

Items / Isosurface Settings / …
Adjusting the isosurface color scheme.
Adjusting the isosurface style.
Adjusting the isosurface transparency.
Establishing the minimum iso-level.
Adjusting the isosurface smoothing.
Displaying the isosurface volume.
Adjusting the isosurface "cap" appearance.
Inserting solid model slices.
See page 22 for more Help information.
RockPlot3D Tutorial / Append a Geochemical Isosurface…
See also: RockPlot3D Solid Model Settings (page 270).

RockPlot3D Morph Settings

The Geological Utilities Solid / Morph tool is used to read a list of existing solid model
files (*.MOD) and create a dynamic “movie” within RockPlot3D that shows time-based
changes within these models. You can specify any number of intermediate, transitional
models be generated between the existing models.

269
RockPlot3D RockWorks2004

1. To access the morph settings, right-click on the item’s name or icon in the right
pane, and choose Options. You can also double-click on the morph item to access
the options.
The program will display the Morph Options window in which you can run the morphed
sequence, export to an AVI file, and adjust isosurfaces’ color scheme, surface style, and
opacity. You can change the minimum G level enclosed in the isosurface "skin", and
adjust the appearance of the model at the boundary edges.

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Manipulating RockPlot3D Images / RockPlot3D Data

Items / Morphed Model Settings / …
Running the Morhed Solid Model Sequence.
Saving the Morhed Sequence as an AVI File.
Adjusting the isosurface color scheme.
Adjusting the isosurface style.
Adjusting the isosurface transparency.
Establishing the minimum iso-level.
Displaying the isosurface volume.
Adjusting the isosurface "cap" appearance.
See page 22 for more Help information.

RockPlot3D Solid Model Settings

RockPlot3D can display solid models as isosurfaces or as "all voxels". The All Voxel
display is typically used for display of lithology solid models or Boolean models that
result from the Geological Utilities Solid menu filtering tools, but can also be used for I-
Data (geochemistry) or P-Data (geophysical) models.

1. To access the solid model settings, right-click on the item’s name or icon in the
right pane, and choose Options. You can also double-click on the solid model item
to access the options.
The program will display the Solid Model Options window in which you can adjust the
color scheme, surface style, opacity, and smoothing. You can adjust the minimum and
maximum G values displayed, and you can insert horizontal and vertical slices.

270
RockWorks2004 RockPlot3D

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Manipulating RockPlot3D Images / RockPlot3D Data

Items / Solid Model Settings / …
Adjusting the solid model color scheme.
Adjusting the solid model style.
Adjusting the solid model transparency.
Adjusting the solid model smoothing.
Filtering G values from the display.
Displaying the RockPlot3D solid model volume.
Inserting solid model slices.
See page 22 for more Help information.
See also: RockPlot3D Isosurface Settings (page 268).

RockPlot3D Slice Settings

RockPlot3D can display 3-dimensional solid models as isosurfaces or using all voxels. In
addition, you can display horizontal and vertical slices within the solid model (see
Isosurfaces / Inserting Slices or Solid Models / Inserging Slices in the Help messages).

Once created, these solid model slices then become data items of their own with their own.
You can adjust the surface appearance, transparency, smoothing, and position.
1. To access the slice settings, right-click on the slice’s name or icon in the right
pane, and choose Options. You can also double-click on the slice item to access the
options.
The program will display the Slice Options window.

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Manipulating RockPlot3D Images / RockPlot3D Data

Items / Slice Settings / …
Adjusting the slice’s surface style.
Adjusting the slice’s transparency.
Adjusting the slice’s smoothing.
Adjusting the slice’s position.
See page 22 for more Help information.
271
RockPlot3D RockWorks2004

RockPlot3D Fence Panel Settings

RockPlot3D displays fence diagrams as vertical panels which are extracted from solid
models. These might result from modeling I-data, P-data, fracture, or lithology data in the
Borehole Manager (I-Data / Fence, P-Data / Fence, Fractures / Fence, Lithology /
Fence). Fence diagrams can also be generated using the Geological Utilities Solid /
Fence tool.

Each fence panel is stored as a "vertical grid" file (fence*.grd) which will be shown as
linked to the diagram. You can modify a number of the fence panel characteristics.
! Stratigraphy and water level fence panels are drawn a little differently (not from solid
models) and do not offer the same options as solid-model-based fences.

1. To access the vertical grid settings, expand the fence diagram group and expand
the fence panel’s group (if necessary). Then, right-click on the vertical grid item’s
name or icon in the right pane, and choose Options. You can also double-click
on the vertical grid to access the options.
The program will display a Grid Options window in which you can adjust the color
scheme, surface style, opacity, smoothing, and data filter.

Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Manipulating RockPlot3D Images / RockPlot3D Data

Items / Fence Panel Settings / …
Adjust the fence panel’s color scheme.
Adjust the fence panel’s surface appearance.
Adjust the fence panel’s transparency.
Adjust the fence panel’s smoothing.
Apply a fence panel G-value filter.
See page 22 for more Help information.

General RockPlot3D Data Items - Adjusting Transparency

Some of the more complicated components of RockPlot3D displays (isosurfaces, grid
surfaces, etc.) have lots of options for adjusting colors, filtering data, and more. These are
discussed earlier in this section.
272
RockWorks2004 RockPlot3D

Some components of the displays are quite simple – they contain only a general
transparency setting.

See Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Manipulating RockPlot3D Images / Data Items /

General RockPlot3D Data Items / How to…
Adjust the transparency of a group of items.
Adjust the transparency of individual items.
See page 22 for more Help information.

RockPlot3D Legends
A “legend” is a key to colors and data values or data items that can be generated
automatically by RockWorks or can be added interactively in RockPlot3D. The picture
below shows a legend correlating colors with geochemical values in a fence diagram.

See Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Manipulating RockPlot3D Images / RockPlot3D

Legends / …
Adding a legend to an existing image.
Adjusting the legend settings.
See page 22 for more Help information.

Importing Images into RockPlot3D

While the RockPlot3D File / Open command is used to open existing RockPlot3D
(.XML) files, the File / Import command can be used to display other file types:
DXF: Use this File / Import tool to display 2D or 3D DXF files in an existing
RockPlot3D window. The DXF file will be appended to any items already displayed.
This tool imports DXF LINE, POLYLINE, LWPOLYLINE, 3DFACE, SOLID, and
CIRCLE (filled) commands.

See Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Importing Images into RockPlot3D

273
RockPlot3D RockWorks2004

Exporting RockPlot3D Images

The RockPlot3D program saves image information in an "XML" file, with links to
external bitmaps, solid models, grid models, etc. that are displayed in the image. (See
Saving Files, page 261.)
RockPlot3D also offers export of the screen display as other image types: BMP
(Windows Bitmap), JPG (JPEG), AVI (animation), and ESRI 3D Shapefile formats.
These tools are in the File / Export menu command.

See Help / Contents / RockPlot3D / Exporting Images from RockPlot3D / ...

Exporting RockPlot3D images to a Bitmap format.
Exporting RockPlot3D images to a JPEG format.
Exporting a RockPlot3D animation to an AVI (animation) format.
Exporting RockPlot3D images fo ESRI 3D Shapefiles.
See page 22 for more Help information.
RockPlot3D Tutorial / Export and Zip the Final Image…

RockPlot3D Reference

Troubleshooting File / Open

RockPlot3D stores the current 3D view in an "XML" file*. Some of the information in
the view is recorded in the XML file itself; this includes all of the reference and data item
names, whether the items are set to "on" or "off", their current attributes, and much more.
What is not stored in the XML file, however, is the contents of any RockWorks-created
models or bitmap images that may be displayed in the 3D view. In other words, a large
solid model file (MOD) containing contaminant data is not stored in the R3D file. Neither
is a stratigraphic surface’s grid model (GRD). Instead, their file names are stored in the
XML file, and then RockPlot3D loads the data itself from the linked file.
The names of files linked to the current view are displayed in the “linked file list” pane
below the data pane of the RockPlot3D window. RockPlot3D assumes that all files
referenced in the XML are stored in the same folder as the XML file.
So, what this means is that if the XML file and any linked grid, solid model, bitmap, or
other files get separated, you may see the following message when RockPlot3D tries to
open that XML file, or append that XML file to another file:
Filename has been moved. Do you want to browse for this file?

1. Click the Yes option if you want to locate the missing file(s), and use the standard
274
RockWorks2004 RockPlot3D

Windows to change folders and/or drives as necessary.

Click No if you prefer not to locate the missing file(s), and the scene will be loaded
without those data elements.
(* Older versions of RockPlot3D saved views in "R3D" files which have a different
structure than XML. This format is still available, but XML is default.)

Troubleshooting OpenGL
RockPlot3D uses OpenGL to deliver the responsive, interactive scenes you see on the
screen. You’ll get the best performance from RockPlot3D on a computer that contains a
video card with OpenGL support.
How do you know if you have a video card that supports OpenGL? The easiest way is to
access the RockPlot3D Help menu, click on the About item, and then click on the
OpenGL Troubleshooting tab that’s displayed there. The window will display the driver
that’s installed on your system.
If there is a driver installed, its manufacturer and renderer and version will be listed. You
should opt for the Use Hardware Acceleration setting if your computer contains a good
card with a driver. You will be able to display and manipulate bigger images better.
If no driver is installed (typical of many laptops) you may see something like Driver
Vendor: Microsoft Corporation, Driver Renderer: GDI Generic. In this situation,
RockPlot3D will make use of RAM memory to provide the umph to drive the graphics.
You should choose the Use Software Acceleration setting. For this to work effectively,
we recommend that you have lots of RAM (more than 256 MB) and a faster processor
(400 mHz or faster Pentium III CPU).
If the 3D images are slow to redraw on your computer, you can remove the checkmark
from the Autodraw option along the bottom of the RockPlot3D window. The image will
only be updated after rotation, stretch, view change, etc. when the Render button is
clicked.

275
RockPlot3D RockWorks2004

Notes

276
RockWorks2004 Tables

Chapter 21 – ReportWorks
ReportWorks Overview
The ReportWorks program is a new page layout tool that's shipped with RockWorks. It
offers tools for laying out pages with RockWorks-generated graphics, imported graphics,
text, shapes, and more. It’s a really nice complement to all of the graphic options in the
RockWorks program, allowing you to combine them for presentation and printing on a
single page.

There are several ways you can access the ReportWorks program:

• If you are at the main RockWorks program, window, select the File / ReportWorks
command to open a new, blank ReportWorks window.

• If you are in RockPlot2D, choose the File / ReportWorks command to open a new,
blank ReportWorks window.

• Outside the RockWorks program, you can use the Windows Start menu to locate the
shortcut to the ReportWorks program in the RockWorks shortcut folder.

• Outside the RockWorks program, you can use Windows Explorer to locate the
program file "ReportWorks.exe" in the RockWare\ReportWorks2004 program folder,
and double-click on it to launch the application.
277
ReportWorks RockWorks2004

Once you have a ReportWorks window displayed, you can use the File / Page Setup
menu command to set up your new page (size and orientation) and the Tools menu options
to insert shapes, text, images, and more to the current page. Or, use the File / Open menu
command to open an existing RWR file.

Managing ReportWorks Files

Creating a New ReportWorks Document (RWR File)

Use the ReportWorks File / New menu option to create a new page layout document.
1. With the ReportWorks program displayed on the screen, select the File / New option.
2. If there is an existing document already displayed and it has not been saved, the
program will display a warning. Click Yes to save the existing document, or No to
close the existing document without saving.
A new, blank page will be displayed on the screen.
3. Use the File / Page Setup option to define the page size and layout.
4. Use the Tools menu options to insert graphics and shapes.

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Managing Files / Creating a New ReportWorks

Document (RWR file). See page 22 for more Help information.

Opening Existing ReportWorks Images

If there is no ReportWorks window yet displayed on the screen, you will need to create a
new ReportWorks window first. (See the previous topic.)
1. To open an existing RockWorks Report “RWR” graphic file, select the Open
command from the File menu. The program will display a prompt window in which
you may specify the name of the file to open. ReportWorks opens files that were
stored in a binary “RWR" file format only. (See the Tools menu for options that insert
other graphic file types into the current page layout.)
2. In the displayed dialog box, select the RWR file you wish to open, accessing other
drives or directories as necessary.
3. When you are ready to plot the image in a window on the screen, choose the OK
button. The program will load the document into the ReportWorks window.
If the existing RWR document contains linked images and those images are moved, you’ll
see a warning that they cannot be located. You can browse for these images to update
their paths.

278
RockWorks2004 Tables

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Managing Files / Opening Existing ReportWorks

Images (RWR files). See page 22 for more Help information.

Saving ReportWorks Documents (RWR Files)

1. Select the File / Save As command.
2. The program will display a dialog box where you may specify the file name (and
other drive and directory path information) for the page. Type in the name under
which to store the plot file on disk, and click on the Save button.
3. ReportWorks always stores plot files in a binary “RWR" format. If you need to export
the image to a BMP, JPG, DXF, WMF, or EMF format, you can use the Export
command.

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Managing Files / Saving ReportWorks Documents

(RWR files). See page 22 for more Help information.

Printing ReportWorks Diagrams

You can output the image contained in a ReportWorks document to your printer using the
File / Print command.
! It is assumed that you've already established the page layout prior to designing and
printing, since the page will be printed as it's displayed in the ReportWorks screen.
1. Open an existing ReportWorks document or create a new document as necessary.
2. Double-check the page's layout using the File / Page Setup option.
3. To print the document, choose File / Print.
Your current printer's dialog box will be displayed. The options that are available will
vary from depending on printer type. Typically, you would click the Properties or Options
button to access your printer's settings, such as page size and orientation.
4. To send the document to the printer, click the OK button in the Print window.

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Managing Files / Printing ReportWorks Documents.

See page 22 for more Help information

Exporting ReportWorks Documents

The ReportWorks program saves plot files on disk in a binary "RWR" format. If you want
to save the plot in a BMP (Windows Bitmap) or JPG (JPEG) format you can do so with
the Export command (File menu).

279
ReportWorks RockWorks2004

1. If necessary, open the RWR file you wish to export.

2. Select the Export command from the File menu. A pop-up menu will display the
export options.
3. Select the desired option: BMP for a bitmap format or JPG for a JPEG format.
4. Enter the requested information in the displayed program window.
File Name: Click on the small open-file button to type in the name to assign the
exported file.
Color Depth: Choose from the drop-down list box the color resolution you wish to
use for the output raster image. As you increase the color resolution, the output file
will increase in size. For good color depth, you should probably choose 24 bits/pixel.
! Changing the pixels per inch and/or colors per pixel does not change the
printable size of the graphic but instead the resolution of the image and the size
on disk of the output file.
Resolution (DPI): This setting defaults to 96 and will determine the resolution of the
output graphic in dots or pixels per inch. As you increase the number of dots per
inch, the disk size of the output file will increase. If you want to display the image on
screen only, a resolution of 96 will probably be adequate. If you want to print the
image at high resolution, you should increase the resolution to at least 150 pixels per
inch. (We use 200 - 300 for publication quality graphics.)
Compression: (JPG only) JPG files can be created with varied compression; use the
sliding bar to select the compression you wish to use. The greater the compression
(the left side of the sliding bar), the lower the quality of the output image and the
smaller the disk size of the output file. The lower the compression (to the right side of
the sliding bar), the higher the quality of the output image, and the larger the disk size
of the output file.
5. Click OK when you are ready to continue.
The program will store on disk the current ReportWorks document in a Windows Bitmap
or JPEG format at the resolution and color depth you specified.

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Managing Files / Exporting ReportWorks

Documents. See page 22 for more Help information.

280
RockWorks2004 Tables

View and Layout Options

Establishing the ReportWorks Page Layout

Use the File / Print Setup tool to establish the size and orientation of your ReportWorks
page. This is an important first step in designing a report so that you know the page's
dimensions.
1. Create a new document in ReportWorks, or open an existing RWR file into the
program window.
2. Select File / Print Setup.
3. You will see the Print Setup window for your default printer, as installed in Windows.
Here you can select a different printer if necessary, and you can click the printer's
Properties button to select the paper size, and portrait (vertical) or landscape
(horizontal) orientation.
4. Click OK when the settings are established to your liking.
The ReportWorks page view will be updated based on the page dimensions and
orientation.
If you view your page in Full Screen mode, the printable area of your paper will be shown
in white, against a gray background. The printable dimensions of the sheet are determined
by your printer's software, not by ReportWorks.
See the Tools menu options for inserting graphic images and drawing shapes. See the
Options menu for establishing the page units.

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / View and Layout Options / Establishing the

ReportWorks Page Layout. See page 22 for more Help information.

Establishing your ReportWorks Page Units

Use the Options / Units menu item to set your ReportWorks page units. This will
determine the units displayed in the reference rulers, as well as the default units shown in
scaling options.
1. Click on the Options menu and then on the Units item.
2. From the pop-up menu, select either Inches or Centimeters. This is a "toggle" item;
selecting either from the menu will establish it as default.
The program will update the reference rulers with these units. These will also become the
default scaling units for subsequent RockPlot images and geo-referenced raster images
that you insert.
281
ReportWorks RockWorks2004

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / View and Layout Options / Establishing the

ReportWorks Page Units. See page 22 for more Help information.

Defining the ReportWorks Program Libraries

Use the Options / Program Files tool to establish the names of the pattern and symbol
libraries to be used to draw patterns and symbols inserted into the page or those that are
included in inserted RockPlot graphics. Neither RockWorks nor ReportWorks stores the
actual pattern and symbol designs in the drawings, but instead links pattern and symbol
numbers to a reference library; use this option to define which library to use.

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Other Options / Defining the ReportWorks Program

Libraries. See page 22 for more Help information.

Drawing Tools

Working with Layers

ReportWorks allows you to organize the different items on a page into different "layers".
These are groups of items that can be displayed or hidden with the click of a button. For
example, you might keep your static legend items (company logos, maybe a pattern index)
in one layer, while document-specific RockPlot or bitmap images might be kept in a
separate layer.
Opening the program or creating a new ReportWorks document generates a single layer,
named "Layer 1." Subsequent items that are drawn or inserted into the page are done so in
that layer, until a new layer is created.
To add a layer to the current document, choose the Tools / New Layer menu item or click
on the New Layer button. The program will add a new layer entry into the data pane
along the left side of the window. Be sure to highlight a particular layer prior to adding
items to your document; items are always added to the currently-highlighted layer. (See
also "Moving Items," below.)
To select a layer to be active, simply click on its name in the data pane. Subsequent items
that you add to your document will be added to that layer.
To rename a layer, simply click on the layer in the data pane along the left side of the
window, to highlight it. Then click on the layer's name so that you see the blinking cursor
in the name's text. Edit/type in a new name. This can help you to be more specific with
layer items, such as "company legend items" rather than "Layer2".
To move items between layers, you need to use a cut-and-paste procedure. First, click on
the layer name to which the item to be moved is currently associated. Left-click on the
282
RockWorks2004 Tables

item to be moved to a different layer, and choose Edit / Cut (or type in Ctrl + X). Then,
click on the name of the layer to which it is to be associated and select Edit / Paste (or
type Ctrl + V). The item will be re-inserted into the document and associated with the
specified layer.
To copy items between layers, use a copy-and-paste procedure similar to that described
above for moving items, but using the Edit / Copy command rather than the Edit / Cut
command.
To display a layer's items, insert a check-mark in the layer's check-box. To hide a layer's
items from the display, remove the check-mark from the layer's name.

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Drawing Tools / Working with Layers. See page 22
for more Help information.

Inserting a Symbol into a ReportWorks Page

Use the Tools / Symbol menu command or toolbar button to insert a graphic symbol into
an existing ReportWorks page. You can insert a symbol from the RockWare symbol
library, or you can choose from some generic symbol shapes.
1. Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary.

2. Click on the Symbol toolbar button or choose the Tools / Symbol menu
command.
3. Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the symbol is to be placed,
and click the left mouse button to insert it. You will see the symbol displayed on the
page.
4. Double-click on the symbol to access its settings, or right-click on the symbol and
choose Properties.
5. Select the symbol style, fill, outline, etc. and click Apply to enforce these settings.
See the help messages for details. Click Close to close the Symbol Options window
6. Resize the symbol as you wish by clicking on one of the corner handles and dragging
larger or smaller. If the Equal Scales option was selected, the horizontal-to-vertical
aspect of the symbol will remain the same as you resize.
7. Reposition the symbol as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the symbol
and dragging it to the new location

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Drawing Tools / Inserting a Symbol into a

ReportWorks Page. See page 22 for more Help information.

283
ReportWorks RockWorks2004

Drawing Lines, Polylines, Polygons, and Rectangles on a

ReportWorks Page
Use the Reportworks Tools menu commands or toolbar buttons to draw straight lines,
multi-segmented lines, closed polygons, and rectangles in an existing ReportWorks page.
You can adjust the line style, thickess, and color, and the fill for polygons and rectangles.
1. Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary.
2. Choose your drawing tool:

Straight lines: or choose the Tools / Line menu command.

Polylines: or choose the Tools / Polyline menu command.

Polygons: or choose the Tools / Polygon menu command.

Rectangles: or choose the Tools / Rectangle menu command.
3. Draw your shape:
Line: Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one endpoint of the
line is to be placed, and click and hold the left mouse button to place this point. Drag
the cursor to the desired location of the second endpoint, and release the mouse
button.
Polyline: Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the first endpoint
of the line is to be placed, and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it. With
the button still pressed in, drag to the location of this segment's endpoint, and release
the mouse button. Click and hold again, and drag to the next segment's endpoint, and
release the mouse button. Continue in this manner for each polyline vertex. To end
the polyline, either click on the pointer button , or double-click the left mouse
button.
Polygon: Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one vertex of
the polygon is to be placed, and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it. With
the button still pressed in, drag to the location of the next polygon vertex, and release
the mouse button. You'll see a straight line connecting the points. Click and hold
again, and drag to the next vertex location, and release the mouse button. Now, you'll
see a closed polygon shape. Click and hold and drag again to the next vertex location,
and release the mouse button. Another line segment will be added to the polygon
shape. Continue in this manner for each polygon vertex. To end the polygon, either
click on the pointer button , or double-click the left mouse button.
Rectangle: Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one corner of
the rectangle is to be placed, and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it.
With the button still pressed in, drag to the location of the diagonal corner point, and
release the mouse button. As you drag, you'll see a "rubber band" image of the shape's
284
RockWorks2004 Tables

outline. Release the mouse button when the rectangle is the desired shape and size.
4. Double-click on the drawn item to view/adjust its settings, or right-click on it and
choose Properties.
5. Select the line style and color, and click Apply to enforce these settings. For
polygons and rectangles you can also choose a fill. See the Help messages for details.
Click Close to close the shape’s Options window.
6. Resize the item as you wish by clicking on one of the endpoint or vertex handles and
dragging.
7. Reposition the item as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the item and
dragging it to the new location.

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Drawing Tools / Inserting a Line / Polyline /

Rectangle / Polygon into a ReportWorks Page. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Inserting Text into a ReportWorks Page

Use the Text or Text Block menu commands or toolbar buttons to insert either a single
line of text or a text paragraph on an existing ReportWorks page. You can adjust the font
type and size, color, and fill pattern/color.
1. Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary.
2. Choose your tool:
Click on the Text toolbar button or choose the Tools / Text menu command to
insert a single line of text, such as a title or label.
Click on the button or choose Tools / Text Block to insert text that can wrap into
multiple lines or paragraph.
3. Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the upper-right corner of the
text label or blockis to be placed, and click the left mouse button to insert it.
4. You will see the Text Options dialog box. Type in the text and select its font, outline,
and background as described in the Help messages. Click Apply to apply the settings
you've chosen. Click Close to close the Text Options window.
5. You can access the text options at any time by double-clicking on the text or by right-
clicking and choosing Properties.
6. Reposition the text label as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the text
and dragging it to the new location.

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Drawing Tools / Inserting Text / Multi-Line Text

into a ReportWorks Page. See page 22 for more Help information.

285
ReportWorks RockWorks2004

Inserting a RockPlot Map or Diagram (RKW File) into a

ReportWorks Page
Use the RockPlot (RKW) menu command or toolbar button to insert into a ReportWorks
page a map, cross-section, or other 2D diagram generated by RockPlot2D and saved as a
RKW file. You can adjust the diagram's scaling, clipping, outline, and fill pattern/color.
See the Bitmap tool for inserting more generic graphic images.
1. Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary.
2. Click on the RockPlot (RKW) toolbar button or choose the Tools / RockPlot
(RKW) menu command.
3. Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one corner of the image
is to be placed, and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it. With the button
still pressed in, drag to the location of the diagonal corner point, and release the
mouse button. As you drag, you'll see a "rubber band" image of the shape's outline.
4. The program will display the RockPlot Options dialog box.
Click on the RockPlot (RKW) tab to define the RockPlot2D image to be placed on the
page and to define its scaling and settings.
File: Browse for the RKW file to be inserted into the space you defined. You can
also choose whether the RKW file will be linked to the ReportWorks document
or embedded within it.
Scaling: Choose from Best Fit (horizontal scale = vertical scale), Stretch (the
image will be stretched to fill the available space) or Custom (you can define
map units per inch or cm on the page).
Establish other diagram settings (clipping, margins, etc.)
Click on the Outline tab to define any outline color and line style.
Click on the Fill (Background) tab to define any color or pattern background fill for
the image.
5. Click Apply to apply the settings you have selected. Click Close to close the
RockPlot Options window.
6. You can access the image's options at any time by double-clicking on the image or by
right-clicking and choosing Properties.
7. You can resize the image block by first single-clicking on the image to see the
boundary "handles." Then, click and hold on any of the handles on the corners or
edges and drag to the new position. Release the mouse button when the boundary's
edges are in the correct position.
8. Reposition the image as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the text and
dragging it to the new location.

286
RockWorks2004 Tables

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Drawing Tools / Inserting a RockPlot Map or

Diagram (RKW) into a ReportWorks Page. See page 22 for more Help information.

Inserting a Raster Image into a ReportWorks Page

Use the Raster menu command or toolbar button to insert into a ReportWorks page a
BMP, JPG or TIFF image. You can adjust the image's scaling and outline. See the
RockPlot (RKW) tool for inserting RockPlot-generated graphic images, and the Georaster
tool for raster images with world coordinates.
1. Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary.
2. Create a new layer as necessary.
3. Click on the Raster toolbar button or choose the Tools / Raster (BMP, JPG,
TIFF) menu command.
4. Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one corner of the image
is to be placed, and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it. With the button
still pressed in, drag to the location of the diagonal corner point, and release the
mouse button. As you drag, you'll see a "rubber band" image of the shape's outline.
5. The program will display the Raster Options dialog box.
Click on the Raster tab to define the bitmap image to be placed on the page and to
define its scaling and settings.
File: Browse for the BMP, JPG or TIFF file to be inserted into the space you
defined. You can also choose whether the file will be linked to the ReportWorks
document or embedded within it.
Scaling: Choose from Best Fit (horizontal scale = vertical scale) or Stretch (the
image will be stretched to fill the available space).
Establish other diagram settings (margins, etc.)
Click on the Outline tab to define any outline color and line style.
6. Click Apply to apply the settings you've chosen. Click Close to close the Raster
Options window.
7. You can access the image's options at any time by double-clicking on the image or by
right-clicking and choosing Properties.
8. You can resize the image block by first single-clicking on the image to see the
boundary "handles." Then, click and hold on any of the handles on the corners or
edges and drag to the new position. Release the mouse button when the boundary's
edges are in the correct position. The raster image will be redrawn within the new
boundary using the selected stretch or best-fit scaling you've selected.
9. Reposition the image as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the text and
dragging it to the new location.
287
ReportWorks RockWorks2004

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Drawing Tools / Inserting a Raster Image into a

ReportWorks Page. See page 22 for more Help information.

Inserting a Geo-Referenced Raster Image into a ReportWorks

Page
Use the Georaster menu command or toolbar button to insert into a ReportWorks page a
raster image that has an associated "world file" for geo-referencing its coordinates. You
can adjust the image's scaling and outline. See the Raster tool for inserting generic (non-
geo-referenced) raster images
1. Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary.
2. Create a new layer as necessary.

3. Click on the Raster toolbar button or choose the Tools / GeoRaster menu
command.
4. Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one corner of the image
is to be placed, and click and hold the left mouse button to insert it. With the button
still pressed in, drag to the location of the diagonal corner point, and release the
mouse button. As you drag, you'll see a "rubber band" image of the shape's outline.
5. The program will display the World Options dialog box.
Click on the Raster tab to define the image to be placed on the page, select its world
file, and define its scaling and settings.
Raster File: Browse for the BMP, JPG or TIFF file to be inserted into the space
you defined.
World File: Browse for the World file associated with the raster image.
Embed/Link: Choose whether the file will be linked to the ReportWorks
document or embedded within it.
Scaling: Define the number of map units per inch or cm of paper.
Establish other diagram settings (margins, etc.)
Click on the Outline tab to define any outline color and line style.
6. Click Apply to apply the settings you've chosen. Click Close to close the World
Options window.
7. You can access the image's options at any time by double-clicking on the image or by
right-clicking and choosing Properties.
8. You can resize the image block by first single-clicking on the image to see the
boundary "handles." Then, click and hold on any of the handles on the corners or
edges and drag to the new position. Release the mouse button when the boundary's
288
RockWorks2004 Tables

edges are in the correct position. The raster image will be redrawn within the new
boundary using the scaling you've selected.
9. Reposition the image as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on the text and
dragging it to the new location.

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Drawing Tools / Inserting a Geo-Referenced Raster

Image into a ReportWorks Page. See page 22 for more Help information.

Inserting a Scale Bar into a ReportWorks Page

Use the Scalebar menu command or toolbar button to insert a scale bar on an existing
ReportWorks page. You can adjust the style and scaling.
1. Create a new page or open an existing page as necessary.
2. Create a new layer as necessary.

3. Click on the Scalebar toolbar button or choose the Tools / Scalebar menu
command.
4. Use your mouse to position the cursor in the page where the one corner of the scale
bar's rectangular area is to be placed, and click and hold the left mouse button to
insert it. With the button still pressed in, drag to the location of the diagonal corner
point, and release the mouse button. As you drag, you'll see a "rubber band" image of
the shape's outline. You can orient the scale bar horizontally or vertically, and the
orientation can be modified in the Options window. Once you release the button the
scale bar will be displayed.
5. Double-click on the scale bar to access its options, or right-click and choose
Properties.
6. Click on the Scalebar tab to select the scale bar's style and scaling. Choose from Line
and Tick Marks (shown left, below) or Filled Bars (below, right) by clicking in the
appropriate radio button. You can also select the color.

Units: Here, define the number of scale bar units to be displayed per inch or
centimeter (you choose) on the page. The unit type will default to your page units,
but you can change units for the scale bar. Typically, you'll be adding a scale bar to
represent a map or cross section scale, and you would set the scale bar units to be
equal to the map or cross section units.
Major Interval, Minor Interval: Enter here the major (label and tick) interval for the
scale bar, and the minor tick interval. The examples shown above are set to a Major
289
ReportWorks RockWorks2004

Interval of "100" and a Minor Interval of "10".

Position: Click on this tab to establish the text/tick position relative to the scale bar,
margin size, and scalebar width and height (in your page units).
Use the Labels tab to select the font style, color, and size for the labels.
Use the Outline tab to select the outline color and style, if any.
Refer to the help messages for more details.
7. Click Close to close the Scalebar Options window.
8. You can resize the scale bar by first single-clicking on it to see its "handles." Then,
click and hold on any of the handles on the corners or edges and drag to the new
position. Release the mouse button when the rectangle edges are in the correct
position. The program will automatically extend or shorten the bar and labels
accordingly.
9. Reposition the entire scale bar as you wish by clicking and holding anywhere on it
and dragging it to the new location.

Help / Contents / ReportWorks / Drawing Tools / Inserting a Scale Bar into a

ReportWorks Page. See page 22 for more Help information.

290
RockWorks2004 Tables

Notes

291
ReportWorks RockWorks2004

Notes

292
RockWorks2004 Tables

Chapter 22 - RockWorks Tables and System

Libraries
Borehole Manager Tables

Lithology Tables (Keyword Tables)

RockWorks uses "lithology keywords" to make a link between observed lithology data
and the patterns/colors to be plotted in strip logs and the colors to be plotted in other
lithology diagrams. The lithology data is entered into the Borehole Manager's "Lithology"
data tab.
To know what type of pattern to plot for a particular lithologic keyword, the program
refers to the current Lithology Keyword Table or "Lithology Table."

To view the current Lithology Table, click on the large Tables tab that sits along the left
edge of the RockWorks program window. Double-click on the name of the file listed to
the right of the Lithology Table heading. There is a sample Lithology Table shipped with
the program, in your “\My Documents\RockWorks2004\Samples” folder.

293
Tables RockWorks2004

! Because lithology is project-specific, we recommend that you keep the project’s

Lithology Table in the current project folder. This table is ASCII in format.
! If you assign the name “lithology.tab” to your Lithology Table and if this table is in your
project folder, RockWorks will load that table automatically each time you access your
project folder. If you assign the table a different name, then you’ll have to browse for the
desired table.
Interpreted stratigraphy patterns are declared in the "Stratigraphy Table" (page 294) with
data listed in the Borehole Manager's "Stratigraphy" tab.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Lithology Tables / How to ...
Edit the Lithology Table.
Open a different Lithology Table.
Import a LogPlot Keyword Table.
See page 22 for more Help information.

Stratigraphy Tables
The Borehole Manager uses a "Stratigraphy" data tab for entry of formation layer names.
These formations can be illustrated in strip logs, as surface maps, fence diagrams, and
more using the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy tools. The "Stratigraphy Table" defines
for the program the names of the formations for the current project, and the graphic
pattern / color to use for each formation in logs and other diagrams.

294
RockWorks2004 Tables

It also lists for each formation the percent fill for the pattern (when displayed in strip
logs), the formation density for volume/mass computations, and the "G" value to be
assigned for that layer in stratigraphic models.
To view the current Stratigraphy Table, click on the large Tables tab that sits along the left
edge of the RockWorks program window. Double-click on the name of the file listed to
the right of the Stratigraphy Table heading. There is a sample Stratigraphy Table shipped
with the program, in your “\My Documents\RockWorks2004\Samples” folder.
! Because stratigraphy is project-specific, we recommend that you keep the project’s
Stratigraphy Table in the project folder. This table is ASCII in format.
! If you assign the name “stratigraphy.tab” to your Stratigraphy Table and if this table is in
your project folder, RockWorks will load that table automatically each time you access
your project folder. If you assign the table a different name, then you’ll have to browse
for the desired table.
By contrast, observed lithology patterns are declared in the "Lithology Table" (page 293)
with data listed in the Borehole Manager's "Lithology" tab.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Stratigraphy Tables / How to
Open the default Stratigraphy Table.
Open a different Stratigraphy Table.
Add a new formation name.
Select a pattern for the formation.
Enter the percent fill for the formation.
Enter the density for the formation.
Measure your rock density.
Save changes and close the Stratigraphy Table.
See page 22 for more Help information.

Graphic Libraries

Pattern Tables

Pattern Tables Overview

Patterns are repeating graphic units that can be associated with some kind of data item,
such as lithology keywords in the Borehole Manager's Lithology tab, or formation names
in the Stratigraphy tab. The actual pattern <-> data associations are made within the
Lithology Table (for lithology) and the Stratigraphy Table (for stratigraphy).

295
Tables RockWorks2004

RockWorks is shipped with a large number of patterns already installed, in a "Pattern

Table." The factory default Pattern Table is named "RW_pat.pat". It is stored in the
"System" folder in your “My Documents\RockWorks2004”folder. Unlike some of the
other program tables (*.TAB files), this table is binary rather than ASCII in format.
To access the Pattern Table, where you can view the current pattern set, open a new
pattern set, or even access the Pattern Editor where you can modify existing patterns or
create new patterns, follow these steps:
1. Click on the large Tables tab along the left edge of the main RockWorks program
window.
2. Double-click on the file name to the right of the Patterns row heading.
The program will display the default Pattern Table in the Select Pattern window. Here
you can view and select patterns from the current pattern library. It also lets you access
the Pattern Editor where you can edit existing pattern designs and create new patterns. See
the topics below.
(The Pattern Table can also be accessed from several other places within the program: the
Stratigraphy Table, Lithology Table, the Borehole Manager Stratigraphy and Lithology
data tabs, the Geological Utilities datasheet if you double-click on a pattern data column.)

The Select Pattern Window

The Select Pattern window displays all of the pattern designs contained in the current
Pattern Table. The factory default Table is "RW_pat.pat" (in the "My
Documents\RockWorks2004\System" folder). If you do a lot of modifications to this file,
or like to maintain specific pattern libraries for different projects, you can save the Pattern
Table under different file names and in different folders. The name of the current Table is
displayed at the top of the Select Pattern window.
This window is used to view patterns, select pattern colors and density, open other Pattern
Tables, and access the Pattern Editor.

296
RockWorks2004 Tables

1. To view pattern samples that are not currently visible, drag the scroll bars up or
down as appropriate.

See: Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Pattern Tables / Using the
Select Pattern Window / How to…
View the index number for a pattern design.
Select a pattern to be active.
Adjust the pattern density.
Select pattern colors.
Open a different Pattern Table.
Save the current Pattern Table under a new name.
Create a printable index to the current Table.
Access the Pattern Editor.
See page 22 for more Help information.

297
Tables RockWorks2004

Using the Pattern Editor

The Pattern Editor is a tool that permits you to edit an existing pattern design or create a
new pattern design for use to illustrate rock types in logs, cross sections, etc. Pattern
designs are stored in a RockWorks "Pattern Table."
The Pattern Editor is accessed from the Select Pattern window. From the main
RockWorks menu, you can display the Select Pattern window by following these steps: *
1. Click on the large Tables tab along the left edge of the main RockWorks program
window.
2. Double-click on the file name listed just to the right of the Pattern Table row
heading. The program will display the default Pattern Table in the Select Pattern
window.
3. If you wish to edit pattern(s) contained in a different Pattern Table, open that Table
(click the File menu and choose Open).
4. Click on the pattern design you wish to edit, scrolling down through the samples as
necessary, so that it is displayed as default in the upper Preview box. Or, if you want
to create a new pattern, click on a blank pattern design.
5. Click the Edit button near the top of the Select Pattern window.
The selected pattern design (or blank pattern) will be displayed in the Pattern Editor.

298
RockWorks2004 Tables

(* The Select Pattern window can also be accessed from within the Lithology Table, the
Stratigraphy Table, the Borehole Manager Lithology and Stratigraphy data tabs, and by
double-clicking in "pattern-type" columns in the Geological Utilities data sheet. )

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Pattern Tables / Using the
Pattern Editor /...
Creating new patterns.
Importing existing patterns.
Editing existing patterns.
Drawing patterns.
Understanding the pattern origin.
Viewing pattern sizes.
Exiting the Pattern Editor.
See page 22 for more Help information.

Symbol Tables

Symbol Tables Overview

Symbols are small line drawings that can be associated with each record (row) in the
Geological Utilities data window, representing a different sample site or drill hole
location. The symbols will be used by the program to note the sample locations in point
maps, ternary diagrams, stereonets, etc. Symbols will also be associated with each
borehole in the Borehole Manager (shown on the Location tab).
RockWorks is shipped with an existing set of symbols already installed, in a "Symbol
Table." The factory default symbol Table is named "RW_sym.sym". It is installed in the
My Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder. Unlike some of the other program tables
(*.TAB files), this table is binary rather than ASCII in format.
To access the Symbol Table, where you can view the current symbol set, open a new
symbol library, or even access the Symbol Editor where you can modify existing symbols
or create new ones, follow these steps:
1. Click on the large Tables tab along the left edge of the main RockWorks program
window. *
2. Double-click on the name listed to the right of the Symbols row heading. The
program will display the default Symbol Table in the Select Symbol window.
Here you can view and select symbols from the current symbol library. It also lets you
access the Symbol Editor where you can edit existing symbol designs and create new
symbols. See the topics below.

299
Tables RockWorks2004

* The Symbol Table can also be accessed from within the Geological Utilities data sheet,
by double-clicking on a graphic symbol cell. It can also be accessed by clicking on the
picture of the symbol in the Borehole Manager Location tab.

Using the Select Symbol Window

The Select Symbol window displays all of the symbol designs in the current Symbol
Table. The factory default Table is "RW_sym.sym" (in the "My
Documents\RockWorks2004\System" folder). This window is used to view symbols,
select symbol colors, open other Symbol Tables, and access the Symbol Editor.

To view symbol samples that are not currently visible, drag the scroll bars up or down as
necessary.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Symbol Tables / Using the
Select Symbol Window /How to ...
View the index number for a symbol.
Select a symbol to be active.
Move symbols within the table.
Import symbols from another Symbol Table.
300
RockWorks2004 Tables

Open a different Symbol Table.

Save the current Symbol Table under a new name.
Create a printable index to the current Table.
Access the Symbol Editor.
See page 22 for more Help information.

Using the Symbol Editor

The Symbol Editor is a tool that permits you to edit an existing symbol design or create a
new symbol design for use to illustrate sample locations in maps, stereonets, etc. Symbol
designs are stored in a RockWorks "Symbol Table."
The Symbol Editor is accessed from the Select Symbol window. From the main
RockWorks menu, you can display the Select Symbol window by following these steps: *
1. Click on the large Tables button along the left edge of the main RockWorks
window.
2. Double-click on the file name shown immediately to the right of the “Symbol” row
heading. The program will display the default Symbol Table in the Select Symbol
window.
3. If you wish to edit symbol(s) contained in a different Symbol Table, open that Table
(click the File menu and choose Open).
4. Click on the symbol design you wish to edit, scrolling down through the samples as
necessary, so that it is displayed as default in the upper Preview box. Or, if you want
to create a new symbol, click on a blank symbol design.
5. Click the Edit button at the top of the Select Symbol window.
The selected symbol design (or blank symbol) will be displayed in the Symbol Editor.

301
Tables RockWorks2004

(* The Select Symbol window can also be accessed by double-clicking in a symbol

column in the Geological Utilities data sheet or by clicking on the symbol picture in the
Borehole Manager Location tab.)

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Symbol Tables / Using the
Symbol Editor /How to ...
Create a new symbol.
Import existing symbols.
Edit existing symbols.
Draw symbols.
Exit the Symbol Editor.
See page 22 for more Help information.

Diagram Legend Tables

Color Index Tables

A "Color Index Table" is used to plot a color legend inside a map/diagram legend box in
the RockPlot2D program. Although many RockWorks color diagrams (maps,
stratigraphic blocks, etc.) offer automatic color legends, it can be handy to include a
custom color index in an overall diagram legend to emphasize anomalous areas, etc.

302
RockWorks2004 Tables

The factory default Color Index Table is named "Colindex.tab". It is installed into the
\My Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder. This table is ASCII in format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Color Index Tables. See
page 22 for more Help information
See also: Colorfill Tables (page 304).

Line Style Index Tables

A "Line Style Index Table" is used to plot a legend showing different line styles and
captions inside a map/diagram legend box in the RockPlot2D program.
The factory default Line Style Index Table is named "Linindex.tab". It is installed into the
\My Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder. This table is ASCII in format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Line Style Index Tables. See
page 22 for more Help information.

Pattern Index Tables

A "Pattern Index Table" is used to plot a legend showing different pattern designs and
captions inside a map/diagram legend box in the RockPlot2D program. They can also be
inserted into the ReportWorks page layout program.
The factory default Pattern Index Table is named "Patindex.tab". It is installed into the
\My Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder. This table is ASCII in format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Pattern Index Tables. See
page 22 for more Help information.
See also: Pattern Tables (page 295).

Symbol Index Tables

A "Symbol Index Table" is used to plot a legend showing different map symbol designs
and captions inside a map/diagram legend box in the RockPlot2D program.
The factory default Symbol Index Table is named "Symindex.tab". It is installed into the
\My Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder. This table is ASCII in format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Symbol Index. See page 22
for more Help information.
See also: Symbol Tables (page 299).

303
Tables RockWorks2004

Range Lookup Tables

Colorfill Tables
A "Colorfill Table" is used to define a listing of value intervals and their corresponding
colors, to be used by the program when building 2D or 3D colorfill contour maps, solid
models, etc. for which you have requested "Custom" color intervals.
The factory default Colorfill Table is named "Colorfil.tab". It is installed into the \My
Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder. This table is ASCII in format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Colorfill Tables. See page
22 for more Help information.
See also: Color Index Tables (page 302).

Contour Tables
A "Contour Table" is used to define a listing of Z-values and their corresponding line
styles and (optionally) contour labels, to be used by the program when building 2D line
contour maps for which you have requested "Custom" intervals.
The factory default Contour Table is named "Contours.tab". It is installed into the \My
Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder. This table is ASCII in format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Contour Tables. See page 22
for more Help information.

Symbol Range Tables

All of the point-mapping tools in the RockWorks Geological Utilities (Map / EZ Map,
etc.) offer variable scaling of symbols. This means that the size of the symbols can vary
across the map or diagram, based on the quantitative value measured at each sample site.
With this scheme, you can declare actual symbol sizes for as many z-value ranges as you
wish, using a "Symbol Range Table." Once you have a Symbol Range Table set up, you
can save it for later use. You can also load an existing Symbol Range Table that you have
saved on disk.
The program is shipped with a default Symbol Range Table called "SymRange.tab,"
installed in the My Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder. This file is ASCII in
format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Range Tables. See page 22
for more Help information.
304
RockWorks2004 Tables

Other Tables

Borehole Survey Tables

The Geological Utilities Survey menu’s Drill Hole Survey tool reads downhole
orientation data from a "Borehole Survey Table" and computes XYZ coordinates at user-
specified intervals down the drill hole, and/or creates 2D or 3D images of the deviated
borehole.
Once you have a Borehole Survey Table set up, you can save it for later use. You can also
load an existing Table that you have saved on disk. The program is shipped with a default
Borehole Survey Table called "Survey.tab" in the “My
Documents\RockWorks2004\System” folder. This file is ASCII in format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Borehole Survey Tables.
See page 22 for more Help information

DLG Attributes Table

RockPlot2D (the RockWorks 2-dimensional plotting program) offers import of USGS
Digital Line Graph ("DLG") data extracted from 1:100,000 or 1:2,000,000-scale maps,
Optional format. Boundary, transportation, hydrography, hypsography (contour) and land
grid categories are supported. The SDTS format is not currently supported.
In order to know how to plot the different DLG entities (roads vs. rivers, etc.), the
program uses the information stored in the "DLG Attribute Table." This Table lists
different DLG entity types, plus the line style, thickness, and color to be used to plot them.
The factory default DLG Attributes Table is named "DLG_Atrb.tab". It is installed into
the \My Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder. This table is ASCII in format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / DLG Attributes Table.

Help / Contents / RockPlot2D / Importing Plot Files / Importing Digital Line Graph
(DLG) files.
See page 22 for more Help information.

Fault Segments Tables

This table is used by the Multiple Linear Regression modeling algorithm if faulting is
selected. It lists the X1,Y1 and X2,Y2 endpoints for the line segment(s) making up the
fault trace(s). During gridding, this fault line creates a barrier between grid nodes on one

305
Tables RockWorks2004

side and control points on the other side of the line, so that these points have no influence
on the computation of the node values.
This table is ASCII in format. The default table is named "faults.tab" and it's installed in
the My Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Fault Segments Table. See
page 22 for more Help information

Land Grid Tables

Land Grid Tables Overview

RockWorks contains two tools in the Coords menu that translate Jeffersonian-style
locations (which reference Range, Township, and Section or "RTS" information) to
Cartesian X,Y coordinates. In addition, RockWorks contains two tools in the Map menu
that create section boundary maps or lease maps.
In order to perform the coordinate translation or plot the maps, the program needs a list of
reference coordinates which are stored in a "Land Grid Table."
Where do these reference coordinates come from? RockWorks offers two options:
One option is to purchase RTS land grid information from a commercial source.
This requires that you import that data into the Land Grid Table.
The second option is to create an idealized land grid, which requires only that you
define a single known latitude and longitude coordinate for a corner of a Township
and the number of townships to be listed.
Below is an example of how a Land Grid Table would look when the data is imported or
interpolated.

306
RockWorks2004 Tables

* Each row contains data for a single Section.

* The Sections do not need to be listed in any particular order.
* If Sections are missing from Township, they simply will not be plotted on the final
map.
* No blank cells are permitted. If there is data missing for a particular Section, the
entire row should be removed.
! The Land Grid Table permits listing of only four corner points per Section. If you
imported commercial land grid data that has more points defined for a Section, this
program will pick the four best points possible to represent the Section as a four-sided
shape.
See also: Land Grid Maps (page 123).

Importing Commercial Land Grid Data

If you have purchased land grid data from a commercial vendor and wish to use this data
as a means of spotting wells or leases and/or for creating section or lease maps, this data
307
Tables RockWorks2004

must be imported into the RockWorks Land Grid Table. This import tool can read data
provided by these commercial vendors:
* Petroleum Information / Dwights * TMC * Tobin * White Star
Because the native format of these files is not consistent with the RockWorks Land Grid
Table, these commercial files must be imported into the table prior to mapping, well
spotting, etc.
If you have not purchased commercial data, see Creating Idealized Land Grids.

Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Land Grid Tables / Importing
Commercial Land Grid Data. See page 22 for more Help information.

Interpolating an Idealized Land Grid

If you do not have commercially-available land grid data, it is still possible to create an
"idealized" land grid for mapping or well spotting, given a user-defined longitude and
latitude coordinate. We certainly don’t live in a perfect world, however, so be advised of
these assumptions and limitations with interpolated land grids:
* The program will create data for entire Townships of 36 square Sections each.
Partial Townships and irregular Sections are not possible.
* It will base its coordinate assignments on the longitude and latitude coordinates you
declare for a specific land grid point.
If you have purchased commercial data, see Importing Commercial Land Grid Data.

Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Land Grid Tables / Interpolating
an Idealized Land Grid. See page 22 for more Help information.

Montage Tables
A Montage Table is used to combine multiple RockPlot2D images (saved as RKW files)
into a single image. It is used inside RockPlot2D itself (its Utilities / Montage program)
and in the Grafix / 2D Utilities / Montage program. A Montage Table simply lists the
names of the files to be combined, and the coordinates for the each image's 4 corners.

Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Montage Tables. See page 22 for
more Help information.

308
RockWorks2004 Tables

Polygon Vertices Tables

A Polygon Vertices Table contains a listing of X (Easting) and Y (Northing) coordinates
that identify the boundary vertices of a polygonal area. In RockWorks, you can use this
polygon to filter grid values (Grid / Filter), solid model values (Solid / Filter), and more.
The program is shipped with a default Polygon File called "PolyClip.tab" in the My
Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder. This file is ASCII in format.
! The Polygon Vertices table also contains a digitizing tool for digitizing the X, Y vertices
right into the table, using an electronic digitizer. See Digitizing Data (page 110) for
details.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Polygon Vertices Tables.
See page 22 for more Help information.

X,Y Points Tables

An "XY Points" table is used to define a listing of X,Y coordinate locations to be used to
define the panel endpoints in a RockWorks cross section diagram. While you can
interactively draw cross section traces, the program also allows you to specify a
coordinate listing such as this, should you wish precise locations or run the program in
command (RCL) mode.
The factory default XY Points Table is named "XY.tab". It is stored with the program's
tables in the My Documents\ RockWorks2004\System folder. This table is ASCII in
format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / XY Points Tables. See page
22 for more Help information.

X,Y Pairs Tables

An "XY Pairs" table is used to define a listing of X,Y coordinate locations to be used to
define the panel endpoints in a RockWorks fence diagram. Though you can interactively
draw fence panel locations, the program also allows you to specify a coordinate listing
such as this, should you wish precise locations or run the program in command (RCL)
mode.
The factory default XY Pairs Table is named "X1Y1X2Y2.tab". It is stored with the
program's tables in the My Documents\ RockWorks2004\System folder. This table is
ASCII in format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / XY Pairs Tables. See page
22 for more Help information.
309
Tables RockWorks2004

Density Factors Table

The RockWorks "Density Factors Table" can be used as a reference table for determining
the densities of various rock types, to be used if you wish to compute total density in the
2D and 3D Volume tools.
! This table is designed to offer sample densities only. We encourage you to measure your
own rock density in your project areas, and add them to this listing.
The factory default Density Factors Table is named "Density.tab". It is installed into the
\My Documents\RockWorks2004\System folder. This table is ASCII in format.

See Help / Contents / RockWorks Tables and Libraries / Density Factors Table. See
page 22 for more Help information.

Table Editor Tools

Here is a summary of the tools available in the Table Editors, used to edit the ASCII tables
used in RockWorks.
All of these "mini-editors" are accessible from the listing that’s displayed when you click
on the large Tables tab along the left edge of the main RockWorks window.
File menu
Open: Opens another RockWorks table file into the current Editor. Typically the tables
have a ".tab" file name extension (except for Pattern and Symbol tables). They are ASCII
tab-delimited text in format.

Save: Saves the current table on disk under its current name, or under the name you
enter if Untitled.

Save As: Saves the current table on disk under a new file name that you enter.
Import LogPlot Keys: This command is only available for the Lithology Tables, and is
used to import a listing of keywords from the LogPlot program.

Exit: Exits the current Editor window and closes the current table, returning you to
the previous program menu. If changes have been made to the current file, you will be
prompted whether the save the changes, cancel the changes, or cancel the Exit request.
Edit menu:

310
RockWorks2004 Tables

Cut: Removes from the Editor window any selected text, storing the block of text in
the computer's Clipboard memory.

Copy: Makes a copy of any selected text in the Editor window, storing the copy in
the computer's Clipboard memory.

Paste: Places the text that is in the computer's Clipboard memory into the Editor
window, starting in the cell at the current cursor position. Any existing text in the affected
cells will be overwritten!

Delete: Deletes the contents of the currently-selected cell or group of cells. The text
is not stored in the computer's Clipboard memory.
Columns: This command delivers a pop-up menu that contains tools that perform
operations on the table's columns. These are the same tools available for the main
RockWorks data sheets.
Math: Performs arithmetic operations on the values in a column, using a constant
or another column in the current table.
Increment: Permits you to fill automatically a column in the Editor with numeric
values, from a declared starting value to an ending value at specified increments.
Merge: Combines the contents of two columns in the editor, storing the results in a
third user-selected column.
Rows: This command delivers a pop-up menu that contains tools that perform operations
on the table's rows. These are the same tools available for the main RockWorks data
sheets.
Insert: Inserts one or more blank rows into the current table, defaulting to the row
above the current cursor position, but permitting override.
Delete: Deletes one or more rows from the table, defaulting to that in which the
cursor is currently positioned, but offering override.
Go To: Offers options in a pop-up menu to move the cursor to the first row or last
row in the current table, or to a user-specified row.
Sort: Permits you to sort the rows in the Editor window, based on any column of
text or numbers, ascending or descending order. Many users like to sort the
information in the Keyword Table using Ascending order in the Keyword column
(e.g. alphabetically).
Digitize Points: If you have an electronic digitizer and its driver installed, you can
digitize points right into the Polygon Vertices Editor. See Digitizing Data.
311
Tables RockWorks2004

Refresh Display: Tells the program to redraw the current screen. This can be
helpful if you need to refresh the display for a new pattern, symbol, color, density, or
percent fill selection.
Misc menu:

Plot Polygon: This tool is displayed in the Polygon Vertices editor, with the purpose
of creating a 2D graphic image of the polygon outline. Just click the button and the
polygon will be displayed in the RockPlot2D window, where you can save it for later
appending to other maps or diagrams.

312
RockWorks2004 Reference

Chapter 23 - Reference
Summary of RockWorks File Types
The following is a list of the file types used in RockWorks2004.
User-Created Data Files
ATD: "ATD" files are user-created data files used in the Geological Utilities datasheet
for storing row and column data. They can contain rows and columns of text, numeric
values, symbols, color, line styles, and more. In RockWorks2004 the column titles and
column types are stored in a set of header lines at the top of the file. ATD files are ASCII
Tab-delimited in format. File name extension = [.atd]. See Geological Utilities Datasheet
Overview (page 67) and ATD File Structure Overview (in the Help messages Reference
section) for more information.
BH: "BH" files are user-created data files used in the Borehole Manager for storing
borehole data (locations, downhole surveys, lithology, stratigraphy, geochemistry,
geophysics, water levels, log patterns/symbols/fractures). They are ASCII in format, with
data blocks flagged with specific text. File name extension = [.bh]. See Borehole
Manager Overview (page 31) and Borehole Data File Structure Overview (Help message
Reference section) for details.

Program-Created Model Files

GRD: "Grid" files are created by RockWorks as the result of gridding X,Y,Z data in the
Geological Utilities, or of gridding formation, thickness, water level or other spatial data
in the Borehole Manager. Grid files can also be the result of filtering or importing
existing grid files. Grid files are ASCII in format, with the file name extension [.grd]. See
Gridding Reference and RockWorks Grid File Format in the Help message Reference
section.
MOD: "Solid Model" files are created by RockWorks as the result of modeling X,Y,Z,G
data in the Geological Utilities, or of modeling lithology, interval-data, poing-data, or
fracture data in the Borehole Manager. In addition, stratigraphic surface models can be
stacked and saved as a solid model file. They can also be the result of filtering or
importing existing solid models. They are ASCII in format, with the file name extension
[.mod]. See Solid Modeling Reference and RockWorks Solid Model Format in the Help
message Reference section.

Program-Created Plot Files

RKW: These "plot" files are created in the RockPlot2D window to store all
RockWorks2D graphic images (2D maps and logs, rose and stereonet diagrams, etc.).
313
Reference RockWorks2004

They are binary in nature, and use the file name extension [.rkw]. See Managing
RockPlot2D Files (page 239).
R3D: These are plot files created in the RockPlot3D window to store the information in a
3-dimensional graphic image (3D surfaces and logs, solid models, fence panels, etc.).
These are ASCII in format and contain links to grid models, solid models, bitmap images,
etc. that may be displayed in the RockPlot3D view. The file name extension is [.r3d]. See
Managing R3D Files (page 259).
XML: This is the newer, default plot file format for files created in the RockPlot3D
window to store the information in a 3-dimensional graphic image (3D surfaces and logs,
solid models, fence panels, etc.). These are ASCII in format and contain links to grid
models, solid models, bitmap images, etc. that may be displayed in the RockPlot3D view.
The file name extension is [.xml]. See Managing R3D Files (page 259).
RWR: These are graphic files created by the ReportWorks program, storing the page
layout of inserted RKW images, bitmaps, text, shapes, and more. They are binary in
format. The filename extension is [.rwr]. See Managing ReportWorks Files (page 278).

Program Libraries
PAT: These are Pattern Tables that contain the designs for repeating graphic patterns used
in logs, cross sections, lease maps, etc. RockWorks is shipped with a library of patterns in
the default "rw_pat.pat" table; you can save this file under a different name, delete
patterns, add pattern designs, etc, via the tables listing accessed using the large Tables tab
along the left edge of the main RockWorks program window. Pattern files are binary in
format, with the file name extension [.pat]. See Pattern Tables Overview (page 295).
SYM: These are Symbol Tables that contain the designs for graphic symbols used in
maps, statistical diagrams, logs, etc. RockWorks is shipped with a library of symbols in
the default "rw_sym.sym" table; you can save this file under a different name, delete
symbols, add symbol designs, etc, via the tables listing accessed using the large Tables tab
along the left edge of the main RockWorks program window. Symbol files are binary in
format, with the file name extension [.sym]. See Symbol Tables Overview (page 299).
TAB: These are user-created Tables that can be used in a variety of places in RockWorks:
to define a polygonal area for filtering a grid model, to define specific Z value ranges for
color contour maps, etc. The list of RockWorks Tables can be found by clicking the large
Tables tab along the left edge of the main RockWorks program window. (The program is
shipped with a library of these tables which can be edited to suit your own data.) These
files are ASCII in format, and have the file name extension [.tab]. See Chapter 22 -
RockWorks Tables and System Libraries.

314
RockWorks2004 Reference

Importable, Exported Files

Import Export
Borehole Manager ASCII, Excel, ATD, HIS, CUR ASCII, Excel, ASCII
(data) (RockWorks99), Colog, LogPlot XYZG
DAT *, Spectrum Cone
Penetrometer
Geological Utilities Excel, ASCII, DBF, Delorme ASCII, DBF, Excel
(data) GPL, DXF line endpoints, GSM
Magnetometer/Gradiometer,
Laser Atlanta surveys, Modpath
particle flowpaths, NEIC
Earthquakes, SEG-P1
shotpoints, Land grids
(PI/Dwights, Tobin, Platte
River),
Grid Surfer binary or ASCII, ESRI ASCII XYZ or matrix,
ASCII grid, Geosoft GXF, DXF matrix, ESRI ASCII
RockWorks DOS/7, ASCII, Grid, Geosoft GXF, Ohio
Bitmaps, DEM Automation ENZ,
RockWare RTM,
RockWorks DOS/7, Surfer
ASCII & binary, Vistapro
Solid models ASCII ASCII, NOeSYS, Slicer
Dicer, Voxel Analyst
RockPlot2D BMP, JPG, DXF, ESRI E00, BMP, JPG, DXF, WMF,
ESRI Shapefiles, DLG, AGL EMF, RockPlot3D
RockPlot3D DXF BMP, JPG, AVI, ESRI
Shapefile
ReportWorks BMP, JPG, TIFF, and World BMP, JPG, WMF, EMF
files

* LogPlot DAT files are importable using a free import tool, run as a separate application,
available on the RockWare web site’s Download page.

Help / Contents / Reference / File Formats. See page 22 for more Help information.

315
Reference RockWorks2004

Program Preferences
The General Preferences option that’s available in both the Geological Utilities and
Borehole Manager View menus is used to establish some general operational settings for
the RockWorks program:
Project Folder: Normally, each time you start up the RockWorks program, it will prompt
you for the name of the folder in which you wish to work. The prompt will default to the
last folder in which you were working or, if you're new to the program, the tutorial
samples folder. If you prefer not to see this prompt when you start up the program,
remove the check from this box. Note that you can change the current Project Folder at
any time while you are working with the program simply by clicking in the Project Folder
prompt below the main menu items.
Reminders: Insert a check-mark for the program to display a "Do-you-want-to-save?"
reminder when you close a RockPlot2D graphics window and the image has not been
saved. We recommend that you leave this setting on.
Tutorials: When this setting is turned on (with a check-mark), the program's on-screen
tutorials will be launched automatically each time RockWorks is started. The program is
shipped with this setting turned on; once you have gone through the tutorials, you may
choose to deactivate it. Even if this automatic launching of the tutorials is deactivated,
you can still access the tutorials at any time using the Help / Tutorial command.
Abstracts: Most of the menus within RockWorks contain "abstracts" along the right edge
of the window, which describe the current menu items and often include a small diagram.
These abstracts are read from HTML files either on your computer or on the RockWare
web site. These abstracts may be disabled in order to make the menus appear less
cluttered. But ... please don't expect free technical support if you've disabled the abstracts.
Expand this heading to set the abstract pane size in screen pixels. The default is 300.
! Note: The abstracts, or "local" help, are installed separately from the main
RockWorks program. If you would like to install these menu-based help messages,
look for the separate installation on the RockWare CD you received or on the
RockWare web site. If the abstracts are not installed, the program will look for them
on the web site. If they are not installed locally and you don’t have internet
connection, the abstracts will not be displayed.
Skip Introductory Screen: Insert a check in this box if you want to hide the introductory
"splash" screen that's displayed when you start up RockWorks. This box should be un-
checked if the splash screen is to be displayed. Changes will not take effect until the next
time you start the program. This setting can also be adjusted on the startup screen itself.

316
RockWorks2004 Reference

Create Menu Summaries: Insert a check here to force the program to create a text listing
of each menu item, when you click OK at the bottom of a program window. This would
typically be used in the following situations:
Technical Support: When providing technical support, RockWare employees will
frequently ask the end-user a litany of questions about their menu settings. This can
become quite exasperating for both parties given that some menus may contain up to
600 settings. This new capability can be used to short-circuit this process by allowing
a user to e-mail the menu summary to the RockWare technical support staff.
Audit Trail: When performing analyses, creating models, or generating diagrams it is
often useful to record the menu settings. In the past, this was accomplished by writing
down the salient settings on paper. This new feature can be used to quickly record
everything and to save the file with a suitable name. For example, if you are creating
a stratigraphic fence diagram, you might want to save the menu settings as
"Stratigraphic Fence Diagram Menu Settings.txt".
RCL Developers: The "Show-Variable Names" sub-item will list the variable names
adjacent to each menu item. This provides RCL (RockWorks Command Language)
developers with a list of variables that they may wish to adjust within their script files.
Visible Items: Expand this heading to turn on buttons for some of the main menu items, to
be displayed along the left edge of the data windows.
Menu Dimensions: Expand this heading to set the dimensions for the main program menu
and for the program option windows. Though you can resize either when they're
displayed on the screen, using either the Windows resizing buttons or dragging window
edges with your mouse, when they're re-displayed later they'll default to the sizes defined
here.
Main Menus: Full Screen: The main RockWorks program window will start up in
maximized mode, filling the screen. User Defined. The main program window will
start up at whatever size it was last run in.
Sub-Menus: Many RockWorks tools display an options window prior to processing
data or generating graphics. Here you can set the size for these option windows:
Large, which will be slightly smaller than the main menu window) or Small, 640 x
480 pixels).
Graphic Font Background: Click on this item to define whether the text that is used in
the graphic maps, logs, and diagrams that RockWorks creates should be displayed against
a white background or if the text background should be transparent so that the map, log, or
whatever is below shows through.
Data-Sheets: Expand this heading to adjust the font type, color, and size used in the
Geological Utilities and Borehole Manager datasheets. You can also adjust the
background color of individual datasheets. Click on the Font item to select the font to be
317
Reference RockWorks2004

used in the datasheets. You can also specify font color and size. Activate the Colored
Backgrounds check-box to set the background color for any of the datasheets to a color
other than white; expand this heading to specify the colors for the datasheets.
Negative Values: These options define how RockWorks will handle negative interval-
based (geochemistry) and point-based (geophysical) values within borehole files: process
them as-is, discard them entirely, or replace them with a user-defined value.
Log Compilation: This setting affects the Borehole Manager only.
Automatically Compile Logs: This is the default setting. It means that each time a
program option is selected, whether it be a map, log, cross section, solid model, or
computation, the program will process all of the necessary borehole data into
temporary, background binary files prior to diagram creation. For most data sets, this
goes quite quickly. It also assures that any changes you have made to any of the data
fields will be included in the processing. We DO NOT recommend changing this
setting. However, there are certain circumstances in which this automatic-every-time
background file-creation becomes too time-intensive. In this case, you can opt for
manual compilation of the borehole data.
Manually Compile Logs: If this is selected, the program will not build the temporary
files of your data each time a program option is selected. You should choose this
setting only if you have large amounts of I-Data and P-Data listings and find the
creation of temporary files takes too long to merit being done automatically each time
a program tool is selected.
! Changes you make to the data for any of the boreholes will not be included in
subsequent computations and diagrams unless you click the compile-now button
on the main program window.
Watch for this compile-now button - it will only be displayed if borehole
compilation is set to Manual. This can be a good reminder to re-compile
manually when data editing has occurred.
Tables: RockWorks tables are no longer listed in this menu. Instead, click on the large
Tables tab along the left edge of the main program window to access the table listing.

Help / Contents / Reference / Establishing Your Program Preferences. See page 22

for more Help information.

Program Defaults
The default settings for the program preferences, discussed above, as well as all of the
individual menu items, are stored in a file in the program’s “system” folder (My
Documents\RockWorks2004\System\MenuSettings.ini). This menu settings file is created
the very first time you start up the program, and it is updated each time you use any of the
318
RockWorks2004 Reference

menus in the program or change any default settings. By saving all of the program
defaults on disk, when you exit RockWorks and then start it up again, all of your last
settings will be remembered.
If you re-install RockWorks (see page 4), then this menu settings file would be
overwritten with the factory default settings. To prevent your losing all of your
prefereces, the installation program will (1) look for the menu settings file and if it exists,
(2) offer you the option of saving your existing settings in a backup file. After
installation, you then can use the File / Import / Menu Settings tool to re-load this backup
file and re-establish your previous settings.

Project Dimensions
Use the large Project Dimensions tab, along the left side of the main RockWorks program
window, to establish project boundary coordinates and grid/solid model node spacing that
will apply universally to the current project These settings are stored in a file in the
current project folder (in a file named "RW_PROJECT.TXT"). Though these dimensions
can be overridden on a case by case basis, we generally recommend that you utilize these
dimensions for your grid models, solid models, and diagram annotations for ease and
consistency.
For example, all the project grid models must have the same dimensions and node
densities if you wish to perform any mathematical or filtering operations with them. The
same holds true for solid models.
Compute Dimensions by Scanning Data: This is the first step when working with a
project, after you've entered your data and before you start creating diagrams. You can
specify whether the data to be scanned is stored in the Borehole Manager (either all logs
or only enabled wells) or the Geological Utilities.
Dimensions and Spacing: These boundary coordinates can be hand-entered or can be
determined by the program by clicking on of the scan-data buttons listed above. The X
and Y boundaries represent your map coordinates. The Z boundaries represent elevation
extents. The Spacing settings pertain to grid models and solid models. They represent the
spacing between nodes in the X (west to east), Y (south to north), and Z (elevation)
dimensions.
Show Advanced Properties: If checked, the program will display the items below the
XNodes, YNodes, and ZNodes portion of the menu. Otherwise, these options will not be
displayed.
Clean Data: If checked, the program will perform the following operations when scanning
the borehole or utilities data via the "Compute Dimensions" buttons: (1) Extraneous
decimal places will be removed from the Min/Max/Spacing data. (2) The node spacings
will be rounded to reasonable numbers (e.g. 79.5 might become 100.0 depending upon the
319
Reference RockWorks2004

range of the data). (3) The extents of the project will be increased such that they are
multiples of the node spacing while simultaneously insuring that all points are enclosed by
the new boundaries.
Diagonal Distance: This number represents the distance from the lower southwest corner
to the upper northeast corner. This is a very important calculation because it is used when
computing the dimensions of map symbols, log entities, etc. For example, when the user
specifies that the width of an I-Data column is "5", this translates to 5% of the diagonal
distance (i.e. width = diagonal_distance * 0.05).
Horizontal Margin and Vertical Margin: These margins represent percentages of the
diagonal distance. The Horizontal Margin will extend western, eastern, southern, and
northern boundaries of the scanned data before computing the model dimensions. The
Vertical Margin will extend the upper and the lower boundaries of the scanned data before
computing the model dimensions. You can set these margins to zero if you want the
default boundaries to comply with the extents of the data points (with the Clean Data
caveats listed above.)
Horizontal Resolution: This setting determines the node spacing that is suggested if you
use the scan data buttons at the top of the window. The program computes the average
minimum distance between the control points and then multiplies that number by the
Horizontal Resolution. For example, if the average minimum distance between the control
points is 100 feet, and the Horizontal Resolution is set to 0.5, the x and y node spacing
will be set to 50 feet, resulting in an average of two nodes between control points. If your
node density is too high, increase this value and re-scan using the buttons at the top of the
window.
Vertical Resolution: The z-spacing will be computed by dividing the range of the
elevation data by this number. For example, if the minimum elevation is -1000 and the
maximum elevation is 0, and the vertical resolution is 50, then the z-spacing will be set to
20.
Grid Nodes: The total number of nodes within grid models.
Solid Nodes: The total number of nodes within solid models.
Cell Area: The area of grid cells.
Voxel Volume: The volume of solid model voxels.
Grid Area: Surface area of grid models.
Solid Volume: Volume of solid models.

320
RockWorks2004 Reference

Gridding Reference
Gridding is a process in which scattered, spatially-distributed data can be transformed into
a continuous array or grid of numeric values. Data to be gridded can represent anything
from topographic elevations in a county to ratings of local pizza joints, as long as the
original data points have location coordinates (X and Y) and a measured "Z" value of
some kind. The locations coordinates must be in a Cartesian coordinate system.
You might picture a data grid as a grid of imaginary lines that overlays your source data
points.

In the process of gridding, the program assigns a value to the grid line intersections, called
grid nodes.

A grid file is the computer file of numbers that contains the results of the gridding process.
It contains a listing of the X and Y location coordinates of the regularly-spaced grid nodes
and the extrapolated Z value at each node.
Within RockWorks, you can perform "basic" gridding of generic X,Y,Z data for 2D and
3D maps using the Geological Utilities Map / Grid-Based Map command. You can also
create grid models of stratigraphic surfaces and aquifer surfaces in the Borehole Manager
(Stratigraphy and Hydrology menus).

321
Reference RockWorks2004

The program offers several methods to do this interpolation of your data. Each operates
differently, and each has strengths and differences. See "Gridding Methods" below. Grid
files can also result from other RockWorks Grid, Volume, and Solid menu tools.

Gridding Methods
There are several methods offered to interpolate your data.
Closest Point: Each grid node is simply assigned the value of the closest control point.
Directional Weighting: Uses Inverse-Distance with a directional weighting bias.
Distance to Point: Each grid node is assigned a value that represents its distance, in your
X,Y map units, to the closest control point.
Inverse-Distance: A common method using a weighted average approach to compute
node values.
Kriging: Its strength is in identifying patterns across the data, including directional trends.
Multiple Linear Regression: Simple distance weighting is applied to a regression analysis.
Trend Surface Polynomial: It finds regional trends in your data.
Trend Surface Residuals: It determines local differences from regional trends.
Triangulation (grid-based): It uses a network of triangles to determine grid node values.
Hybrid: Estimates a surface using two or more different gridding methods, with an
option to weight the methods differently.

Help / Contents / Reference / Gridding Reference / Gridding Methods. See page 22

for more Help information.

General Gridding Options

Polynomial Enhancement: This option works nicely if your data has any regional trend.
If activated the program will fit a polynomial surface to your data and compute the
residuals for each control point (representing the difference between the source z-value
and the polynomial-computed z-value). The program will then grid the residuals using the
selected gridding method (Triangulation, Inverse-Distance, etc.). The residuals grid and
the polynomial grid are then added together.
If you turn on the polynomial enhancement, you may select Automatic to have the
program compute the best-fitting polynomial for your data. Or, you can select the order of
the polynomial yourself by clicking in one of the remaining radio buttons.
For a summary of how well each polynomial order fits your data, you can run, separately,
a Trend Surface Report (Geological Utilities Grid menu, page 184).
Declustering

322
RockWorks2004 Reference

The Declustering settings in the Surface Modeling Options window tell the program how
you want to deal with duplicate or clustered points. Here's how the process works:
Prior to modeling, the program will lay an imaginary "pre-grid" over the data points, at a
resolution you declare. If you set the resolution to "250," for example, the pre-grid will be
comprised of 250 cells by 250 cells.
For each pre-grid cell, the program locates any data points within it. If a single data point
lies within the cell, then the cell is assigned that point's z-value. If more than one point lie
within the cell, then the cell is assigned an average of all of the z-values. Any pre-grid
cells with no data points are discarded. It is the pre-gridded data that is then sent on to the
surface modeling routine.
This method works nicely if you have data sampled along lines or in clusters, such as
along seismic lines.
Logarithmic Gridding
The Logarithmic gridding option can be helpful for creating grid models of highly
anomalous data. If activated, here’s how it works:
The control point z-values are converted to natural logarithms. If a control point has a
value less than or equal to zero, the logarithmic z-value will be set to zero.
A grid model, based on the logarithmic data, is interpolated.
The nodes within the grid model are then converted back to the original units by
exponentiation.
The control point z-values are converted back to their original units by
exponentiation.
Data sets that contain large "outliers" (i.e. values that are far beyond the typical range of
data) are typically problematic when the goal is to highlight these anomalous regions. By
computing and gridding the natural logarithm of the control point values, the regional
effects of these outliers is more localized as shown by the following diagram. The net
effect is to highlight anomalous regions (e.g. contaminant plumes).
Note: The new logarithmic capability should be restricted to data sets that contain
geochemical or geophysical data with grossly anomalous data points. It is not well suited
for surface elevation data due to the fact that these data sets typically include negative z-
values (i.e. sub-sea elevations).
High-Fidelity
When selected, this option will "tweak" the final grid model (after the smoothing option
has been applied) such that the contours will do a better job of honoring the control points,
regardless of the algorithm or the grid smoothing (below). The capability uses a recursive
algorithm that grids the residuals, adds them back into the original model, and repeats the
process until the cumulative error drops below a threshold.
Smooth Grid

323
Reference RockWorks2004

When activated, this tool averages the Z-values in the grid model based on a user declared
"filter" size. The smoother can be run 1 or more times, to get rid of spurious "noise"
within the grid model and bring out regional trends. (This is also available as a filter
within the Grid / Filter menu.) Expand this heading to establish:
Filter Size: This setting defines how many adjacent nodes should be used when
computing the average (smoothed) Z-value for each grid node. If you enter "1", then
each node will be assigned the average of itself and the 8 nodes immediately
surrounding it, 1 layer deep. If you enter "2", the node will be assigned the average of
itself and the 24 nodes immediately surrounding it, 2 layers deep. When in doubt,
enter "1".
Iterations: Enter the number of times the entire model should be run through the
smoother.

Help / Contents / Reference / Gridding Reference / General Gridding Options. See

page 22 for more Help information.

Grid Model Dimensions

The grid Dimensions options are used to establish the number of nodes to be created in the
grid model and the boundary coordinates of the model. These options are available:
Hardwire Project Dimensions: Choose this dimensioning option if the grid dimensions
are to be taken from the current Project Dimensions settings (see page 318). This is
generally a good idea, particularly in projects where multiple models are going to be
created and may need to undergo comparison, mathematical, and filtering operations (in
which all models must be dimensioned the same). Expand this heading if you wish to
view or reset these settings.
Adjust Project Dimensions: Click on this item to view and/or reset the project's
dimensions. These are the same settings you can access using the large Project
Dimensions tab along the left edge of the RockWorks program window.
Variable (Data-Specific) Dimensions: Choose this dimensioning option if the grid
dimensions are to be established based on the current data being modeled. This could be
an option for modeling a subset of the entire project or for testing the effect of different
node densities without having to reset the entire project's dimensions. Expand this
heading to select the variable options for Grid Dimensions.
Average Minimum Distance: Choose this option to set grid dimension defaults based
the average minimum distance between control points or boreholes. Expand this item
to enter the "scaler" to be multiplied by this distance.
For example, if you choose Average Minimum Distance and enter a scaler of "0.5"
the grid node spacing will default to one-half (0.5) the average control point distance,
delivering an average of 2 nodes between control points. If you enter a scaler of "0.1"
the grid node spacing will default to one-tenth (0.1) the average control point
distance, resulting in an average of 10 nodes between control points.
324
RockWorks2004 Reference

This works well for densely-spaced data. This will create very coarse grid models
with sparse data. The boundary defaults will correspond to the outermost control
point locations.
Manual: Choose this option to set grid dimension defaults based on a constant value
you enter. For example, if you enter 50, the grid will have 50 nodes from north to
south and 50 nodes from east to west. The boundary defaults will correspond to the
outermost control point locations.
The number of nodes you declare will be modified if the map area is not square. In
trying to keep node spacing as close to equal as possible along both axes, the program
will reduce the number of nodes created along the area's short axis. If you request
dimension confirmation, below, you will have the opportunity to view and confirm
the program-recommended node spacing prior to model generation.
The more nodes you specify, the denser the model. The more computations the
program needs to do, the longer the time required to create the model. Denser is not
always better. You might create less-dense models on trial runs.
Current: Choose this option to have grid dimensions set to the same boundary
coordinates and spacing as were used in the last gridding session - the program will
not scan the source data to compute new boundaries and spacing. This can be handy if
you are creating successive grid models and you want them all to have the exact same
boundary coordinates and node spacing.
! This can be dangerous, however, if you switch projects. The program may
recommend grid coordinates that have no relation to the current project.
Be sure the Confirm Dimensions option is checked if you want to view/override the
program-computed dimensions before gridding begins.

If this window is displayed, you can adjust any of the coordinate boundary or spacing
settings.

325
Reference RockWorks2004

RockWorks Grid File Format

RockWorks stores grid and solid model files in an ASCII (text) format. Note that all real
number coordinate and Z-values are listed in the files in scientific notation.
A summary of the contents is listed here:
The first line lists the X-coordinate of the westernmost grid node.
The second line lists the Y-coordinate of the southernmost grid node.
The third line lists the number of nodes that are listed for the X-axis (west to east),
and the fourth lists the number of nodes listed for the Y-axis (south to north).
The fifth and sixth lines list the spacing, in map units, of the grid nodes along the X-
axis and Y-axis, respectively.
Starting in the seventh line, the Z-values for the grid nodes are listed, starting with the
grid node in the southwestern corner of the grid and proceeding to the north. When
the top of that first column of nodes is reached, the listing proceeds with the second
column, starting with the southernmost node and listing upward. A Z-value will be
listed for each node in the GRD file.

Help / Contents / Reference / File Formats / RockWorks Grid File Format. See page
22 for more Help information.

Solid Modeling Reference

Solid modeling is a true 3-dimensional gridding process, in which a solid modeling
algorithm is used to extrapolate G values for a fixed X (Easting), Y (Northing), and Z
(elevation) coordinates. The G values can represent geochemical concentrations,
geophysical measurements, or any other downhole or subsurface quantitative value.
The Geological Utilities Solid / Model tool creates solid models from X, Y, Z, and G data
listed in the main datasheet or in an external ASCII file. The Borehole Manager
Lithology, I-Data, P-Data, and Fractures menu tools (Profile, Section, Fence and
Model) create solid models from lithology, interval-sampled, point-sampled, or fracture
data in the respective data tabs.
Once it knows the dimensions of your study area, the program divides it into three-
dimensional cells or "voxels," their dimensions automatically or user-determined. Each
voxel is defined by its corner points or node. Each node is assigned the appropriate X, Y,
and Z location coordinates according to its relative placement within the study area. A
fourth variable, "G", which can represent grade of ore, concentration of pollutants, etc., is
estimated based on the G value of the given data points.

326
RockWorks2004 Reference

There are several methods offered to do this interpolation of your data. Each operates
differently, and each has strengths and differences. These are discussed under Solid
Modeling Methods below.

Help / Contents / Reference / Solid Model Reference. See page 22 for more Help
information.

Solid Modeling Methods

There are several methods offered to perform the 3-dimensional interpolation of your data.
Each operates differently, and each has strengths and differences.
Closest Point: The most basic solid modeling method, in which the value of a voxel node
is set to be equal to the value of the nearest data point.
Distance to Point: This method assigns each solid model node a value equal to the
distance to the closest control point. The distance is recorded in your X,Y,Z units
Inverse Distance: Isotropic, Anisotropic, or Weighted. This method assigns a voxel node
value based on the weighted average of neighboring data points, either all points or those
directionally located, using fixed or variable weighting exponents.
Isotropic: The program will use all of the available data points when computing a
voxel node’s value, useful when modeling uniformly distributed data in non-
stratiform environments. Weighting exponent = “2”. Anisotropic: Instead of using
all available control points for the Inverse-Distance modeling, the program will look
for the closest point in each 90-degree sector around the node, useful for modeling
drill-hole based data in stratiform deposits. Weighting exponent = “2”. Weighting:
Uses all data points, but weights them differently based on their horizontal v. vertical
positioning from node. Useful for controlling the lenticularity of the model.
Weighting exponent = user-declared.
Directional Weighting: This functions like the Inverse Distance method except that you
can specify a trend direction and strength, and the program will vary the weighting
exponent so that points along the trend influence the node more than closer points
perpendicular to the trend.
Horizontal Biasing: This method functions like the Inverse Distance method except that
the user can define a vertical distance from each voxel node beyond which points will no
longer be used in computing the node value

327
Reference RockWorks2004

Horizontal Lithoblending. This method should be used for creating lithology solid models
(for Profiles, Fences, and Models) in the Borehole Manager

Help / Contents / Reference / Solid Model Reference / Solid Modeling Methods. See
page 22 for more Help information.

General Solid Modeling Options

Solid Model Declustering
The Declustering option in the Create New Solid Model settings is a solid modeling
model pre-processing option, applicable to all solid modeling methods except for the
Horizontal Lithoblending. If activated, Declustering reduces the number of control points
sent to the solid modeling algorithm by "snapping" them to the closest node (averaging
them with other points close to the node), and then modeling the new, smaller set of
averaged points. When modeling densely-sampled downhole geophysical or geochemical
data, this can speed up the processing tremendously, with little degradation of data.
Solid Model Stratigraphy Bounding
The Stratabound option is used to constrain a solid model between a user-specified upper
and lower stratigraphic surface. Nodes that lie outside the surfaces will be assigned a
constant, user-defined value. This tool requires that the surface model(s) to be used to
constrain the model already exist. You can activate either an upper surface, lower surface,
or both; browse for each grid model to be used as the filter. If Ignore Data is activated,
only control points that lie within the unit will be used in interpolating the solid model
nodes within the unit. If unchecked, all source data will be used in interpolation, even
points that lie outside the unit. Use the Node Values Outside Unit setting to enter an
integer or decimal value to assign to the solid model voxel nodes that lie outside the
stratigraphic unit. Note that you can use this setting to filter a solid model below the
ground surface by using the upper filter only.
Logarithmic
The Logarithmic modeling option can be helpful for creating solid models of highly
anomalous data. If activated, here’s how it works: The control point G-values are
converted to natural logarithms. If a control point has a value less than or equal to zero,
the logarithmic G-value will be set to zero. A solid model, based on the logarithmic data,
is interpolated. The nodes within the model are then converted back to the original units
by exponentiation. The control point G-values are converted back to their original units
by exponentiation.
Data sets that contain large "outliers" (i.e. values that are far beyond the typical range of
data) are typically problematic when the goal is to highlight these anomalous regions. By
computing and gridding the natural logarithm of the control point values, the regional
effects of these outliers is more localized as shown by the following diagram. The net
effect is to highlight anomalous regions (e.g. contaminant plumes).

328
RockWorks2004 Reference

High-Fidelity
When selected, this option will "tweak" the final solid model (after the smoothing option
has been applied) such that the node values will do a better job of honoring the control
points, regardless of the algorithm or the smoothing. This is accomplished by modeling
the residuals, adding the residuals model to the initial model, and then overwriting the
node values with the original control point values. Unlike the grid version of high fidelity,
this is not an iterative algorithm (too slow).
Smooth Model
When activated, this tool averages the G-values in the solid model based on a user
declared "filter" size. The smoother can be run 1 or more times, to get rid of spurious
"noise" within the solid model and bring out regional trends. (This is also available as a
filter within the Solid / Filter menu.) Expand this heading to establish horizontal and
vertical filter sizes, and iterations or number of times to run the smoother.

Help / Contents / Reference / Solid Model Reference / General Solid Modeling

Options. See page 22 for more Help information.

Filtering X, Y, Z and/or G Data

The Filter Points option in the Create New Solid Model settings is used to establish data
limits for the X, Y, and Z coordinates (to model a spatial subset), or for the G data to be
modeled. The program will ignore data that lies outside the declared range(s), omitting
that data from the solid modeling process.

Help / Contents / Reference / Solid Model Reference / Filtering X, Y, Z and/or G

Data for specifics. See page 22 for more Help information.

Solid Model Resolution

The Model Dimensions options are used to establish the boundary coordinates and the
number of nodes to be created in the solid model.
The more nodes you specify, the denser the model. Remember that a 10-node x 10-node x
10-node model (very low resolution) will contain 1,000 nodes; a 50-node x 50-node x 50-
node model will contain 125,000 nodes; and a 100 x 100 x 100 model will contain 1
million nodes. The more computations the program needs to do, the longer the time
required to create the model. Denser is not always better. You might create less-dense
models on trial runs.
These settings are offered:
Hardwire Project Dimensions: Choose this dimensioning option if the solid model
dimensions are to be taken from the current Project Dimensions settings (see page 318).
This is generally a good idea, particularly in projects where multiple models are going to
be created and may need to undergo comparison, mathematical, and filtering operations
329
Reference RockWorks2004

(in which all models must be dimensioned the same). Expand this heading if you wish to
view or reset these settings.
Adjust Project Dimensions: Click on this item to view and/or reset the project's
dimensions. These are the same settings you can access using the large Project
Dimensions tab along the left edge of the RockWorks program window. Click here
for more information.
Variable (Data-Specific) Dimensions: Choose this dimensioning option if the solid
model dimensions are to be established based on the current data being modeled. This
could be an option for modeling a subset of the entire project or for testing the effect of
different node densities without having to reset the entire project's dimensions. Expand
this heading to select the variable options for Solid Dimensions.
Horizontal: Type here the number of nodes to be created from west to east and from
north to south. The boundary defaults will correspond to the outermost control point
locations.
The number of nodes you declare will be modified if the map area is not square. In
trying to keep node spacing as close to equal as possible along both axes, the program
will reduce the number of nodes created along the area's short axis. If you request
dimension confirmation, below, you will have the opportunity to view and confirm
the program-recommended node spacing prior to model generation.
Vertical: Type here the number of nodes to be created vertically in the model. This
axis can be set to a different density that the X and Y (Horizontal) axes, above. The
boundary defaults will correspond to the lowest and highest control point elevations.
If you request dimension confirmation, below, you will have the opportunity to view
and confirm the program-recommended node spacing prior to model generation.
Insert a check in the Confirm Dimensions box to request display of program-computed
model dimensions and node spacing prior to modeling. At that time you can view and
override the defaults.

330
RockWorks2004 Reference

If this window is displayed, you can adjust any of the coordinate boundary or spacing
settings.

Help / Contents / Reference / Solid Model Reference / Solid Model Resolution. See
page 22 for more Help information.

Stratigraphy Model versus Stratigraphy Solids

When you use the Borehole Manager's Stratigraphy / Model tool to create a 3D display
of all of your stratigraphic units, what RockWorks creates is a series of grid surfaces with
sides for display in RockPlot3D. The benefits to this type of display and modeling are the
nice looking surfaces, the ability to turn individual surfaces on and off in RockPlot3D, the
ability to edit individual surfaces, and more.

331
Reference RockWorks2004

Stratigraphy Model: Stacked Grid Surfaces

RockWorks also offers the option of building a stratigraphic solid model of the stacked
surfaces. This is done with the Save Model checkbox in the Stratigraphy / Model tool.
These stratigraphic solids are true solid models that represent the 2-dimensional grids
stacked on each other, depositionally, from the bottom up. Stratigraphic solids have three
fixed dimensions: X (Easting), Y (Northing), and Z (elevation), with a variable G-value
which represents stratigraphy type as an integer. These formation “G” values are declared
in the Stratigraphy Table.

332
RockWorks2004 Reference

Stratigraphy Solid
Like geochemical or geophysical solid models, stratigraphic solid models are just files that
contain listings of X, Y, Z, and G numbers. Unlike solid models which contain real
number G values, stratigraphic models usually contain integer G values that correspond to
the formations. You might picture a stratigraphic solid as a stack of cubes. In the cartoon
below, the 3-dimensional cells, or voxels, are color-coded based on their G-value or
stratigraphy type. The model is constructed by “inserting” the 2-dimensional grid models
of each stratigraphic layer (top AND base), from the bottom up.

The stratigraphic solid can be displayed in RockPlot3D using the Geological Utilities
Solid / Model tool, selecting Use Existing Model and identifying the .MOD file name.
You should choose All Voxels as the diagram type. When displayed in RockPlot3D, you
can double-click on the Solid Model item to set the Color Scheme to the Stratigraphy
333
Reference RockWorks2004

Table from which the model was created. Stratigraphy solids have the same file structure
as regular geochemistry / geophysical / fracture solid models.
With the introduction of RockPlot3D for visualizing multiple grid models as surfaces in
3D, users may not use stratigraphic solids as much as they did in RockWorks99.

Help / Contents / Reference / Solid Model Reference / Stratigraphy Models versus

Stratigraphy Solids. See page 22 for more Help information.

2-Dimensional Map Layers

RockWorks offers the following "layers" for two dimensional maps. A layer is activated
if a check-mark is displayed in its check box. To access the layer's settings, expand its
sub-topics by clicking on its "+" button.
Bitmaps: Displays an image in the background of the other map layers. BMP, JPG, GIF,
TIFF, WMF, EMF, and PNG images are supported.
Symbols: Illustrates the sample sites in the main data sheet with map symbols.
Labels: Plots labels for the sample sites, usually used with the symbols layer.
Contours: Plots lines representing the distribution of "z-values" (elevation, geochemistry,
etc.) in the study site.
Color-filled intervals: Plots solid color-filled regions representing the distribution of z-
values in the study site.
Labeled-Cells: (Available only for grid-based maps.) Draws a grid of lines corresponding
to the grid model nodes, and fills the cells with labels for the node values.
Borders: Plots border tick marks and coordinates labels, and axis titles.
Triangulation Network: (Available only for EZ maps, if contours or color filled intervals
are selected.) Displays the network of triangles constructed by the program to build the
map contours.

Help / Contents / Reference / 2-D Map Options. See page 22 for more Help
information.

2D Profile and Section Options

Profile and Section Color Scheme Settings: The Color Options that are available for all of
RockWorks solid model Profile and Section tools are used to define how you want the
solid model G value represented.
2D Lithology Legend Settings: These control the appearance of the legend to the rock
types and colors/patterns as listed in the active Lithology Table.

334
RockWorks2004 Reference

2D Stratigraphy Legend Settings: This controls the appearance of the legend to the
stratigraphic formations included in the diagram, which displays names and
colors/patterns as listed in the active Stratigraphy Table.

See Help / Contents / Reference / Profile and Section Options. See page 22 for more
Help information.

3-Dimensional Image Settings

3D Surface Map Layers

RockWorks offers the following "layers" for three-dimensional surface maps. A layer is
activated if a check-mark is displayed in its check box. To access the layer's settings,
expand its sub-topics by clicking on its "+" button.
Flat Surface: Displays grid models in 3D as a flat surface.
Boolean Colors: Sets the color scheme specific to Boolean or “true/false” models.
Perimeter: Includes a solid line perimeter around the flat or 3D grid surface.
3D Legends
Lithology Legend: Displays lithology keywords and colors, taken directly from the
current Lithology Table.
Stratigraphy Legend: Displays formation names and colors, taken directly from the
current Stratigraphy Table.
I-Data or P-Data Legend: Displays G values contained in the geochemistry, geotechnical,
or geophysical solid model and the colors used to represent them.
Each of these items can be turned on/off and modified once the diagram is displayed in the
RockPlot3D window.

335
Reference RockWorks2004

Plotting a “Reference Cage”

Use the Reference Cage item to include in the 3D diagram a "reference cage" noting X, Y,
and elevation coordinates. Note that many of the cage items can also be adjusted when
displayed in the RockPlot3D window.
Plot Panels: Fills the activated panels with solid color. Note that you can turn the solid
panels on and off in the RockPlot3D display. You can also adjust the panel transparency
there.
Plot Lines: Displays reference lines within the panels.
Plot Labels: Includes labels along the reference cage boundaries.
North, South, West, East, Base, Top: Plots the respective set of cage items (panels, lines,
labels). Note that these can also be turned on and off within RockPlot3D.
Dimensions: Establishes whether the reference cage dimensions are to be determined
automatically by the program, or entered manually by the user.
Project Dimensions: Choose this if the reference items are to be plotted at the
boundaries currently defined in the Project Dimensions window (page 318).
Adjust Project Dimensions: Click on this item to view and/or reset the project's
dimensions. These are the same settings you can access using the large Project
Dimensions tab along the left edge of the RockWorks program window.
Automatic: Choose this option to have the program set automatically the reference
cage dimensions, based on the extents of the 3D diagram.
Manual: Choose this option to enter the dimensions by hand.
X-Axis: Set the minimum and maximum coordinate along the X axis for the
reference cage, and the spacing (in these same units) for the grid lines.
Y-Axis: set the minimum and maximum coordinate along the Y axis for the
reference cage, and the spacing (in these same units) for the grid lines.
Z-Axis: Set the minimum and maximum elevation coordinate for the reference
cage, and the spacing (in these same units) for the grid lines.Reference Cage:
Labels X, Y, and elevation coordinates, with optional reference lines.

Help / Contents / Reference / 3D Image Options. See page 22 for more Help
information.

File Structures

ATD File Structure

The Geological Utilities data files (.ATD) are stored in an ASCII text format. They
contain rows and columns of entries, with columns separate by <Tab> characters. ("ATD"
= "ASCII Tab-Delimited").
336
RockWorks2004 Reference

Unlike RockWorks99 ATD files, RockWorks2004 ATD files contain a header block at the
top of the file that lists the column heading names and column types. This is why
RockWorks2004 no longer uses TEM files, as RockWorks99 did.
The Geological Utilities datasheet can contain up to 99 columns.
It’s probably easiest to see the ATD file layout by opening an ATD file in a text editor or
word processor. That will show you how the header is laid out, with its "tags", and how
the data block is laid out in tab-separated columns.

Help / Contents / Reference / File Formats / ATD File Format. See page 22 for more
Help information.

Borehole Data File Structure

The Borehole Manager data files (.BH) are stored in an ASCII text format. Each
borehole’s data is stored in the project folder in a separate [.bh] file, with the borehole’s
name serving as the file name, and the file name extension set to ".bh". The different data
types for each borehole are stored in blocks within the BH file. Only the Location block is
required.

Help / Contents / Reference / File Formats / Borehole Data File Structure. See page
22 for more Help information.

Exported Borehole Data Structure

The Borehole Manager contains several export tools used to organize the different data
types of all of the boreholes in a manageable and transportable way. The output layout of
the 10 exported files or spreadsheets that result from the File / Export / From Borehole
Manager / ASCII or Excel functions can be found in the following help topic:

Help / Contents / Reference / File Formats / Exported Borehole Data structure. See
page 22 for more Help information.

Troubleshooting
Please refer to the RockWorks Help menu for “live links” to our web site where you can
make use of the extensive support pages for answers to your RockWorks questions.
www.rockware.com
email: [email protected]
tel: 303-278-3534

337
Reference RockWorks2004

Notes

338
RockWorks2004 Glossary

Glossary
Abstracts: Abstracts are displayed along the right side of the main RockWorks menu and most of
the program’s dialog boxes. They are used to summarize the function of the currently-highlighted
menu or dialog box item. This information is read from HTML files read either from the RockWare
web site or from the RockWorks program folder on your local drive, if you installed them. Should
you wish to disable the display of the abstracts, remove the check-mark from the View / General
Preferences / Abstracts option.
Active borehole: In the Borehole Manager, the check-boxes beside the borehole names are used to
"enable" or "activate" the borehole. The data listed for active boreholes will be included in gridding
and solid modeling processes; the data for inactive boreholes will not. Active boreholes will be
displayed in section, profile, and fence diagram panel-picking windows; inactive boreholes will not.
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange file. ASCII files are also referred to
as "text" files.
ATD Files: RockWorks stores data in the Geological Utilities datasheet in an ASCII (text) tab-
delimited format, with the file name extension ".atd." These files contain rows and columns of data,
with tab characters separating the columns.
Since RockWorks no longer uses "templates" (TEM files, used in RockWorks99 and older versions)
to lay out the column titles and styles, this information is stored in a header block within the ATD
file. ATD files used in RockWorks99, RockWorks98, Stratos98 can be opened into newer versions
of RockWorks. Once converted into a new RockWorks format, however, they cannot be re-opened
in the older software without manually stripping out the header lines. Be sure, then, to rename your
converted files, and store them in a new project folder.

Borehole Manager: One of two data windows in RockWorks2004, the Borehole Manager is used
to enter subsurface borehole data: well locations, stratigraphy, lithology, geochemistry / geophysical
/ geotechnical measurements, factures, and water levels, for use in generating strip logs, cross
sections, solid models, fence diagrams, and surface models. It supports vertical and deviated
boreholes. Each borehole is stored in a separate "BH" file in the current project folder. The
Borehole Manager contains its own set of program tools and menus at the top of the window.
RockWorks99 users can import their ATD and linked files (LIT, HIS, CUR, ZON) into the Borehole
Manager.

Column Separator: See Delimiter.

Central Meridian: In order to perform a coordinate conversion between longitude/latitude and
UTM meters or feet, the "central meridian" for the UTM "zone" must be selected. The Central
Meridian you choose will determine the output longitude (Easting) coordinate range. Typically, the
chosen Central Meridian should be as close to the center of the longitude coordinate range as
possible. The accuracy of the translation is greatest within a single UTM zone and decreases the
farther each zone is from the zone of the selected Central Meridian. The Central Meridians range
from -177 western longitude (UTM Zone 1) to 177 eastern longitude (UTM Zone 60).

Decimals: When specifying decimal places consider the accuracy of your original data. For
example, if you're recording lithology depths based on drill cuttings and counting rods, even one

339
Glossary RockWorks2004

decimal place is not justified by the measurement technique. On the other hand, decimal degrees for
longitude and latitude locations should be carried out to 6 decimal places.
Delaunay Contouring: To construct contours from your spreadsheet data, the Geological Utilities
Map / EZ-Map program does not construct a "grid model" as is done in the Grid-Based Map option.
Instead, EZ-Map constructs a series of triangles with a data point at each vertex. The triangles are
constructed so that the angles are as close as possible to equi-angular. (The program can display this
triangle network as a map layer, see Network.) Contour lines are then interpolated between the
triangle vertices and connected together to form the map. This process has been referred to as "dip-
contouring" by some geologists.
Because it by-passes the gridding step, this mapping method operates the most quickly. In
addition, it honors all of the data values; many people prefer this method of contouring since
there is no loss of data integrity as a result of gridding.
This method can be used only for 2D maps since 3D surface mapping requires the generation of
a data grid. Also, non-grid triangulation can leave blank areas in the map where there are no
control points, unless you activate the "edge points." Contours tend to be very angular.
If Interpolate edge points is activated, this will force the program to insert points along the
edge of the study area so that the contours can be drawn to the edge. It does this by inserting 5
points at equal spacing along the map boundaries (with one in each corner) and assigning them
a value using the Inverse-Distance squared method. These new points can then be used when
drawing the triangle network, assuring that all edges and corners are included within the
network.
Delimiter: A "delimiter" is the character that separates columns within an ASCII file. For example,
some programs use the space character (#32) to separate data columns while others use tab (#9)
characters.

Easting: Eastings (also called the "X" coordinate) represent the east/west dimension within a
Cartesian (xy) coordinate system. Eastings to the east of the origin are entered as positive numbers.
Eastings to the west of the origin are entered as negative numbers.
Note: X,Y,Z,TD,thickness,etc. data must all be in the same units (e.g. don't mix meters, feet,
degrees,etc.).

Geological Utilities: One of two data windows in RockWorks2004, the Geological Utilities
datasheet is used to enter non-borehole data: simple XYZ or XYZG, hydrochemistry data for Piper
and Stiff plots, drawdown, survey mapping, lineation/planar data, to name a few. The Geological
Utilities has its own set of program tools and menus at the top of the window. The Geological
Utilities datasheet saves its row-and-column files in an ATD file format (ASCII Tab-Delimited).
Unlike RockWorks99, the column styles and names are stored in a header block in the ATD file;
TEM files are no longer used. RockWorks99 files can be opened into the RockWorks2004
datasheet, and any information in an associated TEM file will be stored in a header block in the file.
Grid Model: A grid model or grid file is the computer file of numbers that contains the results of
the gridding process. It contains a listing of the X and Y location coordinates of the regularly-spaced
grid nodes and the extrapolated Z value at each node. RockWorks grid models are stored in an
ASCII format. Grid models should have a “.grd” file name extension.
A grid model is a numeric representation of a surface, be it elevations in your study area, formation
thickness, or BTU values in a coal seam, to name a few.

340
RockWorks2004 Glossary

From the Geological Utilities data sheet, use the Map / Grid-Based Map tool to create and display
grid models from XYZ data for display as 2D or 3D images. Grid models are also created for
drawdown surfaces (Hydrology / Drawdown Surface), for lineation densities (Dirstat / Lineation
Gridding), and for volume computations (Volume menu).
From the Borehole Manager, grid models are created when you display stratigraphic surfaces,
isopachs, profiles, etc. (Stratigraphy menu) and water level surfaces Aquifers menu).
Grid models can be summarized and manipulated in a variety of ways using the Geological Utilities
Grid menu tools. Use Grid / Filter to filter grid models, Grid / Edit to edit model nodes, Grid /
Math to perform mathematical operations, and Grid / Import to import grid models from other
sources . Statistical reports, node frequency diagrams, and observed v. computed XY plots are also
available (Grid / Statistics).
You can also extract grid models from solid models (Solid / Convert / Extract Grid).

Hang Section on Datum: This is an option in striplog sections (Striplogs / Multi-Log Section)
and stratigraphic hole to hole cross sections and fences (Stratigraphy / Section / Straight and
Stratigraphy / Fence / Straight) whereby the entire section is reset to an elevation of 0 at the top of
a user-selected formation. This can be used to step back in time to the structure at that unit's
deposition.

Hole to Hole Cross Section: A hole to hole cross section is created by selecting individual
boreholes, in any order, that are to be displayed from left to right in the section.

341
Glossary RockWorks2004

Hole to hole sections can be created in the Striplogs menu, to display logs only, and they can
be created in the Lithology, Stratigraphy, I-Data, P-Data, Aquifers, and Fractures menus to
display their models' panels, with optional logs.
In hole to hole sections, the distance between logs is proportional to the physical distances
between the boreholes on the ground. (This differs from multi-log profiles, in which the
distance between logs is determined by their perpendicular projection onto a single profile
line.) Because the hole to hole trace can contain multiple segments that differ in direction, it’s
impossible to project a 3-dimensional log, so all boreholes are plotted as vertical.
In RockWorks, drawing the hole to hole section lines is easily done on a plan-view display of
the borehole locations. The program will remember the traces from one session to the next
within the current project.
Hole to Hole Fence Diagram: These fences are not created from interpolated surface models.
Instead, the stratigraphic units are correlated with straight lines between like units in the boreholes
on either end of the fence panel. These require that the fence panels are drawn between borehole
locations. The panel endpoints will be snapped to coordinates of the closest borehole. These panels
can honor inclined boreholes.

342
RockWorks2004 Glossary

Comparison of fence diagram based on interpolated fence diagrams versus well-to-well fences:
Interpolated Fences Well to Well Fences
Method Contacts based on interpolated Contacts based on linear correlations
surface models for all boreholes. between adjacent boreholes.
Appearance Smooth correlations Angular-looking correlations
Panel Locations Panels may be placed at arbitrary Panels must connect borehole
endpoints. locations.

Interpolated Fence Diagram: These are created from stacked grid models of the different
stratigraphic layers, displayed in 3D as if one or more slices were taken from anywhere in the
project area. The slices or fence panels do not need to be aligned with borehole locations. See Hole
to Hole Fence Diagram, above, for a comparison.
I-Data: This is the term we use to describe quantitative downhole data that was sampled at depth
intervals. This might include geochemical measurements (concentrations, assays), percents (soil
types), many geotechnical readings, etc. In earlier versions of RockWorks, this was referred to as
"Geochemistry" data, but it certainly is not limited to that. I-Data is entered into the Intervals (I-
Data) tabs in the Borehole Manager, where there are 249 columns available for different sampled
materials. I-Data can be represented on log diagrams as bargraphs (2D) or cylinders (3D). I-Data
can be modeled into a 3D solid model using the I-Data menu tools and displayed graphically as a
Profile (single slice), Section (multi-paneled profile), Fence (3D panels), 3D solid or isosurface
diagram, and Plan map (horizontal slice). Levels are easily filtered and volumes displayed.
Isosurface: RockWorks offers display of solid model values as isosurfaces or using all voxels.
What’s the difference? You might picture it like this:
In an isosurface diagram, the model’s G values are enclosed in a "skin" that’s almost like a 3-
dimensional contour. Within RockPlot3D you can interactively adjust the minimum value enclosed
within the isosurface contour. For example, if you have a geochemistry solid model of lead values,
and you wish to view the distribution of 5.23 ppb and above, you can set the isosurface contour level
at "5.23" and see the skin surrounding voxels with G values 5.23 and greater.
By contrast, in an all-voxel diagram, you’ll see color-coded voxels themselves, which usually look
more angular and blocky than isosurfaces. In RockPlot3D you can filter out both high and low
values from the display.
An isosurface diagram is to an all-voxel diagram like a 2D color contour map is to a color-coded
grid map.
Generally, you should display lithology models using All Voxels. You should display geochemistry
and geophysical models using Isosurfaces.

Latitude: Teamed up with longitude, you get a global coordinate system that utilizes meridians
(longitude) and parallels (latitude) to note specific points on the earth. Latitudes are measured north
and south of the equator. There are 180 degrees of latitudes measuring northward and southward;
subdivisions are noted in minutes (60/degree) and seconds (60/min). For mapping purposes,
RockWorks requires that these be noted as decimal degrees rather than as degrees, minutes and
seconds (see the Coords menu for tools). Northern and Southern latitudes are commonly
distinguished using the "North" or "South" notations or using a negative sign in front of Southern

343
Glossary RockWorks2004

coordinates; in RockWorks it is very important that you use the latter scheme. Thus, the longitude
coordinate at RockWorks headquarters in Golden, Colorado would be entered "39.748851".
Lithology Table: The Lithology Table is used to match lithology "keywords" in the Borehole
Manager's Lithology tab, such as "sand" or "limestone," to specific patterns and colors for
representation in logs, profiles, fence diagrams, and block models. It is also used to define rock
densities for mass computations, and “G” values for each rock type for solid modeling.
You should keep a separate Lithology Table in each project folder, with rock types and other
settings specific to each project.
The current Lithology Table can be accessed using the large "Tables" tab along the left side of
the program window. You can click on the Lithology Table name to view its contents, to edit
it, or to open a different Table. You can also access the Lithology Table via Borehole Manager
lithology data tabs, double-clicking in the "keyword" cell and clicking on the Lithology Table
button.
Longitude: Teamed up with latitude, you get a global coordinate system that utilizes meridians
(longitude) and parallels (latitude) to note specific points on the earth. Longitudes are measured east
and west of the prime meridian which runs through Greenwich, England. There are 180 degrees of
longitudes measuring eastward and westward; subdivisions are noted in minutes (60/degree) and
seconds (60/min). For mapping purposes, RockWorks requires that these be noted as decimal
degrees rather than as degrees, minutes and seconds (see the Coords menu for tools). Eastern and
Western longitudes are commonly distinguished using the "East" or "West" notations or using a
negative sign in front of Western coordinates; in RockWorks it is very important that you use the
latter scheme. Thus, the longitude coordinate at RockWorks headquarters in Golden, Colorado
would be entered "-105.210241".

Multi-Log Profile: This is a type of log section, previously referred to as a "projected log section,"
in which the logs of individual borings are "projected" onto a single section line cut. This type of
profile can display vertical, inclined, and deviated borehole logs. By projecting onto a profile line,
the orientation of the logs will be honored.

344
RockWorks2004 Glossary

In multi-log profiles, the distance between logs is determined by their perpendicular projection onto
the profile line. (This differs from hole-to-hole sections, in which the distance between the logs is
proportional to the well distances on the ground.) In RockWorks, drawing the section line is easily
done on a plan-view display of the well locations, or you can enter known coordinates for the
section endpoints. In addition, you can enter a filtering distance to limit the cross section to only
proximal wells. See 2D Log Profiles (page 129) and Laying Out Vertical Sections and Fences (page
173) for specifics.

Northing: Northings (also called the "Y" coordinate) represent the north/south dimension within a
Cartesian (xy) coordinate system. Northings to the north of the origin are entered as positive
numbers. Northings to the south of the origin are entered as negative numbers. Note:
X,Y,Z,TD,thickness,etc. data must all be in the same units (e.g. don't mix meters, feet, degrees,etc.).

Onlap: The Onlap option, available in Stratigraphy Profile, Modeled Section, Modeled Fence, and
Model tools, "fixes" models in which portions of an upper unit extend below the base of a lower
unit. In order for this program to work correctly, the sequence of formations within the stratigraphy
table must be listed from top to bottom (i.e. the younger formations at the top and the lower
formations at the base.

In the non-onlapped model above left, the dark blue unit extends above the pink unit and above the
base of the light blue. In addition, the green unit extends below the lower, yellow layer. Both result
in "interference" patterns in the stratigraphic model. In the onlapped version, to the right, the light
blue and pink units are set to to lie on top of the dark blue formation, and the green layer is set to lie
on top of the yellow.
If you are dealing with non-sequential stratigraphic units (which is NOT what the Stratigraphic
capabilities within RockWorks were designed for!), such as dikes, it is still possible to model the
geology by disabling the Onlap feature and plotting the model as a voxels-only diagram:

345
Glossary RockWorks2004

P-Data: This is the term we use to describe quantitative downhole data that was sampled at depth
points. This typically represents geophysical measurements (gamma, resistivity), but could also
include point concentrations, etc. In earlier versions of RockWorks, this was referred to as
"Geophysical" data, but it certainly is not limited to that. P-Data is entered into the Points (P-Data)
tabs in the Borehole Manager, where there are 249 columns available for different measurements.
P-Data can be represented on log diagrams as curves (2D) or cylinders/oblates (3D). P-Data can be
modeled into a 3D solid model using the P-Data menu tools and displayed graphically as a Profile
(single slice), Section (multi-paneled profile), Fence (3D panels), 3D solid or isosurface diagram,
and Plan map (horizontal slice). Levels are easily filtered and volumes displayed.
Project Folder: A Project Folder is a folder or directory on your computer or network in which
your work files will be read from and stored to. This includes data files that you create, as well as
intermediate files and output plot files. You can specify the project folder to work in upon program
launch. You can change project folders once inside RockWorks by clicking on the Project Folder
path on the main menu.
In the Borehole Manager, all of the individual borehole data files (BH) are read from the current
project folder. We recommend that you keep copies of your Stratigraphy and Lithology Tables in
your project folder as well. Any grid models, solid models, fence panels, and graphics files will also
be stored in the current project folder.
In the Geological Utilities datasheet, the program will read and store ATD files in the current project
folder. Grid and solid models, and graphics files will also be stored in the project folder.
You can use the same Project Folder for work in both the Borehole Manager and the Geological
Utilities.

RCL: Stands for “RockWare Command Language” and is a means of scripting the operation of
nearly all of the menu tools within RockWorks. The RCL processor can be launched using the
Geological Utilities Util / Compile RCL File menu command, using the Windows “Run” command
to launch RockWorks with a command line parameter that specifies the name of the RCL script file,
and by executing RockWorks from another Windows program with an RCL command line
parameter.
Right-Hand Rule: Convention whereby the dip direction is always 90-degrees clockwise from the
strike. In other words, if you're looking along the axis of a strike that is 45-degrees (N45E), the dip
will be 135-degrees (S45E), NOT 313 degrees (N45W). In other words, the dip direction is always
to the right of the strike.

346
RockWorks2004 Glossary

RKW Files: These are files created by the RockPlot2D plotting window in RockWorks for storing
2-dimensional (flat) images such as contour maps, ternary diagrams, 2D strip logs and cross
sections, etc. When you choose Open or Save in RockPlot2D, you'll be opening or saving files in
the RKW format. These are vector-based files, binary in format, and are specific to RockPlot2D.
Note that you can export from RockPlot2D to common image formats such as BMP, JPG, DXF, and
more. See page 257 for information.
RWR Files: These are files created by the ReportWorks window, where you can lay out pages with
RKW images, bitmaps, text, and more. These are binary files, specific to the ReportWorks window.
You can also export from ReportWorks to common image formats, such as metafiles, bitmaps, and
JPG images. See page 279 for information.

Solid Model: A solid model is a true 3-dimensional grid, in which a solid modeling algorithm is
used to extrapolate G values for fixed X (Easting), Y (Northing), and Z (elevation) coordinates. The
G values can represent geochemical concentrations, geophysical measurements, lithology rock
types, or any other spatially-related quantitative value. RockWorks solid models are stored in an
ASCII format. Solid models should have a “.mod” file name extension.
Use the Geological Utilities Solid / Model tool to create a solid model of XYZG data listed in the
general datasheet or an external ASCII file. The Solid menu also contains a variety of solid model
math, filtering, and editing tools.
If you have downhole data entered into the Borehole Manager, use the Lithology, I-Data, P-Data or
Fractures menu tools to create solid models of these data types. The models can be displayed as
profiles, multi-panel profiles or "sections," fence diagrams, plan maps, 3D isosurface or all-voxel
diagrams.
Stratigraphy Table: The Stratigraphy Table is used to match formation names in the Borehole
Manager's Stratigraphy tab, such as “Minnelusa Sandstone” or "Shale-1" to specific patterns and
colors for representation in logs, surfaces, profiles, fence diagrams, and block models. The Table
also contains other settings that control the pattern fill percent for the formations in strip logs, the
“G” value for the formation for stratigraphic models, and the density converter should you wish to
compute mass.
You should keep a separate Stratigraphy Table in each project folder, with names and other settings
specific to each project.
The current Stratigraphy Table can be accessed using the large "Tables" tab along the left side of the
program window. You can click on the Stratigraphy Table name to view its contents, to edit it, or to
open a different Table. You can also access the Stratigraphy Table via Borehole Manager
stratigraphy data tabs, double-clicking in the "formation" cell and clicking on the Stratigraphy Table
button.
Symbol Table: A Symbol Table is a RockWorks library of symbol designs, the dots and lines that
make up map symbols. To change the name of the default Symbol Table, to view the design library,
or to access the Symbol Editor, click on the large "Tables" tab along the left edge of the main
RockWorks program window, and double-click on the file name displayed to the right of the
"Symbols" row heading. You can also access the Symbol Table from the Borehole Manager's
Location tab (double-click on the displayed symbol) or from the Geological Utilities (double-click
on a symbol cell in a datasheet).

TEM File: Shorthand for "Template" file, this file type was used in RockWorks99 to lay out the
associated ATD datasheet. It listed the column names, the column types, whether the column
347
Glossary RockWorks2004

represented stratigraphy information and, if so, the pattern design, color, and percent fill for the
formation. RockWorks no longer saves this information in TEM files. It can, however, utilize the
TEM file information when importing borehole data from RockWorks99 files into the Borehole
Manager. It can also use the TEM file information when opening a RockWorks99 ATD file into the
Geological Utilities datasheet, storing the column title and column type information as a block of
header information in the new ATD file.
UTM Coordinates: Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinates are a global, Cartesian
coordinate system that is N-S and E-W grid-based. In the UTM system, a network of zones is used
to correct for errors when fitting the grid to the spherical Earth. These zones are defined by Central
Meridians. As a result, the regions between the zones are located less accurately than the areas close
to the meridians. Every USGS 7.5 minute topographical map depicts the UTM grid either as small,
blue tick-marks along the borders, or as thin, black lines across the map. The UTM x-coordinates
(called eastings) increase to the east, and the y-coordinates (northings) increase to the north. The
RockWorks coordinate conversions are based on a NAD27 (North American Datum, 1927). For
more choices on coordinate systems and datums, you might look at a program called Tralaine,
available through RockWare.
Advantages of using a UTM coordinate system: (1) The UTM distance units are consistent, unlike
longitude and latitude coordinates in which a degree of latitude is not equal to a degree of longitude
except on the equator. (2) Coordinates are reported as either feet or meters - an important distinction
in the Borehole Manager where you need to be sure your X,Y units match your depth units so that
computed volumes make sense. (3) It's a true Cartesian system - no need to insert a minus sign
before western or southern locations. (4) The coordinate numbers, though they can be large, are
easier to deal with than the degree/minute/second notations or 6-decimal-place notations of
longitude and latitude coordinates.
Disadvantages: (1) Some problems can arise when working in areas that overlap two zones. (2) The
grid is not exactly aligned along true north in many areas. These disadvantages are insignificant,
however, when compared with the simplicity and straightforward nature of the UTM system.

X: See Easting.
XML Files: This is the plot file format for files created in the RockPlot3D window to store the
information in a 3-dimensional graphic image (3D surfaces and logs, solid models, fence panels,
etc.). These are ASCII in format and contain links to grid models, solid models, bitmap images, etc.
that may be displayed in the RockPlot3D view. The file name extension is XML.

Y: See Northing.

348
RockWorks2004 Index

exporting................................... 66, 109, 337

Index importing ..........................................33, 108
ATD files .............................. 69, 313, 336, 339
attribute table...............................................305
3 AVI files..............................................269, 274
3D bitmaps.........................94, 95, 96, 228, 229 axes
3D cubes ............................................... 94, 229 displaying in RockPlot3D .......................265
3D discs ................................................ 93, 227 labeling ................................... 251, 334, 335
3D fences ....139, 140, 141, 151, 154, 157, 162, labels - N S E W .....................................265
166, 170, 176 scaling..................... 243, 246, 256, 286, 288
3D global maps ........................................... 125
3D images - plotting ................................... 259
B
3D isopach maps......................................... 122 bar chart maps .............................................113
3D models...143, 144, 152, 153, 154, 156, 161, batch............................................................238
165, 170 bearing
3D oriented objects ............................... 97, 230 computing from X1Y1X2Y2 data...........211
3D panels ........................................ 95, 96, 229 computing on screen display...................247
3D perimeter ............................................... 230 converting from quadrant........................218
3D spheres ............................................ 97, 231 converting to quadrant ............................218
3D striplogs................................................. 132 in downhole survey...................................41
3D surface maps ......................... 120, 121, 122 in fractures tab ..........................................51
3D tanks.......................................... 98, 99, 231 strike and dip data.....................................89
3D triangles......................................... 100, 232 bearing distance data .............................76, 223
3D tubes.............................................. 100, 233 Best Fit command .......................................243
3-Point computing .............................. 213, 238 beta intersections.........................................214
3-Point contouring ...................................... 213 beta pairs ...............................................92, 214
BH files .................................................36, 313
A bitmaps
absolute value as map backgrounds................................334
grid models............................................. 180 as panels.............................. 95, 96, 229, 259
abstracts ........................................ 22, 316, 339 converting ...............................................234
AGL files .................................................... 241 digitizing coordinates..............................235
anion data.............................. 88, 205, 206, 207 displaying in RockPlot2D .......................234
annotating plot files .................... 251, 252, 277 draped over surfaces .......................228, 259
anomalies multi-variate............................... 179 exporting................................. 257, 274, 279
appending plot files..................... 238, 252, 260 floating over surfaces......................228, 259
aquifer diagrams ......................................... 149 importing as grid models ........................185
Aquifer menu.............................................. 149 in diagram legends ..................................252
area in page layout..........................................277
computing from screen display....... 235, 247 in slide show ...................................101, 234
grid models..................................... 179, 319 inserting into ReportWorks.............287, 288
arithmetic operations on cubes ............................................94, 229
grid models............................................. 180 rotating....................................................235
solid models ........................................... 188 block diagrams ... 143, 144, 152, 154, 156, 161,
arrow maps ................................................. 209 165, 170
ASCII data .................................................. 339 BMP images
349
Index RockWorks2004

as map backgrounds................................334 C
as panels......................................95, 96, 229
converting ...............................................234 calibrate digitizer ........................................ 110
digitizing coordinates..............................235 cation data..............................88, 205, 206, 207
displaying in RockPlot2D .......................234 cell maps..................................................... 334
draped over surfaces ...............................228 central meridian .......................................... 339
exporting.........................................257, 279 certificate file................................................ 10
floating over surfaces..............................228 change licensing ........................................... 12
importing as grid models ........................185 clipping
in diagram legends ..................................252 grid models............................................. 181
in slide show ...................................101, 234 RockPlot2D images................................ 254
on cubes ............................................94, 229 solid models ........................................... 188
rotating....................................................235 Closest Point Gridding................................ 322
translating to JPG....................................234 Closest Point solid modeling ...................... 327
Boolean colors.............................................335 colindex.tab ........................................ 252, 302
Boolean filter Color Index Tables ............................. 252, 302
grid models .............................................181 color numbers ............................................. 237
solid models ............................................189 colored intervals
borders in 2D map layers .................................... 334
2D maps and diagrams....................251, 334 Colorfil.tab.................................................. 304
3D diagrams............................................335 Colorfill Tables........................................... 304
borehole locations entering ...........................39 colors
Borehole Manager .......................................339 in datasheet............................................. 102
ASCII file structure.................................337 in diagram legends ................................. 252
create new project .....................................35 columns
create new well .........................................36 computations with .................................... 56
data ...........................................................38 names ......................................... 46, 49, 102
exporting data ...........................................66 tools.................................................. 56, 108
Fractures tab..............................................51 types ....................................................... 102
Intervals I-Data tab ...................................46 combining
Lithology tab.......................................42, 57 RockPlot2D images........................ 252, 255
Location tab ..............................................39 RockPlot3D images................................ 260
maps................................................112, 117 compiled help ............................................... 22
open project ..............................................37 computations
Orientation tab ..........................................41 azimuth to quadrant................................ 218
overview ...................................................24 formation volume ................................... 197
Patterns tab ...............................................54 geometry................................................. 237
Points P-Data tab ......................................49 grid residuals .......................................... 179
processing of data ...................................318 grid statistics .......................................... 179
saving data ................................................38 ion balance ....................................... 88, 206
Stratigraphy tab..................... 44, 57, 60, 145 lineation bearings ..................... 91, 211, 247
Symbols tab ..............................................53 lineation lengths ....................... 91, 211, 247
transferring data ........................................66 lineation midpoints........................... 91, 211
using .........................................................34 movement analysis ........................... 92, 217
Water Levels tab .......................................52 normalizing data..................................... 222
Borehole Survey Table................................305 planar intersections..................... 89, 92, 214
break-even analysis .....................................237 polygon area ........................................... 247
polygon perimeter .................................. 247
quadrant to azimuth................................ 218
350
RockWorks2004 Index

random numbers..................................... 222 exporting...................................................66

rotating 3D data...................................... 215 fractures ....................................................51
solid model statistics .............................. 187 importing from ASCII ..............................33
standard deviations ................................. 222 importing from Excel................................33
strike & dip from 3 points ...................... 213 importing from RockWorks99 ..................32
strike to dip direction........................ 89, 216 Intervals I-Data tab ...................................46
total dissolved solids ........................ 88, 205 lithology..............................................42, 57
trigonometry ........................................... 238 log patterns ...............................................54
unit converter.......................................... 238 log symbols...............................................53
univariate statistics ................................. 219 managing ..................................................34
water level drawdown .............. 87, 203, 204 Points P-Data ............................................49
XYZ coordinates from survey data......... 223 stratigraphy ........................... 44, 57, 60, 145
contour maps............................... 114, 116, 117 transferring................................................66
Contour Tables ........................................... 304 water level.................................................52
contours data - Geological Utilities . 67, 69, 74, 317, 336
custom color intervals ............................ 304 3D cube image lists...................................94
custom intervals...................................... 304 3D discs ....................................................93
Delaunay ........................................ 115, 334 beta pairs data ...........................................92
from 3 points .......................................... 213 data layout.................................................74
in 2D map layers .................................... 334 digitizing.................................................110
Contours.tab................................................ 304 drawdown data..........................................87
Convert lon/lat coordinates to meters or feet255 editing the data........................................102
Convert menu ............................................. 191 exporting.................................................109
coordinates filtering the data......................................106
changing in RKW files ................... 253, 255 global points and polylines .................81, 83
converting in Borehole Manager ............ 125 grid lists ....................................................83
converting in the Geological Utilities..... 126 grid to log grid lists...................................85
copy ...................................................... 56, 108 horizontal panel image lists ......................95
cross sections horizontal tanks.........................................98
drawing................................................... 174 hydrochemistry ion data............................88
fractures.................................................. 171 hydrograph data ........................................87
I-data ...................................................... 163 importing ................................................108
lithology ................................................. 159 land grid lease descriptions.......................80
manually defining endpoints .................. 309 land grid well descriptions ........................79
P-data ..................................................... 167 lineation endpoint data..............................91
profiles ...129, 136, 149, 158, 163, 167, 171, multi-variate anomaly grid lists ................84
173 oriented objects.........................................97
strip logs ......................................... 130, 131 PicShow image lists ................................101
cubes ..................................................... 94, 229 shotpoint data............................................78
CUR files - importing ................................... 50 spheres ......................................................97
custom contour intervals............................. 304 strike and dip data.....................................89
cut ......................................................... 56, 108 survey data..........................................76, 77
ternary data ...............................................75
D transferring..............................................109
triangles ..................................................100
data - Borehole Manager..................... 317, 337
tubes........................................................100
borehole locations..................................... 39
vertical panel image lists...........................96
downhole survey ...................................... 41
vertical tanks.............................................99
entering..................................................... 38
XYZ data ..................................................74
351
Index RockWorks2004

XYZG data ...............................................86 discs 3D ................................................ 93, 227

data items in RockPlot3D............................266 distance computing on screen display......... 247
data window in RockPlot2D........................248 distance filter solid models ......................... 188
datasheets ....................................................317 distance to point gridding ........................... 322
DBF files Distance to Point solid modeling ................ 327
exporting.................................................109 DLG Attributes Table ................................. 305
importing ................................................108 DLG files.................................................... 241
declustering .........................................322, 328 downgradient vector map ........................... 183
default user ID...............................................11 downhole survey data ........................... 41, 225
degrees to UTM - RockPlot2D....................255 drape bitmaps.............................................. 228
Delaunay contouring ...........................115, 340 Draw menu - RockPlot2D .......................... 247
deleting boreholes .........................................36 drawdown ..................................... 87, 203, 204
DeLorme data..............................................108 drill hole survey .......................................... 225
DEM files importing ...................................185 drilled thickness calculator ......................... 238
density DXF files
patterns....................................................296 exporting ........................................ 186, 257
rock .........................................................310 importing.........................108, 212, 241, 273
density conversion
grid models .............................................180 E
solid model .............................................189
E00 files importing ..................................... 241
Density Factors Table..................................310
Easting .......................................................... 39
Density.tab ..................................................310
editing
describe rock ...............................................238
borehole data ............................................ 31
diagrams
Geological Utilities datasheet................. 102
drawdown surface ...................................204
grid models............................................. 182
frequency histograms ..............................220
patterns ................................................... 298
hydrographs ......................................87, 205
solid models ........................................... 193
Piper..................................................88, 206
symbols .................................................. 301
plotting....................................................239
elevation of borehole .................................... 39
rose .............................................89, 91, 212
elog data ....................................................... 49
stereonet............................................89, 215
EMF images
Stiff ...................................................88, 207
as map backgrounds ............................... 334
ternary plots ............................................221
exporting ................................................ 257
water level drawdown .......................87, 203
entering data ........................................... 31, 67
XY scattergrams .....................................221
ENZ files .................................................... 186
Digital Line Graph files.......................241, 305
Erase Log...................................................... 36
digitizer driver.............................................110
ESRI E00 files importing............................ 241
digitizing
ESRI grid models
from bitmaps on screen...........................235
exporting ................................................ 186
from RockPlot2D....................................247
importing................................................ 185
using an electronic digitizer ..............56, 110
ESRI Shapefiles
dimensions ..................................................319
exporting ................................ 139, 140, 274
gridding...................................................324
importing................................................ 241
RockPlot3D view....................................263
Excel files
solid modeling ........................................329
exporting .......................................... 66, 109
directional maps ..........................................183
importing.......................................... 33, 108
directional weighting gridding ....................322
export.......................................................... 315
directional weighting solid modeling ..........327
ASCII ................................66, 109, 147, 337
Dirstat menu................................................209
352
RockWorks2004 Index

AVI................................................. 269, 274 formation name .............................................44

BMP ....................................... 257, 274, 279 formation volume ........................................197
Borehole Manager ............................ 66, 337 formations missing ........................................60
DBF........................................................ 109 fracture diagrams.........................................169
DXF................................................ 186, 257 fences..............................................170, 176
EMF ....................................................... 257 plan map .................................................172
ENZ........................................................ 186 profiles............................................171, 173
ESRI grid models ................................... 186 sections ...........................................171, 174
Excel......................................... 66, 109, 337 solid models............................................170
Geological Utilities datasheet................. 109 Fractures tab............................................38, 51
grid models............................................. 186 frequency histograms ..................................220
GXF........................................................ 186 grid node values......................................179
JPG ......................................... 257, 274, 279 solid model node values..........................187
NOeSYS................................................. 195
SHP ........................................................ 274 G
Slicer Dicer............................................. 195
general preferences..............................316, 318
solid models ........................................... 195
geochemistry data..........................................46
stratigraphy as XYZ data........................ 147
geological time chart ...................................237
Surfer...................................................... 186
Geological Utilities datasheet..... 25, 67, 69, 74,
WMF ...................................................... 257
102, 106, 108, 109, 336, 340
XLS .................................................. 66, 109
geology map........................................142, 159
XML....................................................... 257
geometry calculator.....................................237
Extract Grid from Model ............................ 191
geophysics data .............................................49
extracting solid models ............................... 199
Geosoft files
EZ Map....................................... 113, 116, 334
exporting grid models to .........................186
EZ Volume ................................................. 197
importing ................................................185
F geotechnical data...........................................46
Geotechnical menu......................................209
Fault Segment Table ................................... 305 GIF images
fence diagrams as map backgrounds................................334
creating...139, 140, 141, 151, 154, 157, 162, global maps .....................................81, 83, 125
166, 170 Grafix menu ................................................227
displaying ....................... 259, 263, 266, 272 graphic font .................................................317
drawing panels........................................ 176 GRD files ....................................................313
in page layout ......................................... 277 GRD files – see also grid models ................313
legends ................................................... 335 Grid & Constant Math.................................180
manually defining endpoints .................. 309 Grid & Grid Math........................................180
reference cage......................................... 335 grid list files ..................................................83
file type summary ....................................... 313 Grid menu ...................................................179
filter grid models..................................................340
Geological Utilities datasheet................. 106 arithmetic operations...............................180
grid models............................................. 181 creating ................................... 120, 204, 210
solid models ........................................... 188 density conversion ..................................180
XYZG data for solid models .................. 329 dimensions ......................................319, 324
Finance utilities........................................... 237 displaying as stacked surfaces ................121
flat surface .................................................. 335 editing .....................................................182
float bitmaps ............................................... 228 exporting.................................................186
font.............................................................. 317 extracting from solid models ..................191
353
Index RockWorks2004

filtering ...................................................181 Hydrochemistry menu ................................ 203

filtering solid models with ......................188 hydrographs .......................................... 87, 205
format .....................................................325 Hydrology menu ................................. 149, 203
importing ................................................185
node values posted on a 2D map.............334 I
observed v computed scattergram...........179
I-data..................................................... 46, 343
residuals ..................................................179
I-data diagrams ........................................... 161
slope aspect analysis ...............................182
fences ............................................. 162, 176
statistics ..................................................179
plan map................................................. 164
tools ........................................................179
profiles ................................... 163, 173, 334
grid residuals ...............................................179
sections........................................... 163, 174
grid statistics ...............................................179
solid models ........................................... 161
grid to log grid list files .................................85
I-data legend ....................................... 334, 335
Grid-Based Map ..................................116, 120
igneous rock identification.......................... 238
gridding ...............................................115, 321
import ......................................................... 315
declustering.............................................322
AGL ....................................................... 241
dimensions ......................................319, 324
ASCII ....................................... 33, 108, 194
high fidelity.............................................323
BMP ....................................................... 185
logarithmic..............................................323
DBF........................................................ 108
methods...................................115, 321, 322
DeLorme ................................................ 108
options ....................................................322
DEM....................................................... 185
overview .........................................115, 321
DLG ....................................................... 241
polyenhancement ....................................322
DXF................................................ 108, 241
smoothing filter.......................................323
DXF files........................................ 212, 273
group settings - RockPlot3D .......................272
E00 ......................................................... 241
GSM Data ...................................................108
Excel ................................................ 33, 108
GXF files
grid models............................................. 185
exporting grid model to...........................186
GSM-19.................................................. 108
importing ................................................185
GXF........................................................ 185
H JPG......................................................... 185
Laser Atlanta .......................................... 108
hanging cross sections.........................131, 341 LogPlot data ............................................. 21
Hardware Acceleration................................275 menu settings.......................................... 318
height estimator...........................................238 ModPath Pathline ................................... 108
help....................................................2, 22, 316 plot files.................................................. 241
Help / Tutorial ...............................................22 RockBase ............................................... 108
high fidelity .................................................323 RockWorks99........................................... 32
HIS files - importing .....................................48 SEG-P1 .................................................. 108
histogram plot .............................................220 Shapefiles ............................................... 241
hole to hole cross sections ... 130, 131, 174, 341 solid models ........................................... 194
hole to hole fence diagrams.........140, 176, 342 Surfer...................................................... 185
horizontal biasing solid modeling ...............327 XLS .................................................. 33, 108
horizontal bitmap panels ...............................95 inclination
horizontal lithoblending solid modeling......327 in dowhole survey .................................... 41
horizontal tanks .....................................98, 231 in fractures tab.......................................... 51
HTML help ...........................................22, 316 initialize solid model................................... 195
hybrid gridding............................................322 Insert Grid into Model ................................ 191
hydrochemistry ion data ........ 88, 205, 206, 207 installation number ..................................... 8, 9
354
RockWorks2004 Index

installing RockWorks ................................. 2, 4 in 2D map layers.....................................334

interpolate points along a line ..................... 224 land grid lease descriptions ........... 80, 124, 126
Intervals I-Data tab ................... 38, 46, 48, 318 land grid maps.....................................123, 124
inverse distance gridding ............................ 322 Land Grid Tables.........................................306
inverse distance solid modeling .................. 327 land grid well descriptions ............ 79, 125, 126
ion balance.................................................. 206 Laser Atlanta survey data............................108
ion data ................................. 88, 205, 206, 207 layers...........................................................282
isopach thickness maps............... 119, 122, 151 lease analysis...............................................237
isosurfaces lease maps ...................................................124
creating........................... 154, 161, 165, 170 leases.....................................................80, 126
displaying ....................................... 259, 268 legends ........................................ 273, 334, 335
in page layout ......................................... 277 adding to a RockPlot2D image ...............252
slicing ............................................. 268, 271 color index tables....................................302
Isosurfaces .................................................. 343 Line Style Index Tables ..........................303
Pattern Index Tables ...............................303
J Symbol Index Tables ..............................303
license types ..............................................5, 10
Jeffersonian points to XY ................... 126, 306
licensee name ..............................................8, 9
Jeffersonian polygons to XY .............. 126, 306
limit filter - grid models ..............................181
JPG images
Line Style Index Tables.......................252, 303
as map backgrounds ............................... 334
Linears menu...............................................209
as panels ..................................... 95, 96, 229
lineations
converting............................................... 234
arrow maps .............................................209
digitizing coordinates ............................. 235
computing bearing length midpoint from
displaying in RockPlot2D....................... 234
data .....................................................211
draped over surfaces............................... 228
densities ..................................................210
exporting ................................ 257, 274, 279
importing from DXF...............................212
floating over surfaces ............................. 228
intersections ............................................210
importing as grid models ........................ 185
lengths.............................................210, 211
in diagram legends.................................. 252
line endpoint data......................................91
in slide show................................... 101, 234
lineation maps.................................210, 211
inserting into ReportWorks ............ 287, 288
rose diagrams ..........................................212
on 3D cubes.............................................. 94
rotating....................................................215
on cubes.................................................. 229
stereonet diagrams ..................................215
rotating ................................................... 235
strike and dip data.....................................89
translate to BMP..................................... 234
lines
K digitizing.................................................110
digitizing on screen.........................247, 284
keyboard shortcuts ........................................ 29 in datasheet .............................................102
keyword ........................................................ 42 in diagram legends ..................................252
Keyword Tables.......................................... 293 measuring bearing on screen...................247
keywords.tab............................................... 293 measuring length on screen.....................247
kriging......................................................... 322 Linindex.tab ........................................252, 303
LIT files - importing......................................43
L lithology diagrams...............................127, 155
fences..............................................157, 176
labeled cell maps......................................... 334
plan map .................................................160
labels........................................................... 334
profiles............................................158, 173
contour ................................................... 334
sections ...........................................159, 174
355
Index RockWorks2004

solid model .............................................156 plotting ........................................... 239, 259

surface map.............................................159 section .................................................... 123
lithology files - importing..............................43 shotpoint................................................. 124
lithology legend...................................334, 335 slope ....................................................... 183
Lithology menu ...........................................155 spherical ................................................. 125
Lithology tab ...............................38, 42, 43, 57 starburst.................................................. 113
Lithology Tabe ............................................344 stratigraphic structure..................... 122, 268
Lithology Table.....................................42, 293 stratigraphic thickness ............................ 268
lithology to I-data ..........................................47 stratigraphy..................................... 142, 143
lithology versus stratigraphy .........................57 strike and dip .................................. 183, 216
lithology volume .........................................200 surface .................................... 120, 121, 268
loan analysis................................................237 survey ..................................................... 223
locate closest point ......................................250 symbols maps ......................................... 113
Location tab.............................................38, 39 water level surface.......................... 151, 268
log compilation............................................318 mathematical operations
log patterns....................................................54 grid models............................................. 180
log profile....................................128, 129, 173 solid models ........................................... 188
log symbols ...................................................53 maximum total waste thickness .................. 189
logarithmic gridding....................................323 Measure menu - RockPlot2D...................... 247
logos in diagram legends.............................252 measurements on screen ............................. 247
LogPlot keywords .......................................293 menu buttons .............................................. 317
LogPlot to RockWorks Importer ...................21 menu dimensions ........................................ 317
logs...................... 127, 128, 129, 130, 131, 132 menu setting summaries ............................. 317
in page layout..........................................277 menus...................................................... 28, 29
plotting............................................239, 259 menusettings.ini.......................................... 318
longitude latitude...........................39, 125, 126 minimum area filter - grid models .............. 181
minimum ore zone thickness ...................... 189
M minimum total ore thickness....................... 189
missing formations ....................................... 60
map thickness calculator .............................238
MOD files................................................... 313
maps ............................................................111
MOD files – see also solid models ............. 313
2D map layers .........................................334
model resolution ................................. 319, 329
3-point contour........................................213
models
bar chart ..................................................113
aquifer .................................................... 152
borehole maps.................................112, 117
fractures.................................................. 170
cell maps .................................................334
I-data ...................................................... 161
contour .................... 114, 116, 117, 118, 119
lithology ................................................. 156
contours ..................................................334
P-data ..................................................... 165
cylindrical world .....................................125
plotting ................................................... 259
EZ maps..................................................334
solid................................................ 153, 154
flow.........................................................183
stratigraphy..................................... 143, 144
grid-based maps ......................................334
ModPath Pathline data................................ 108
in page layout..........................................277
montage ...................................................... 255
land grid..................................................123
Montage Table............................................ 308
lease ........................................................124
morph
lineations.................................209, 210, 211
solid models ................................... 194, 269
lithology..........................................159, 160
movement analysis ............................... 92, 217
pie chart ..................................................113
multi-log 3-D .............................................. 132
plan .........................................164, 168, 172
multi-log profile...................128, 129, 173, 344
356
RockWorks2004 Index

multi-log section ................................. 131, 174 PAT files .....................................................314

multiple linear regression gridding ..... 305, 322 Patindex.tab.........................................252, 303
multiple-user single-computer license ........ 6, 8 Pattern Editor ..............................................298
multivariate anomalies................................ 179 Pattern Index Tables............................252, 303
multi-variate anomaly grid list files .............. 84 Pattern Tables.............. 282, 295, 296, 298, 314
multivariate maps........................................ 113 patterns
in datasheet .............................................102
N in diagram legends .................. 252, 334, 335
in Lithology Table ..................................293
navigation rose............................................ 245
in Stratigraphy Table ..............................294
negative values ........................................... 318
Patterns tab..............................................38, 54
network of triangles in EZ map................... 334
P-data ..........................................................346
network user mode...................................... 6, 9
P-data diagrams...........................................165
new
fences..............................................166, 176
borehole.................................................... 36
plan map .................................................168
Borehole Manager project ........................ 35
profiles.................................... 167, 173, 334
Geological Utilities datasheet................... 69
sections ...........................................167, 174
ReportWorks window............................. 278
solid models............................................165
RockPlot2D window .............................. 239
P-data legend.......................................334, 335
RockPlot3D window .............................. 259
Pennsylvania coordinate offsets ..................126
New Log ....................................................... 36
perimeter
NOeSYS ..................................................... 195
around 3D images ...................................230
normalize filter
around 3D surfaces .................................335
datasheet................................................. 222
measuring on screen................................247
grid models............................................. 181
periodic table...............................................238
Northing........................................................ 39
Pick Contacts...............................................145
O PicShow ..............................................101, 234
pie chart maps .............................................113
onlap ........................................................... 345 Piper diagrams.............................................206
OpenGL ...................................................... 275 plan map...... 143, 151, 154, 160, 164, 168, 172
opening plan maps – see also contour maps..............114
Borehole Manager projects....................... 37 planar data ............................. 92, 214, 215, 227
Geological Utilities datasheet............. 70, 71 Planes menu ................................................209
plot files.................................. 239, 240, 260 plot files
R3D files ........................................ 260, 274 adjusting reference & data items.............265
ReportWorks document.......................... 278 annotating .......................................251, 252
RKW files....................................... 239, 240 clipping ...................................................254
XML files ....................................... 260, 274 combining ............................... 252, 255, 260
Ore Thickness -> Grid ................................ 191 converting coordinates............................255
orientation marker....................................... 265 exporting................................. 257, 274, 279
Orientation tab ........................................ 38, 41 importing ................................................241
oriented objects..................................... 97, 230 inserting into ReportWorks.....................286
Overburden Thickness -> Grid ................... 191 opening ................................... 239, 240, 260
printing ...........................................256, 279
P rescaling..................................................253
saving...................................... 241, 261, 279
page layout.................................................. 281
PNG images
Page Setup command.................................. 279
as map backgrounds................................334
paste...................................................... 56, 108
point maps...........................................111, 334
357
Index RockWorks2004

points rotating ................................................... 263

digitizing.................................................110 saving ..................................................... 261
digitizing on screen.................................247 screen scaling ......................................... 263
Points P-Data tab....................... 38, 49, 50, 318 spinning.................................................. 263
polar coordinates .........................................126 viewing................................................... 263
Polyclip.tab .................................................309 rake data ..................................................... 215
polygon clipping..........................181, 188, 309 random numbers ......................................... 222
Polygon Vertices Tables..............................309 range filter
polygons grid models............................................. 181
digitizing on screen.................................284 solid models ........................................... 188
drawing on the screen display.................247 Range Tables .............................................. 304
measuring area on screen ........................247 Range Township Section conversion... 79, 126,
measuring perimeter on screen ...............247 306
polylines Range Township Section coordinates ......... 125
digitizing on screen.........................247, 284 raster images
polylines -> planes ......................................217 displaying in RockPlot3D .............. 228, 229
polynomial enhancement.............................322 inserting into ReportWorks ............ 287, 288
precipitation versus water level .............87, 205 RCL .................................................... 238, 346
preferences ..........................................316, 318 rectangles
Print Setup command ..........................256, 281 digitizing on screen ................................ 284
printing reference cage settings................................ 335
from ReportWorks ..................................279 reference grid in RockPlot3D ..................... 265
from RockPlot2D....................................256 registration number............................... 8, 9, 10
Geological Utilities datasheet ...................73 reminders .................................................... 316
profiles report
drawing ...................................................173 grid statistics .......................................... 179
fractures ..................................................171 solid model statistics .............................. 187
I-data...............................................163, 334 ReportWorks
lithology..................................................158 drawing items ......................................... 284
P-data ..............................................167, 334 drawing lines .......................................... 283
solid model .............................................154 exporting files......................................... 279
stratigraphy .............................................136 inserting raster images.................... 287, 288
strip logs .........................................128, 129 inserting RockPlot2D images ................. 286
water level...............................................149 inserting scalebars .................................. 289
project dimensions ................ 26, 319, 324, 329 inserting text........................................... 285
project folder ...................................35, 37, 316 introduction ...................................... 28, 277
Project Folder ..............................................346 layers ...................................................... 282
new document ........................................ 278
Q open document ....................................... 278
page layout ............................................. 281
quadrant
page units ............................................... 281
converting from azimuth bearing ............218
printing files ........................................... 279
converting to azimuth bearing.................218
saving files ............................................. 279
R resample........................................................ 56
rescaling
R3D files .....................................................314 datasheet coordinates.............................. 126
adjusting reference & data items.............265 RockPlot2D images................................ 253
combining ...............................................260 residuals...................................... 179, 184, 322
opening ...........................................260, 274 resize windows ........................................... 242
358
RockWorks2004 Index

resizing BMP images .................................. 234 introduction.......................................27, 259

RGB -> Windows colors............................. 237 isosurface settings ...................................268
right hand rule............................................. 346 manipulating images ...............................265
RKW files ........................................... 313, 347 opening files ...................................260, 274
annotating....................................... 251, 252 reference items........................................265
clipping................................................... 254 resizing the window ................................263
combining....................................... 252, 255 rotating the view .....................................263
converting coordinates ........................... 255 saving files..............................................261
displaying bitmaps.................................. 234 solid model settings ................................270
exporting ................................................ 257 spinning the view....................................263
inserting into ReportWorks .................... 286 surface settings........................................268
opening........................................... 239, 240 troubleshooting ...............................274, 275
printing ................................................... 256 zoom in and out of screen display...........263
rescaling ................................................. 253 RockWorks
saving ..................................................... 241 menus........................................................28
screen scaling ................................. 243, 246 running in batch mode ............................238
viewing................................................... 242 RockWorks/7
RockBase data ............................................ 108 exporting grid model to...........................186
RockPlot2D importing grid models.............................185
adding borders ........................................ 251 RockWorks2002 users...................................20
adding legends........................................ 252 RockWorks2004
clipping images ...................................... 254 file type summary ...................................313
combining images .......................... 252, 255 help .............................................................2
converting coordinates ........................... 255 installation ..............................................2, 4
data window ........................................... 248 license types..........................................5, 10
digitizing on screen ................................ 247 menu buttons...........................................317
drawing items ......................................... 247 menu setting summaries..........................317
exporting files......................................... 257 program preferences .......................316, 318
image scaling in window ................ 243, 246 starting up .........................................10, 316
importing files ........................................ 241 system requirements ...................................2
introduction ...................................... 27, 239 uninstalling ...............................................12
measurements ......................................... 247 window dimensions ................................317
navigation rose ....................................... 245 RockWorks99 users ........ 20, 32, 43, 48, 50, 69
opening files ................................... 239, 240 rose diagrams ..............................................212
printing files ........................................... 256 rotate
rescaling image coordinates ................... 253 bitmaps ...................................................235
resizing the window................................ 242 RockPlot3D view....................................263
saving files ............................................. 241 strike and dip data...................................215
viewing plot files .................................... 242 X Y data..................................................126
zoom in and out of screen display .......... 245 round filter - grid models ............................181
RockPlot3D rows arranging...............................................56
accessing ................................................ 259 RW_pat.pat .........................................282, 295
adding legends........................................ 273 RW_sym.sym......................................282, 299
combining files....................................... 260 RWR files............................................314, 347
data items ............................................... 266 exporting.................................................279
exporting files......................................... 274 opening ...................................................278
fence panel settings ................................ 272 printing ...................................................279
group settings ......................................... 272
image scaling in window ........................ 263
359
Index RockWorks2004

S Single Log (2D) .......................................... 128

single log 3D............................................... 132
saving single-user license....................................... 6, 7
Borehole Manager data .............................38 Slicer Dicer................................................. 195
Geological Utilities datasheet ...................72 slicing solid models .................... 268, 270, 271
plot files ..................................241, 261, 279 slide show ........................................... 101, 234
R3D files.................................................261 slope aspect analysis ........................... 182, 183
RKW files ...............................................241 smooth filter
RWR files ...............................................279 grid models..................................... 181, 323
XML files ...............................................261 solid models ........................................... 188
zip files ...................................................262 Software Acceleration ................................ 275
scalebars Solid menu.................................................. 187
inserting into ReportWorks.....................289 solid modeling
on maps...................................................334 declustering ............................................ 328
scaling dimensions ..................................... 319, 329
changing in RWK files............................253 filtering input data .................................. 329
printing ReportWorks images .................281 overview......................................... 153, 326
printing RockPlot2D images...................256 stratabound ............................................. 328
screen display in RockPlot2D .........243, 246 solid modeling methods.............................. 327
screen display in RockPlot3D .................263 closest point............................................ 327
scattergram directional weighting.............................. 327
datasheet values ......................................221 distance to point ..................................... 327
grid node values......................................179 horizontal biasing ................................... 327
screened intervals ..........................................54 horizontal lithoblending ......................... 327
searchable help ..............................................22 inverse distance ...................................... 327
section maps................................................123 solid models................................................ 347
sections........................................................174 arithmetic operations ...................... 187, 188
drawing ...................................................174 computing statistics ................................ 187
fractures ..................................................171 creating................................................... 154
I-data.......................................................163 displaying ........................259, 266, 268, 270
lithology..................................................159 editing .................................................... 193
manually defining endpoints...................309 exporting ........................................ 187, 195
multi-log .........................................131, 174 extracting grid models from ................... 191
P-data ......................................................167 filtering................................... 187, 188, 189
solid model .............................................154 importing........................................ 187, 194
stratigraphy .....................................136, 137 in page layout ......................................... 277
water level...............................................150 initialize new .......................................... 195
SEG-P1 files..........................................78, 108 legends ................................................... 335
seismic shotpoint maps................................124 modeling methods .................................. 327
select pattern window..................................296 morphing ........................................ 194, 269
select symbol window .................................300 overview......................................... 153, 326
setup XY stations ........................................224 pit extraction .......................................... 199
Shapefiles plan maps ............................... 164, 168, 172
exporting.................................139, 140, 274 profiles ....................158, 163, 167, 171, 173
importing ................................................241 reference cage......................................... 335
sharpening BMP images..............................234 sections....................159, 163, 167, 171, 174
shift datasheet coordinates...........................126 slicing..................................... 268, 270, 271
Shotpoint Data.......................................78, 224 smoothing............................................... 188
shotpoint maps ............................................124 statistics.................................................. 187
360
RockWorks2004 Index

volume.................................................... 202 Striplogs menu ............................................127

sphere maps .................................... 81, 83, 125 stripping ratio filter .....................................189
spheres Structural Elevations / 2-Dimensional.........118
plotting in RockPlot3D..................... 97, 231 Structural Elevations / 3-Dimensional.........122
spin RockPlot3D view ................................ 263 summary of well data ....................................55
standard deviations surface maps
datasheet................................................. 222 creating ................................... 122, 149, 151
grid models............................................. 181 in page layout..........................................277
starburst maps ............................................. 113 legends....................................................335
starting up RockWorks ......................... 10, 316 reference cage .........................................335
statistics viewing ................................... 259, 266, 268
grid models............................................. 179 Surfer grid models
solid models ........................................... 187 exporting.................................................186
univariate................................................ 219 importing ................................................185
Stats menu................................................... 219 survey data .............................. 76, 77, 108, 223
stereonet diagrams ...................................... 215 survey downhole ...................................41, 225
Stiff diagrams ............................................. 207 survey maps.................................................223
storage tanks ................................... 98, 99, 231 Survey menu ...............................................223
stratabounding ............................................ 328 Survey Table ...............................................305
stratigraphic models SYM files ....................................................314
creating........................................... 143, 144 Symbol Editor .............................................301
reference................................................. 331 symbol for borehole ......................................39
Stratigraphic Thickness / 2-Dimensional .... 119 Symbol Index Tables...........................252, 303
Stratigraphic Thickness / 3-Dimensional .... 122 symbol maps ...............................................113
stratigraphy data - exporting ....................... 147 Symbol Range Tables .................................304
stratigraphy diagrams.................. 127, 135, 335 Symbol Table ...... 282, 299, 300, 301, 314, 347
fences ............................. 139, 140, 141, 176 symbols
isopach maps .................................. 119, 122 in 2D map layers.....................................334
plan map ................................................. 143 in Borehole Manager ................................39
profiles ........................................... 136, 173 in datasheet .............................................102
sections................................... 136, 137, 174 in diagram legends ..................................252
solid model ............................................. 143 inserting on page.....................................283
structure maps ........................................ 118 log.............................................................53
surface map ............................................ 142 variable size ............................................304
surfaces................................................... 122 Symbols tab.............................................38, 53
stratigraphy legend...................................... 335 Symindex.tab.......................................252, 303
Stratigraphy menu....................................... 135 SymRange.tab .............................................304
Stratigraphy tab............38, 44, 57, 60, 145, 147 system requirements........................................2
Stratigraphy Table ........................ 44, 294, 347
stratigraphy versus lithology......................... 57 T
stratigraphy volume ............................ 147, 201
TAB files.....................................................314
Stretch command ........................................ 243
tables .............................................................26
strike -> dip direction.................................. 216
Color Index .............................................302
strike and dip
Colorfill ..................................................304
computing from 3 points ........................ 213
Contour ...................................................304
strike and dip computing from 3 points ...... 213
DLG Attributes .......................................305
strike and dip data......................................... 89
Fault Segments........................................305
strike and dip map....................................... 216
Keyword .................................................293
strip logs ......127, 128, 129, 130, 131, 132, 335
361
Index RockWorks2004

Land Grid................................................306 tutorials................................................. 22, 316

Line Style Index......................................303
Lithology ..........................................42, 293 U
Montage ..................................................308
uninstalling RockWorks ............................... 12
Pattern............................. 282, 295, 296, 298
unit converter.............................................. 238
Pattern Index...........................................303
units ...................................................... 39, 281
Polygon Vertices.....................................309
univariate statistics ..................................... 219
Stratigraphy.......................................44, 294
unlocking code............................................ 8, 9
survey .....................................................305
upgradient vector map ................................ 183
Symbol............................ 282, 299, 300, 301
Util menu - Geological Utilities.................. 237
Symbol Index..........................................303
UTM coordinates.......................... 39, 125, 126
Symbol Range.........................................304
UTM to degrees - RockPlot2D ................... 255
X,Y Pairs ................................................309
X,Y Points ..............................................309 V
tanks ................................................98, 99, 231
TEM file......................................................347 vertical bitmap panels ........................... 96, 229
ternary diagrams....................................75, 221 vertical exaggeration........................... 246, 263
text vertical exaggeration calculator .................. 238
in datasheet .............................................102 vertical panel image lists .............................. 96
in ReportWorks.......................................285 vertical tanks......................................... 99, 231
thickness maps ............................119, 122, 151 View Columns ............................................ 102
TIFF images viewing plot files ................................ 242, 263
as map backgrounds................................334 viewing RockPlot3D Files .......................... 263
inserting into ReportWorks.............287, 288 Visible Items............................................... 317
total depth for borehole .................................39 VistaPro - exporting grid models to............ 186
total dissolved solids ...................................205 volume
Township Range Section conversion ...79, 126, computing............................... 147, 197, 199
306 displaying in RockPlot3D .............. 268, 270
Township Range Section coordinates..........125 formation................................................ 201
transfer lithology zones ....................................... 200
boreholes to geological utilities ................66 solid models ........................................... 202
geological utilities to boreholes ..............109
translating map coordinates.........................125 W
transparency ........................................265, 266
water level diagrams ............149, 150, 151, 152
trend surface analysis ..................................184
water level drawdown................... 87, 203, 204
trend surface gridding..................................322
water level versus precipitation ............ 87, 205
trend surface residuals gridding...................322
Water Levels tab..................................... 38, 52
trialware mode.................................................7
well data summary........................................ 55
triangles
wintab32.dll ................................................ 110
plotting in RockPlot3D ...................100, 232
WMF images
plotting on EZ Maps ...............................334
as map backgrounds ............................... 334
triangulation gridding..................................322
exporting ................................................ 257
triangulation network ..................................334
world outlines ............................................. 265
triangulation survey...............................77, 223
trigonometry calculator ...............................238 X
trilinear diagrams ........................................221
troubleshooting............................................274 X,Y Pairs tables .......................................... 309
true dip calculator........................................238 X,Y Points tables ........................................ 309
tubes ....................................................100, 233 X1Y1X2Y2 data ........................................... 91
362
RockWorks2004 Index

XLS files XY scattergram

exporting .................................. 66, 109, 337 datasheet values ......................................221
importing .......................................... 33, 108 grid node values......................................179
XML files ........................................... 314, 348 XY stations..................................................224
adjusting reference & data items ............ 265 XYZ data............................... 74, 110, 147, 223
combining............................................... 260 XYZ location of boreholes ............................39
exporting ................................................ 257 XYZG data....................................................86
opening........................................... 260, 274
rotating ................................................... 263 Z
saving ..................................................... 261
zip files - saving ..........................................262
screen scaling ......................................... 263
zoom in/out of screen display..............243, 263
spinning .................................................. 263
viewing................................................... 263

363